construction specification lb-spec-000176 › labadie › docs › labadieuwlfphase1aspecs... ·...

GEN-TMP-ADM3207-01, rev. 6

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION LB-SPEC-000176

FOR

UTILITY WASTE LANDFILL

CELL 1 AND POND 1 – PHASE 1A

AT

LABADIE ENERGY CENTER

Prepared by Reitz & Jens, Inc.

for

Rev Date Revisions Originator Reviewer Approver

0 5/06/2015 DRAFT for Review Reitz & Jens MJW

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. INDEX - 1


I N D E X

SECTION SECTION TITLE SHEET #

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1A SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 1A-1 to 10

1.0 General 1A-2

2.0 Definitions 1A-2

3.0 Intent of Specifications and Drawings 1A-3

4.0 Bench Marks 1A-3

5.0 Drawings, Details & Instructions Provided by Contractor 1A-3

6.0 Labor Conditions 1A-3 to 4

7.0 Contractor Management Requirements 1A-4 to 5

8.0 Delivery and Storage 1A-5 to 6

9.0 Removals and Preparatory Work 1A-7

10.0 Cutting, Patching & Temporary Buildings 1A-7

11.0 Temporary Heat 1A-7

12.0 Quality Requirements 1A-7 to 8

13.0 Owner Approval of Procedure 1A-8

14.0 Confidentiality 1A-8

15.0 Accounting / Invoicing Requirements / ACIP 1A-8 to 10

1B SUMMARY OF WORK 1B-1 to 7

1.0 Introduction 1B-1 to 2

2.0 Summary of Phase 1A Work 1B-2 to 4

3.0 Schedule Milestones 1B-4

4.0 Company Drawings 1B-4

5.0 Work, Materials and Equipment Supplied by Company 1B-5

6.0 Work, Materials and Equipment Supplied by Contractor 1B-5

7.0 Utilities and Facilities 1B-5

8.0 Recording of Historical Data 1B-5

9.0 Contractor's Field Safety Program 1B-5 to 6

10.0 Participation in Coordination Activities 1B-6

11.0 Contractor's Cost Tracking Program 1B-6

12.0 General Information 1B-6

13.0 Plant Engineering Inspections and Extra Work Orders 1B-6 to 7

1C INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM BIDDERS 1C-1 to 2

1D GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1D-1 to 3

01300 SUBMITTALS 01300-1 to 4

01320 SCHEDULES 01320-1 to 2

01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500-1 to 3

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK




02100 SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION 02100-1 to 3

02200 EARTHWORK 02200-1 to 4

02220 CLAY LINER TEST PAD 02220-1 to 2

02511 CRUSHED STONE PAVING 02511-1 to 3

02535 CULVERTS 02535-1

02625 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PROGRAM (SWPPP) 02625-1 to 4

02820 GUARDRAILS 02820-1 to 2

02831 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT FENCES 02831-1 to 3

02891 PERMANENT SIGNS 02891-1 to 2

02936 PERMANENT SEEDING 02936-1 to 5

DIVISIONS 3 – CONCRETE

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 to 4

03600 LABADIE BOTTOM ROAD OVERPASS 03600-1 to 3

Attachment 1 – Logs of Borings, CPT Soundings, Geologic Borings 03600-4 to 23

03610 MECHANICALLY-STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS 03610-1 to 4

APPENDICES

A SAFETY AND CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A-1 to 46

1.0 General Contractor Safety Requirements A-1 to 7

2.0 Workman’s Protection Assurance Procedure for Outside Contractor or Construction Personnel A-7 to 13

3.0 Commissioning Jurisdictional Control & Equipment Tagging A-14

4.0 Environmental, Safety& Health A-14 to 21

Attachment A1, Incident/Accident Investigation Report A-22 to 23

Attachment A2, Witness Statement A-24

Attachment A3, First Aid Register A-25

Attachment A4, Barricade Tag A-26

Attachment A5, Construction WPA Authorization A-27

Attachment A6, Grinder Safety Plan A-28

Attachment A7, Contractor Reduction in Force Report A-29

Attachment A8, Power Operations Hot Work Checklist A-30 to 31

Attachment A9, Contractor Environmental, Safety & Health Data Form A-32 to 34

Attachment A10, Monthly Contractor Accident Statistics Report A-35

Attachment A11, Notice of ES&H Non-Compliance A-36

Attachment A12, Warning Letter of ES&H Non-Compliance A-37

Attachment A13, Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension A-38

Attachment A14, Authorization for Contractor Two-Way Radios A-39 Attachment A15, Contractor's Substance Abuse Policy A-40 to 41 Attachment A16, Crane Operator Safety Checklist A-42

http://ebweb/Gen/Search/QuickLink.aspx?n=AUE-TMP-ADM3207-010&t=3&d=Main%5cGeneration&sc=AUE&state=LatestRevision&cno=PUBLISHED&m=l




Attachment A17, Contractor Agreement of Understanding A-43 Attachment A18, Housekeeping Scorecard A-44 Attachment A19, Safety Scorecard A-45 Attachment A20, Abandoning Piping & Demolishing Abandoned Piping A-46

B JOB WORKING RULES AND CONTRACT WORK LIMITATIONS B-1 to 5

1.0 Job Working Rules B-1

2.0 Plant Access, Parking and Security B-1 3.0 General Requirements B-1 to 2 4.0 Evacuation B-2 5.0 Worker’s Protection Assurance or Hold Card Procedure B-2 6.0 Substance Abuse B-2 to 3 7.0 Harassment and Workplace Violence Policies B-3 to 4 8.0 Workplace Hazards B-4 9.0 Foreign Material Exclusion (FME) B-4 Signature of Acknowledgement B-5

C DESIGN FOR SAFETY GUIDE C-1 to 15

General Facility Safety Design C-1 to 6

Electrical Safety Design C-7 to 9

Mechanical Safety Design C-10 to 12

Chemical Safety Design C-13 to 15

D STANDARD CONTRACTOR SCHEUDLING REQUIREMENTS D-1

E MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS E-1

F NOT USED

G NOT USED

H FERC AFFILIATE RESTRICTIONS & STANDARDS OF CONDUCT H-1

I CHEMICALS OF INTEREST REPORTING I-1 to 2

J VENDOR DRAWING TRANSMITTAL/CAD REQUIREMENTS J-1 to 10

K PLANT ACCESS, PARKING & SECURITY K-1 to 2

L INFORMATION ACCESS AND CYBER SECURITY TERMS & CONDITIONS L-1 to 6

M HAULING HEAVY EQUIPMENT M-1 to 4

N PIPE AND FITTINGS: APPROVED MANUFACTURER LIST N-1 to 4

Q QMS APPLICATION AID FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES Q-1 to 3

R NOT USED

W WELDING AND NDE W-1 to 7

X FOREIGN MATERIAL EXCLUSION REQUIREMENTS X-1 to 5

Y NOT USED

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1A - 1

SECTION 1A - SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR AMEREN MISSOURI POWER OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 2011

Reason for Change: Revision Responsible Department: Ameren Missouri Power Operations Services Project Engineering Approved By: Robert W. Ferguson Date: August 2013 Robert J. Schweppe This document contains: Pages: 10 Attachments: none This document supersedes and makes void: Supplemental General Conditions 10/2012

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description Page 1.0 General........................................................................................................................................................... 2 2.0 Definitions ....................................................................................................................................................... 2 3.0 Intent of Specifications and Drawings ............................................................................................................ 3 4.0 Bench Marks .................................................................................................................................................. 3 5.0 Drawings, Details & Instructions Provided by Contractor ............................................................................... 3 6.0 Labor Conditions ............................................................................................................................................ 3 7.0 Contractor Management Requirements ......................................................................................................... 4 8.0 Delivery and Storage ...................................................................................................................................... 5 9.0 Removals and Preparatory Work ................................................................................................................... 7 10.0 Cutting & Patching, and Temporary Buildings ................................................................................................ 7 11.0 Temporary Heat ............................................................................................................................................. 7 12.0 Quality Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 7 13.0 Owner Approval of Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 8 14.0 Confidentiality ................................................................................................................................................. 8 15.0 Accounting / Invoicing Requirements / ACIP .................................................................................................. 8


1.0 GENERAL

1.1 This section of the specification clarifies and supplements the Ameren General Conditions of Contract (“GCC”) and other Contract documents. Specific duties set forth herein do not constitute an exclusive list of requirements, but complement the Ameren General Conditions of the Contract. In the event of a conflict between this specification and the Ameren General Conditions of Contract, this specification shall be controlling.

1.2 Contractor shall assure that all tiers of Subcontractors comply with all requirements of Contract documents.

1.3 For any work performed for Ameren Missouri Power Operations, Contractor agrees to comply with Ameren’s Supplemental Terms and Conditions, commonly referred to as Section 1A-Supplemental General Conditions for Ameren Missouri Power Operations.

2.0 DEFINITIONS

2.1 Accident/Incident An incident is defined as a near miss, vehicle accident, or property damage to Company-owned/leased equipment or facilities. Refer to OSHA 29CFR1904 for definitions of reportable incidents and injuries.

2.2 Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) Material that contains asbestos that may become airborne and must be handled according to Ameren procedures and Federal and State regulations.

2.3 Competent Person An individual, who is trained and certified in applicable standards, is capable of identifying workplace hazards relating to specific operations, performs inspections of industrial and construction jobsite equipment, and has authority to take corrective actions when needed.

2.4 Computer Based Training (CBT) Computer Based Training is used for safety and job work rules orientation of new employees before they are permitted unescorted access to Company property.

2.5 Confined Space An enclosed area that may require a permit, specialized training, and/or special equipment to enter because of atmospheric or physical entrapment hazards. See OSHA 29CFR1910.146 and Ameren Management Instruction ES-REG-209.

2.6 Hot Work Work that will generate sparks, such as; cutting, grinding, welding, and brazing. A permit may be required for hot work that is hazardous due to location or other factors.

2.7 Environmental, Safety and Health Ameren’s ES&H Department sets standards for environmental, safety and health issues and monitors compliance with Ameren policies, as well as with Federal, State and Local regulations.

2.8 Extra Work is defined in Article 1 of the GCCs.

2.9 Extra Work Order (EWO) is defined in Article 1 of the GCCs.

2.10 Job Working Rules Rules of conduct for Contractors working at Ameren facilities that include various types of prohibited behavior: off-limit areas, driving and parking instructions, and safety information that may be specific for the plant, such as fire alarms and evacuation procedures.

2.11 Single Point of Contact (SPOC) is defined in Article 1 of the GCCs.

2.12 Specifications are defined in Article 1 of the GCCs.

2.13 Work is defined in Article 1 of the GCCs.

2.14 Worker’s Protection Assurance (WPA) or Hold Card Procedure Ameren’s equipment lock-out procedure that ensures equipment and systems are in a safe state prior to service or testing. Employees must have WPA training and adhere to WPA procedures. Contractor supervisors must have plant-specific training prior to starting jobs requiring WPA protection.


3.0 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

3.1 The Contract Documents shall be interpreted as being complementary, requiring a complete Project. Any requirement occurring in any one of the Contract Documents is as binding as though occurring in all Contract Documents. Generally, Specifications address quality, types of materials and Contract conditions, while Plans show placement, sizes, and fabrication details of materials. Reference Article 2.01 of the GCCs.

4.0 BENCH MARKS

4.1 Company will furnish one site bench mark with its assigned elevation. Contractor shall furnish field layouts and shall be responsible for the use of field dimensions and elevations. All such Work shall be subject to approval at the discretion of the SPOC.

5.0 DRAWINGS, DETAILS & INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR

5.1 Contractor shall submit to the Company copies of shop drawings, equipment details, installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams, parts lists, cable termination sign-off sheets, etc. Reference Article 3.02 of the GCCs.

5.1.1 These submittals shall cause no delay in the performance of work. The minimum turn-around time for design changes shall be incorporated on drawings and shall not delay the performance of work. As-built drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Company’s schedule.

5.1.2 Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of the above information, four (4) of which Company will retain. One (1) copy will be returned.

5.1.3 In addition to the copies listed above, Contractor shall submit drawings electronically in an approved CAD format. Ameren typically uses Bentley Microstation V7 or V8 (.dgn files).

5.1.4 Company will review submittals for general design features. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, accuracy, fit, adequacy of details, and coordination with other trades. Contractor must request deviations from contract documents in writing and receive written approval from Company.

5.1.5 Contractor must request field changes in writing and receive written approval from Company. Contractor shall promptly submit as-built drawings to Company.

5.2 Professional Engineering (PE) License Seals

5.2.1 All design documentation meant for fabrication or construction such as design drawings, specifications, and calculations shall have a Professional Engineering (PE) seal applied, signed and dated by Consultant’s registered professional engineer(s).

5.2.1.1 The license shall be current, valid, and in good standing for the appropriate state where the work is taking place.

5.2.2 Documents where seals are not required include review items (not to be constructed), sketches, samples, design control documents, operations manuals, vendor material design documents, and other documents agreed upon in writing between Ameren and Consultant.

5.2.2.1 Consultant shall be responsible to contact the main Ameren contact up-front to clarify the requirements to seal any project specific documentation.

5.2.3 Design deliverables shall be produced under the direction of a registered Professional Engineer. The Professional Engineer who is responsible for approving and sealing the documents shall not also serve as the independent reviewer.

6.0 LABOR CONDITIONS

6.1 Contractor’s Work shall be performed under the National Maintenance Agreement (NMA), unless an exception is agreed upon in writing by the Construction Project Lead or his management, Contractor must furnish a copy of the site extension approval(s) granted by the International Union(s). Site extension requests for the NMA may be filed online at www.nmapc.org.

http://www.nmapc.org/


6.2 There shall be no limit on the work output of any employee, and no restrictions on what tools or equipment may safely be used to increase productivity. There shall be no minimum, other than what may be required by safety regulations, on the number of employees assigned to any crew or to any service.

6.3 Featherbedding practices of any kind will not be tolerated.

6.4 Actual work hours will be agreed upon during pre-job conferences; lunch breaks will be an unpaid one-half hour. No additional organized breaks are allowed. There shall be no non-working stewards. If a steward is included in the labor force, the steward must be a qualified worker and shall exercise no supervisory functions.

6.5 Contractors must conform to Construction Users Round Table (CURT) Tripartite Initiative report, dated June 2004, with respect to absenteeism, excessive overtime and work disruptions.

6.6 Contractor employees must be rested and fit for duty when they report to the Company’s site. Contractor employees must not work in excess of 16 consecutive hours without prior approval of Contractor’s Superintendent and Company, and then only when additional steps have been taken to ensure worker safety.

6.7 Contractor shall provide break/lunch facilities at a location in close proximity to the majority of the Work such locations to be approved by the SPOC or other Ameren Management personnel.

6.8 There shall be no slowdowns, illegal strikes, or unauthorized work stoppages of any kind. Contractor understands that its work must be completed in a timely fashion notwithstanding the presence of a labor strike or any pickets at or around the job site.

6.9 In the event that Company’s employees, another contractor’s or subcontractor’s employees or Contractor’s employees engage in a strike or established pickets, Contractor is expected to continue to meet its obligations under the terms of the contract and/or obligations with Company. Any such picketing activity is not an excuse for non-performance or delay in completing the project

6.10 Medical Services provided by Ameren:

On specified projects, contractors are not to include costs within bids associated with the following medical services:

• Random and for-cause substance abuse (SA) testing,

• First-aid expenses that can be addressed by an onsite nurse, if an onsite nurse is provided.

7.0 CONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

7.1 Prior to mobilization, Contractor shall submit an organizational chart and resumes for the entire management team that will utilize, on or offsite, for the project.

7.2 Contractor should adhere to the Job Working Rules (Appendix B).

7.3 Contractor will be responsible to comply with the training and implementation requirements of the FERC Affiliate Restrictions procedure, AUE-ADM-5476.

7.4 Contractor supervisory employees who will be responsible for requesting and signing the WPA must receive site-specific training before working onsite. The SPOC will arrange for the required WPA supervisor training to be located at the Ameren POS Training Center training facility.

7.5 Contractor supervisor shall comply with the specific plant’s WPA procedure which is included as Appendix A, Section 2 of this specification. WPA procedure provides details of program and outlines responsibilities for supervisors.

CAUTION: The presence of WPA process does not relieve workers of the responsibility to verify that equipment is actually de-energized or in the designated state. Instruct employees to walk down the job, check energy sources and isolation points such as: voltages, temperatures, pressures, etc. to confirm status.

7.6 Contractor Site Representative should read, understand, and sign the Contractor Agreement of Understanding Form (Appendix A, Attachment A17), prior to beginning work onsite.

7.7 Contractor supervisors shall instruct employees to observe WPA rules and comply with WPA tags at all times.

http://ebweb/Gen/Search/QuickLink.aspx?n=AUE-ADM-5476&t=3&d=Main%5cGeneration&sc=AUE&state=LatestApproved&cno=PUBLISHED&m=l



7.8 Contractor shall participate in individual Construction Progress meetings. The meetings are typically held weekly, but the SPOC may specify another frequency during the course of the Contract.

7.8.1 A Contractor representative with sufficient authority to make binding work and schedule commitments shall attend these meetings.

7.8.2 The individual progress meeting will typically concentrate on safety and housekeeping, schedule and work progress, job related problems, and site coordination.

7.8.3 Contractor should come to the progress meeting with an updated schedule showing actual progress and the critical path of the work. See Contractor Schedule Requirements (Appendix D) for additional schedule requirements.

7.8.4 Contractor shall take and distribute meeting minutes within 2 working days of the meeting.

7.9 A Contractor representative with sufficient authority to make binding commitments may also be required to attend a weekly Outage Coordination Meeting.

7.10 Contractor personnel, Business agents, Vendor/Sales representatives, etc., should use the entrance designated for their Contractor, park in the Construction parking lot, and be escorted onsite unless they have a Contractor badge. Construction badge holders may use Contractor entrance or Ameren employee entrance, and park in the Construction parking lot or main parking lot depending on purpose of visit.

8.0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

8.1 Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading, inspecting and hauling materials unless otherwise stated in the Contract documents.

8.2 Contractor and the project must be indicated on materials delivered to the site.

8.3 Contractor shall provide facilities to store materials and equipment on the jobsite. The SPOC will designate storage locations that will not interfere with Company’s personnel or operations.

8.4 Payment for material or equipment stored onsite will not be made to Contractor until the material or equipment is installed. Contractor may apply for early payment only if early delivery and storage of the material or equipment will benefit Ameren.

8.5 A carrier that is compliant with the Depart of Transportation’s (DOT) Hazardous Materials Security Plan must be used for deliveries to Ameren. For a list of approved carriers visit www.ameren.com/sites/aue/mybusiness/documents/SPCarriers.pdf. Any vehicle carrying hazardous materials onto Company facilities will be refused entry until proof of compliance is provided.

8.6 If materials are provided by Ameren, they will be stored by Ameren until Contractor is onsite. Contractor will be responsible for loss or damage after acceptance of equipment or material provided by Company. Contractor shall inventory and haul excess material retained by Company to designated Company storage location(s) after completion of Work.

8.7 Contractor shall restore construction storage areas to a reasonable condition that satisfies the SPOC.

8.8 Material Receipt

8.8.1 Contractor must resolve all issues with contractor-procured material.

8.8.2 Contractor must identify, inspect, test and store material to purchase order requirements.

8.8.3 Contractor must ensure all receiving quality documentation is supplied to Ameren’s SPOC upon receipt.

8.8.4 Contractor must have a program in place to ensure receipted critical plant material and equipment is not relocated or improperly stored without proper authorization from Ameren’s SPOC.

8.8.5 Contractor will be provided a list of critical materials and equipment during Pre-Construction Meetings.

http://www.ameren.com/sites/aue/mybusiness/documents/SPCarriers.pdf


8.8.6 Contractor must handle, store, and identify Critical Material in accordance with the paragraph below:

MATERIAL HANDLING, STORAGE AND IDENTIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS AUE-ADM-4203, Receiving Storage, and Handling of Critical Materials

All Ameren purchased critical material received by a contractor or sub-contractor has specific requirements that must be met to comply with Ameren’s Quality Management Program in accordance with AUE-ADM-4203. Contractor requirements contained in AUE-ADM-4203 are provided below. Contractors will be evaluated on their quality control and material management. A list of critical materials shall be provided to the contractor during Pre-Construction Meetings. 1) Notify Responsible Engineer (RE) of Ameren material received and the PO number. Ensure

receiving documentation remains with the material until clear direction is provided by RE.

NOTE: Steps 2-5 shall be directed by Responsible Engineer (RE)

2) Receiving documentation, number of containers, and intended storage location shall be taken to Storeroom personnel.

3) Storeroom shall create a Receipt Order (RO) number for traceability and provide identification labels for attachment to each container. Information will always include the RO tracking# and may include PO #, Job #, RE, PM, Storage Level, and intended location.

4) The RO number shall be clearly marked on all boxes, containers, equipment, and packing slip(s).

5) An Ameren Material Receipt Inspection Report (MRIR) shall be printed with the inspection requirements and shall be used to document inspection results. Contractors may perform additional inspections as directed by RE.

6) After successful acceptance, MRIR Inspector(s) shall sign the MRIR and each traceable barcode label; and shall attach labels to containers.

7) Hold tags shall be attached to any materials not accepted.

WARNING: Contact Responsible Engineer or Ameren Designee immediately if unidentified material is discovered, labels become unreadable, material needs to be relocated, or if material location or storage level differs from label.

If during staging, prep work, etc., the material is repackaged or removed from labeled containers and the potential for identification or material loss exists, transfer the RO or barcode number, at a minimum, to the materials.

Storage Level B – Indoor storage. Temperatures controlled between 40°F and 140°F. This level includes the storeroom, turbine floor, or any other location inside the plant.

Storage Level C – Covered storage. Temperature control not required. These locations include secondary storerooms, covered parking areas, etc.

Storage Level D – Outside storage. Store in well drained areas in a manner allowing air circulation to minimize trapped water.


RO# (left) can be shortened to U221936R6

Critical classes: CR, CT, EM,

Storage Level & PM

CRITICAL MATERIAL BARCODE DELIVERY MATERIAL TAG

9.0 REMOVALS AND PREPARATORY WORK

9.1 Contractor shall cooperate with the SPOC in scheduling removal work so there is no disruption to Company’s personnel or operations.

9.2 Contractor shall provide protective enclosures, covers, water stops, etc. to prevent water or other weather-related damage to facilities during construction.

9.3 Before mobilizing tools, material and equipment, Contractor will install appropriate trash cans, cigarette butt receptacles, and dumpsters in designated areas.

9.4 Materials authorized to be removed become the property of Contractor, unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents, and shall be promptly removed from the worksite. An inventory of materials being removed must be submitted to the SPOC. If materials are retained, the SPOC will designate where materials shall be stored. Retained materials shall be neatly stored and protected from the elements.

9.5 Before mobilizing tools, material and equipment, Contractor shall install protection on both sides of all walkways in work area from top rail to toe board. This protection may include, but not limited to, orange fencing, plywood and sheet metal. However, openings in fencing shall be no larger than one inch square. Contractor shall install decking on open floor work areas, seal decking along edges and install toe boards, and install debris nets to further contain fallings objects. All wood subject to ignition sources shall have fire retardant cloth or tarps installed over the wood. Cloth shall be secured to avoid tripping hazards. All safety barriers shall be removed after the completion of the project.

9.6 For additional safety guidelines to be performed prior to working on elevated platforms, walkways and scaffolds above 6 feet, refer to Safety Requirements for Working on Elevated Platforms (Appendix Y).

10.0 CUTTING & PATCHING AND TEMPORARY BUILDINGS, ETC.

10.1 Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be necessary to make the several parts come together properly and fit to receive the Work of other Contractors and Subcontractors.

10.2 All temporary buildings/structures such as tool rooms, break rooms, lunch rooms, etc., shall be constructed with non-combustible materials.

11.0 TEMPORARY HEAT

11.1 Contractor shall provide temporary heat to protect Work materials against damage from dampness and cold to the satisfaction of the SPOC.

12.0 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.

12.1 The Quality Management System Manual, AUE-MAN-QMS-1001, provides the basis for the Ameren Missouri Power Operations Quality Management System (QMS) and provides the assurance that processes are in place to achieve our business objectives. The QMS performance standards and performance criteria provide requirements to achieve a controlled and systematic approach to quality management activities and promote continuous improvement. Contractors and Sub Contractors can obtain a copy of the QMS from the Ameren Missouri Project Manager.


12.2 The Contractor’s quality management program and supportive procedures are subject to Ameren review and audit. Should a gap exist between the QMS, and the Contractor’s quality management program and supportive procedures, the Contractor will be required to comply with the QMS.

12.3 Contractors and Sub Contractors agree to comply with the applicable QMS requirements for the work scope included in this Ameren Missouri contract. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the Contractor’s quality management program and supportive procedures with the bid submittal, if the Contractor is not on the Ameren Missouri ‘Generation Approved Supplier List – Critical (GASLC)’.

12.4 The QMS Application Aid (QMS-AA) per Appendix Q contains the applicable QMS requirements in this Ameren Missouri contract. The Contractor shall complete and return the QMS-AA with the bid submittal, if the Contractor is not on the Ameren Missouri GASLC.

12.5 The Contractor shall upon award develop and provide to Ameren a ‘Project-specific Quality Management Plan’ which is compliant with the QMS-AA.

12.6 The Contractor’s awarded work scope, including that of its Sub Contractors, shall be performed to the requirements of the QMS-AA.

12.7 Ameren will be allowed to make quality inspections at Contractor’s and Sub Contractor’s facilities at no cost to Ameren. Ameren will be allowed to view applicable Contractor’s and Sub Contractor’s quality procedures and procedure generated records and documents.

12.8 Design Documents and Calculations:

12.8.1 Contractors and Sub Contractors shall meet the technical requirements included in Section 1D of this specification and the QMS-AA.

13.0 OWNER APPROVAL OF PROCEDURE

13.1 Ameren must consent to deviations from the procedures, methods and materials agreed to in the Contract. Reference Articles 2.01 and 4.01 of the GCCs.

13.2 Ameren reserves the right of approval over all procedures, methods, and materials to be employed by Contractor or its Subcontractors for this Work. Reference Articles 2.01 and 4.01 of the GCCs.

14.0 CONFIDENTIALITY

14.1 Contractor shall hold Ameren's Confidential Information confidential and shall not use or disclose to others during or subsequent to the performance of the Work (except as is necessary to perform the Work). Reference Article 9.02 of the GCCs.

14.2 Publication or advertising of information directly derived from the Project or Work or data obtained in connection with services rendered under the Contract must first be approved in writing by Ameren (Ameren personnel need approval from Ameren Corporate Communications). Contractor shall not release any information for publication or advertising purposes relative to the material, equipment and/or services furnished under the Contract Documents without the prior written consent of Ameren. Ameren reserves the right to release all advertising or publicity concerning the Project or Work. Except as to signs required by building department regulations or any other governmental requirements, Contractor shall not display or permit any signs or advertisements to be displayed about the Project site nor publicize in any manner its performance of the Work without the express written permission of Ameren. Reference Article 9.02 of the GCCs.

14.3 Contractor shall restrict the knowledge of all confidential information regarding the Work to as few as possible of its employees who are directly connected with performance of the Work and have a definite need for such knowledge. Upon request by Ameren's Representative, Contractor shall cause such persons or groups of persons involved in the Work on Contractor's behalf as Ameren may designate to sign individual secrecy agreements in a form satisfactory to Ameren. Reference Article 9.02 of the GCCs.

15.0 ACCOUNTING / INVOICING REQUIREMENTS / ACIP

15.1 Contractor shall furnish complete accounting information and cooperate with Ameren’s accounting practices.

15.2 For Time and Material contracts prior to commencing work, Contractor shall furnish Company with a written estimate for Company approval. Once approved, Contractor shall promptly notify Company of any facts and circumstances that may adversely impact the estimate. Further, Contractor shall not exceed ninety percent


(90%) of the time and materials estimate without Company approval. All overtime for Time and Material contracts shall be approved by Company in advance of working. Reference Articles 6 and 8 of the GCCs.

15.3 Company reserves the right not to honor charges associated with timesheets that are not provided daily.

15.4 Material invoices must be submitted as Work progresses. Total cost updates will be provided on a weekly basis.

15.5 If Work indicated or specified in Contract Documents is increased, Company may have Contractor perform Extra Work.

15.5.1 Contractor must obtain written approval from the SPOC prior to performing any Extra Work. Each Extra Work Order (EWO) shall be invoiced separately and shall reference the EWO number and Purchase Order (PO) number.

15.5.2 If work is performed on a time and material basis, then work shall be charged at the rates indicated on the Labor Rate Sheets in the Contract.

15.5.3 Ameren will pay Contractor the cost of extra work as follows:

NOTE: Subcontractor labor and material charges shall be subject to the provisions of Items 15.5.3.1, 15.5.3.2 and 15.5.3.3 below.

15.5.3.1 Labor:

• Direct cost of payroll labor, including first line foreman, excluding job Superintendent and General Foreman

• Fringe benefits including welfare and pension

• Insurance

• Taxes including FICA, Federal, State and Local tax

• Overhead, including costs for home office, field office, consumables, and small tools with an original value under $1,200, as agreed by Company and Contractor at the award of Contract

• Profit, as agreed by Company and Contractor at the award of Contract

15.5.3.2 Material and third party rental equipment:

• Direct cost of material or rental equipment

Subcontractors:

• Direct cost of Subcontractor

Contractor-Owned Rental Equipment (excluding third party rental equipment):

• Contractor shall submit for approval an equipment rental rate schedule including all equipment, tools, and supplies required to perform the Work specified. These equipment rental rates will be used for extra work.

15.5.3.3 Ameren Coordinated Insurance Program (ACIP)

• If the project is part of the Ameren Coordinated Insurance Program (ACIP) all contractors of all tiers will be required to provide completed enrollment and monthly reporting forms for duration of their work on project. All prime contractors will be responsible for their subcontractors of all tiers with respect to compliance of enrollment and reporting requirements.

• If the project is part of the ACIP, contractors of all tiers must be enrolled and have a copy of ACIP certificate of insurance prior to mobilization onsite. Ameren will not allow non-enrolled contractors to access site prior to enrollment in ACIP.


END OF SECTION 1A

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1B - 1

SECTION 1B − SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Definitions

1.1.1 The term "Company" means the entity identified in the Company's Purchase Order, its agents, employees, representatives, successors, and assigns. The terms "Purchaser," "Owner," and "Buyer," if used in the Contract Documents, are considered synonymous and refer to the Company.

1.1.2 The term "Engineer," “CQA Engineer” or “Geotechnical Engineer” means the Engineer duly

appointed to represent the Company as specified from time to time by the Company who may be employed by the Company or who may be employed by others.

1.1.3 The term "Contractor" means the entity identified in the Company's Purchase Order, and its agents, employees and authorized representatives undertaking the performance of the Work as defined in this Specification. The terms "vendor," "supplier," "manufacturer," or “fabricator” if used in the Contract Documents, are considered synonymous and refer to Contractor.

1.1.4 The term "Sub Contractor" means any individual, partnership, firm, corporation or business entity, other than an employee of Contractor, who contracts or agrees with Contractor (or another Sub Contractor or any tier thereof) to furnish any services, labor, materials or equipment for, or in connection with, the performance of the Work.

1.1.5 The term “IRPE” means the Independent Registered Professional Engineer or his representative retained by Franklin County to observe and document the construction of this Work. The IRPE does NOT have authority to question the Contractor or Sub Contractors, to request additional testing or sampling, to request reports or test results, or to hinder the progress of the Work.

1.1.6 The term “Construction Project Lead” means the Company’s representative as specified from time to time and located at job site.

1.1.7 SWPPP means the Ameren Missouri “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Labadie Energy Center, Utility Waste Landfill Project, Franklin County, Missouri,” Preparation Date April 14, 2014, and as amended. A copy of the SWPPP will be provided to Contractor upon request to Ameren Construction Supervisor or Contact listed in Section 1.4.2.

1.2 Location

Labadie Energy Center 226 Labadie Power Plant Road Franklin County Labadie, Missouri 63055

1.3 Site Conditions

1.3.1 The site of Cell 1 and Pond 1 was stripped by a contractor in Phase 1. The topsoil was stockpiled as

shown on the Site Plan. The Phase 1 contractor placed and compacted subgrade fill in the area of Cell 1 and Pond 1. The Phase 1 contractor did not strip the area of the access road embankment from Cell 1 to the existing ash pond, nor construct any portion of the access road embankment. The Phase 1 contractor stockpiled clay liner material for the test pad (as shown on the Site Plan). The Phase 1 contractor installed and maintained Best Management Practices (BMP), and installed and maintained temporary construction fence to protect the designated potential wetlands, as shown on the Drawings.

1.3.2 THE TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS WAS COMPLETED PRIOR TO PHASE 1 CONSTRUCTION. A NEW TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY WILL BE COMPLETED BY AMEREN MISSOURI AFTER THE PHASE 1 CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE AND WILL BE INCORPORATED INTO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS BY AMENDMENT.

1.3.3 The project site is owned by Ameren Missouri and is considered to be part of Labadie Energy Center.


1.3.4 Labadie Bottom Road is an asphalt concrete paved and gravel road which extends around the construction area. This road is owned and maintained by Franklin County.

1.3.5 Some of the drainage swales are designated as poten tial wetlands that must not be affected

by any construction activities . 1.3.6 High-power transmission lines with steel lattice towers run through the property. These must not be

compromised. 1.3.7 Explorer Pipeline owns a gas pipeline along the eastern edge of the site. It is the Contractor’s

responsibility to avoid the Explorer Pipeline Right-of-Way or to comply with all of Explorer’s regulations if any equipment is to cross their pipeline.

1.3.8 Monitoring wells have been installed around the sit e as shown on the Drawings. Monitoring

wells shall not be disturbed by any construction ac tivity. 1.3.9 Expect continued farm activities in adjacent fields. 1.3.10 The site is part of the property of Labadie Energy Center. All personnel must sign-in at the

contractor’s gate and must sign out when leaving th e site. See Appendix K. 1.3.11 Ameren will relocate, under a separate contract, the high-voltage transmission line tower located

adjacent to the contractor’s entrance to Labadie Energy Center. The relocation will be completed at the end of September 2015. Construction of the Labadie Bottom Road overpass cannot be completed until the relocation is complete. Contractor may begin construction of the overpass and access road embankment if the work can be done safely under current site conditions. The work plan and schedule shall be approved by the Company.

1.4 Contacts

1.4.1 All commercial matters should be directed to the Ameren purchasing agent designated on the

Request for Proposal or listed on the purchase order.

1.4.2 All technical and quality questions regarding this specification shall be directed to:

Michael J. Wagstaff, P.E., PMP Ameren Missouri, Dam Safety & Hydro Engineering 3700 South Lindbergh Blvd. Sunset Hills, Missouri 63127 (314) 957-3202 [email protected]

2.0 SUMMARY OF PHASE 1A WORK

2.1 The BASE BID for Phase 1A shall include: 1) hauling, placing and compacting of general berm fill and subgrade fill for Cell 1 and Pond 1, fill for the perimeter road and ramps, and the embankment for the access road; 2) construction of Labadie Bottom Road overpass and access road; 3) obtaining fill from an off-site borrow source in compliance with all applicable regulations; and 4) construction of a test pad of the clay liner material and assisting the Geotechnical Engineer with testing and evaluation of the test pad.

2.2 Ancillary work included in the BASE BID for Phase 1A includes: maintenance or expansion of construction entrances and parking/staging area; installation, relocation, repair or replacement and maintenance of Best Management Practices (BMP) in accordance with the SWPPP; and repair or replacement and maintenance of temporary construction fence for protection of the designated potential wetlands as shown on the Drawings.

2.3 General Requirements and Design Basis 2.3.1 Technical Requirements are provided in General Technical Requirements (Section 1D) of this

specification.

2.3.2 Contractor shall provide, initialize and maintain a geographic positioning system (GPS), earthwork equipment with GPS instruments, and operators trained to use the GPS instruments, to perform the Work. Contractor shall have qualified personnel to initiate and maintain quality control of the GPS


and to verify the layout, lines and grades of the Work, or Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified land surveyor.

2.3.3 Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all material (except those items of material specifically

stated to be furnished by the Company), tools, equipment, labor, supervision, lighting, and any other incidental items or services required to perform all of the work described herein.

2.3.4 Contractor shall be responsible for including any work required by Contractor’s chosen means and methods and not specifically called out in the Project Documents. Contractor shall clearly communicate such work scope to all Sub Contractors, including any work required by the Contractor’s means and methods which may require Sub Contractors to perform work not specifically stated in the Project Documents. The Company shall not entertain extra work requests for any such work.

2.3.5 Contractor shall be responsible for any and all engineering, drafting, field sketches, and field layout required for temporary supports, rigging, removals, and installation of all material.

2.3.6 Contractor shall be responsible for any and all field layout required.

2.3.7 Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storage and security of all materials supplied by Contractor and material provided by Company. Contractor will be required to unload material in laydown areas as designated by the Ameren Construction Project Supervisor.

2.3.8 Contractor shall be responsible for traffic control on Labadie Bottom Road during construction and coordinating traffic management and permits as required by Franklin County.

2.3.9 Contractor will be responsible for proper disposal of all waste material.

2.3.10 Contractor’s Supervisor shall obtain necessary plant-specific training for the work they will perform.

2.3.11 Contractor employees shall observe Ameren’s practices and procedures for Foreign Material Exclusion (FME). Severe damage can result from non-compliance when working on critical systems, including but not limited to; feedwater, condensate, steam, or lubrication. The Company may seek to recover costs for Contractor’s non-compliance.

Note: Ameren is under no obligation to assure that elevators, power and compressed air are

available for Contractor use, and under this contra ct, there will be no extensions of time or additional compensation for unavailability of eleva tors, power and/or compressed air.

2.3.12 Explosives shall not be used. 2.3.13 Contractor Design shall use the Design for Safety Guide (Appendix C). 2.3.14 Ameren will not provide a nurse and first aid trailer for Ameren and contractor personnel.

2.4 General Description of Work

2.4.1 Locate and acquire borrow site(s) with a minimum volume of suitable general berm fill and subgrade

fill material. Materials in the borrow sites shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to delivery to the site.

2.4.2 Acquire all permits to obtain and haul the material to the site.

2.4.3 Install, repair or reconstruct and maintain BMP in accordance with SWPPP for the duration of the project. Repair or construct construction entrances and modify the parking/staging area as needed. Relocate, repair or replace and maintain protection for designated potential wetlands and temporary construction fence as shown on the Drawings.

2.4.4 Clear and grub the site, including the existing previously constructed subgrades as required by the Geotechnical Engineer. Contractor may stockpile topsoil for use on access road embankment separately from the existing topsoil stockpile. Topsoil shall be stockpiled as directed by the Company or Geotechnical Engineer. Excess topsoil placed in existing topsoil stockpile shall be compacted as necessary to allow future use without additional treatment or site preparation. The topsoil cover stockpile must be final graded to allow farming of the area. The Company or


Geotechnical Engineer will be on site during clearing operations to verify that all topsoil and vegetation has been removed and adequately stockpiled and the area in final graded. Topsoil from the existing Phase 1 stockpile shall NOT be used for side slopes of the access road embankment.

2.4.5 Partial demolition of existing perimeter fence of ash pond for the new access road. Security of the ash pond must be maintained at all times. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary chain-link fence to maintain security.

2.4.6 Construction of Subgrade Fill: Proof roll the subgrade areas, remove and replace soft or yielding soils as directed by the CQA Engineer, and place and compact the subgrades of Cell 1, Pond 1, and the perimeter roads to the lines and grades as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.4.7 Construction of Cell 1 and Pond 1 Perimeter Berms: Construct compacted soil embankments for the perimeter berms of Cell 1 and Pond 1 to the lines and grades as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.4.8 Labadie Bottom Road Overpass: Install a storm water culvert for the site of the embankment for the access road, construct soil embankment, design and construct foundations for the overpass, design and construct pre-cast concrete overpass and mechanically-stabilized earth (MSE) wing walls, construct crushed stone paving for access road from the existing ash pond to Cell 1, install guardrails, and repair any damages to Labadie Bottom Road.

2.4.9 GPS System: furnish, install, calibrate and maintain a geographic positioning system (GPS) on site to control earthwork operations, locate field tests, and for periodic topographic surveys. Two (2) GPS’s must be provided to the CQA Engineer for their sole use during construction. The GPS’s provided to the CQA Engineer MUST have the ability to store and display waypoints taken during testing. GPS shall be installed, calibrated and maintained for the site, with a horizontal accuracy of +1.0 foot and a vertical accuracy of +0.1 foot.

2.4.10 Final Grading and Seeding: Final grade all disturbed areas to drain and to prevent erosion; remove all waste materials; and mulch and seed disturbed areas where indicated.

2.4.11 Test Pad. Construct a test pad using the clay liner material from the stockpile. The dimensions and location of the test pad are to be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Contractor shall assist Geotechnical Engineer with installation of testing, excavation of test pits, and protection of the test pad during testing. Test pad will be abandoned in place after testing is completed.

3.0 SCHEDULE MILESTONES

Contractor shall furnish a schedule in accordance with Section 01320 and Appendix D – Contractor Schedule Requirements with the following milestones at a minimum:

3.1 Mobilization, construction of BMPs for site and borrow area(s).

3.2 Start and finish clearing and grubbing.

3.3 Start and finish construction of perimeter berm fill and construction of subgrade soil to grade as shown in the

Contract Drawings.

3.4 Start and finish construction of Labadie Bottom Overpass, access road embankment, and access road.

3.5 Start and finish site grading, including placement of topsoil, seeding, and demobilization. 4.0 COMPANY DRAWINGS

4.1 The following drawings are intended to indicate the scope of the work to be done and details necessary for the items of work set forth in this specification, and are part of this specification. These drawings in general are to scale, but figures shall always be followed and drawings are not to be scaled. Contractor shall make any requests for additional prints of drawings in writing to the Engineer.

4.1.1 8500-Y-0190621 Cover 4.1.2 8500-Y-0190622 Site Plan 4.1.3 8500-Y-0190623 Phase 1A Construction 4.1.4 8500-Y-0190624 Labadie Bottom Road Overpass & Access Road

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1B - 5 5.0 WORK, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY COMPANY

5.1 The Contractor shall receive an AutoCAD 2010 file with the 3-dimensional model of the Work. The Contractor and the Contractor’s personnel or land surveyor shall establish the control points required for the execution of the Work utilizing the Contractor’s GPS.

5.2 Stockpile of clay liner material. 5.3 Relocation of high-voltage transmission line tower adjacent to construction entrance. 5.4 Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) Engineer. 6.0 WORK, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR

6.1 All supervision, components, labor, materials, equipment, tools, and any incidental items described herein (except those specifically stated above) necessary to completely install each portion or component of the work shall be furnished by Contractor. These items shall include, but not limited to the following:

6.2 All components of Labadie Bottom Road Overpass and access road.

6.3 Erosion and sediment control, including but not limited to silt fence and straw bales.

6.4 Temporary storm water control devices (culverts, pipes, sump pumps, etc.)

6.5 Seed, fertilizer and mulch.

6.6 Off-site general soil fill for construction of perimeter berms, subgrade fill for Cell 1, and construction of embankment for the access road. All off-site soil fill shall be tested and approved by the CQA Engineer prior to transporting to the site.

6.7 All temporary permits required by Missouri Department of Transportation, Missouri Department of Natural Resources, Franklin County and other required for the off-site borrow site.

6.8 Geographic Positioning System (GPS) as specified in 2.4.9.

7.0 UTILITIES AND FACILITIES

7.1 Contractor shall supply sanitary facilities, drinking water and shower facilities (if needed) equipped with water heaters.

7.2 The Company will not provide telephone, fax, computer, and power hook-up connections for Contractor

supplied trailers. 7.3 Temporary lighting, wiring, plumbing, globes, guard lights, barricades or any other items required for

protection, facility of work, local regulation, or by law for public protection shall be provided by Contractor.

7.4 The Company will not be responsible for job-site security. 8.0 RECORDING OF HISTORICAL DATA

8.1 Contractor shall make provisions to record the man-hours expended by each craft on each activity during the course of the work.

8.2 Within three (3) weeks after completing the work, a report shall be submitted by Contractor summarizing the activities completed together with the man-days expended on each activity each week during the project all segregated according to craft.

9.0 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD SAFETY PROGRAM

9.1 Contractor shall comply with the Safety and Housekeeping procedures stated in Safety and Contractor Requirements (Appendix A) Attachment A18 and Attachment A19.

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1B - 6 9.2 The Company has computerized the WPA request process. All organizations working on plant site shall be

required to use the WPA computers to request WPA tags to be hung. The Company will provide training to one or two individuals per organization with training to be located at the Ameren POS Training Center.

10.0 PARTICIPATION IN COORDINATION ACTIVITIES

Contractor shall provide a representative for and participate in coordination and information exchange activities with representatives of the Company and other contractors involved with the plant improvements. Exchange of information necessary for the work specified herein to interface with other Contractors.

11.0 CONTRACTOR'S COST TRACKING PROGRAM

If an EWO (T&M) has been authorized by Ameren, then Contractor shall furnish manpower and cost information to the Construction Project Lead for all "time & material" work on a weekly basis. Time & Material information is to be submitted on Contractor-supplied forms.

12.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

12.1 Contractor shall develop and be responsible for all details, which may be required to complete the work, but which are not included in this document. The Company retains the right of approval of all such details.

12.2 Upon completion, all work defined in this document shall be of a uniformly neat and workmanlike appearance.

All costs of repair to meet this condition shall be to Contractor's account.

12.3 Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's or fabricator’s guidelines and requirements for installation of all materials and equipment, except as modified by this Specification.

12.4 Contractor shall not have any materials, tools, equipment, etc., fall from elevated work areas. Contractor shall be responsible for designing his own means to prevent objects from falling.

12.5 Contractor shall not under any circumstance weld, cut or modify any pipe, any tube, any header, or any other boiler pressure part not included in the scope of work described herein without the written consent of the Construction Project Lead and/or Engineer.

12.6 Contractor shall be aware that there will be other contractors onsite during the Work as described in this

Specification as well as Company GCMS and Plant forces. Contractor shall coordinate his work to minimize interferences with the work of other contractors and/or crafts.

12.7 Only Contractor's vehicles permanently marked with Contractor's name and displaying an Ameren Contractor Mirror Tag, shall be permitted on job site. Mirror tags are available from the Construction Project Lead only after verification of auto insurance and other criteria has been met. No personal vehicles be permitted on job site.

12.8 Upon admittance into the Plant, Contractor (including each and every employee or sub-contractor's employees) shall be subjected to a computer based training (CBT) program that describes the Plant Construction Job Work Rules. These work rules are similar to those listed in Supplemental General Conditions Section 1A, Item 2.4. The training lasts approximately ¾ hour for the average worker. Employees cannot begin work until the training is completed.

12.9 Job Working Rules: Contractor must enforce the Job Working Rules and Contract Work Limitations (Appendix

B) well as the Contractor’s own work rules. If the rules conflict, then the more restrictive rule applies.

13.0 PLANT ENGINEERING INSPECTIONS AND EXTRA WORK ORDERS

13.1 Extra work will be authorized by an approved Extra Work Order (EWO). Contractor shall not start any additional work without written approval from the Company.

13.2 Extra work may be authorized on a lump sum firm price, time and materials (T&M), or a T&M-not-to-exceed

basis. The Company will select the terms of the EWO.

13.2.1 Pricing for lump sum firm price and T&M-not-to-exceed work shall be based on the Engineering Inspection Report supplied by the Construction Project Lead.


13.2.2 The Company may accept or reject Contractor’s proposal for any EWO. If an EWO proposal is rejected the Company may try to negotiate the price, reduce or cancel the work scope, or obtaining pricing from another contractor.

13.2.3 If Contractor’s submitted EWO proposal is acceptable to the Company an approved EWO will be issued authorizing the work.

13.3 Invoices for all approved Extra Work Orders shall reference the purchase order number of the original

contract, the EWO Number, and have a copy of the approved EWO attached.

END OF SECTION 1B

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1C - 1

SECTION 1C − INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM BIDDERS 1.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BID PROPOSAL

1.1 Pricing

1.1.1 Having examined all Bid Documents, including the Contract Drawings and Specifications, visited the Site and examined all conditions affecting work, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, testing and appliances required by Base Scope of Work described in Section 1B-2.0 of the Specifications and/or depicted on the Contract Documents for the Stipulated Sum of: BASE LUMP SUM BID: ____________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ DOLLARS ($_________________)

1.1.2 UNIT PRICE FOR FILL – Unit price per cubic yard of off-site fill that is placed and compacted in accordance with these Contract Drawings and Specifications to be used to adjust (add or deduct) the LUMP SUM BID in 1.1.1 based upon the difference between the topographic survey of the site shown on the Contract Drawings and a topographic survey to be completed by the Company after the completion of Phase 1 construction: UNIT PRICE PER CUBIC YARD: ____________________________ DOLLARS ($_____/CU.YD.)

1.1.3 Break out cost for safety personnel per Safety and Contractor Requirements Appendix A, Item 4.2. 1.1.4 Company shall contract with a Licensed Surveyor in Missouri to perform the topographic survey

following the completion of Phase 1 construction and to calculate the volume to be used to adjust the LUMP SUM BID.

1.2 Subcontractors and Personnel:

1.2.1 Contractor shall submit a list of major Sub Contractors and suppliers with the firm name, mailing address, telephone number, qualifications, contact person, email address of contact person, responsibilities, and proposed subcontract amount. The major Sub Contractors shall include at a minimum:

1.2.1.1 Earthwork or hauling Sub Contractor(s). 1.2.1.2 Design/Builder of Labadie Bottom Road Overpass, retaining walls, and appurtenances. 1.2.2 Contractor shall submit with bid proposal a schedule of time and material (T&M) rates as well as T&M

rates for all planned subcontractors. The submitted schedules of T&M rates will be used for any additional work the Company may request or approve during the course of the specified work.

1.3 Project Execution Plan

1.3.1 Contractor shall submit with bid proposal a preliminary work plan describing how project will be executed. Included in the work plan shall be items/details such as:

1.3.1.1 Location(s) of off-site borrow source(s) for general fill material. 1.3.1.2 Description of GPS system (Section 1B-2.4.9). 1.3.1.3 Organization chart with resumes of key personnel.

1.4 Exceptions Any contract award resulting from this Specification will incorporate all provisions specified herein. It is

understood that Contractor agrees to all provisions of Specification unless exceptions are specifically listed in bid proposal.

1.5 Environmental, Safety and Health

1.5.1 Contractor shall submit with bid proposal a completed Contractor Environmental, Safety & Health Data Form (Appendix A, Attachment A9).

1.5.2 Resumes of Contractor’s Safety Personnel associated with this Project shall be submitted with Bid.

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1C - 2

1.5.3 Contractor’s Environmental, Safety & Health (ES&H) program manual shall be submitted with Bid. 1.6 Quality

1.6.1 QMS Application Aid (Appendix Q) maps the Contractor’s quality management program to the Ameren Missouri Power Operations Quality Management System (QMS).

1.6.2 Copies of the Contractor’s quality management program and supportive procedures.

2.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD

2.1 Schedule

2.1.1 Contractor shall submit a construction schedule as described in Contractor Schedule Requirements (Appendix D) and Section 01320. Failure to provide a schedule may result in rejection of the bid.

2.1.2 Contractor shall provide weekly updates of his project work schedule beginning after he mobilized at

jobsite and continuing through completion of work. Failure to provide a schedule may result in charges to Contractor.

2.2 Revised Project Execution Plan

Contractor shall submit after award of contract a detailed work plan describing how project will be executed. Ameren requires five (5) days for review. Included in the work plan shall be items/details such as:

2.2.1 Planned access 2.2.2 Location of tool room, parking, layout area, fueling facility, etc. 2.2.3 Quality control plan 2.2.4 Organizational chart with resumes (if not already provided) 2.2.5 List of all Sub Contractors and suppliers 2.2.6 Site-specific ES&H Action Plan including Emergency Response Action Plan

2.3 Contractor Project Management

2.3.1 Contractor shall provide an organizational chart depicting names and roles of individuals involved with project from Project Manager to Foreman level.

2.3.2 Contractor shall provide necessary resources to provide scheduling information and updates as

defined in Contractor Schedule Requirements (Appendix D) and Section 01320. 2.3.3 Contractor shall provide a full time Project Manager onsite unless an exemption is provided in writing

by the Managing Supervisor of Construction. 2.4 Permits required for off-site borrow area(s) from Federal, State and local agencies. 2.5 After contract award the Contractor may be responsible for utilizing the Ameren Contractor Cost Tracking Module

(CCTM) for all lump sum and T&M work. Ameren Purchasing or Strategic Sourcing will decide whether to require CCTM or Ameren's API invoicing system. If CCTM is utilized, the Contractor's representative(s) will be trained by Ameren on the use of the CCTM program in Ameren's EMPRV computer program. The Contractor shall use the CCTM module frequently to estimate/re-estimate the job scope and record actual billing costs.

2.6 Contractor and Sub Contractors shall provide an FME plan in accordance with Foreign Material Exclusion Requirements (Appendix X) prior to start of work.

2.7 Contractor and subcontractors shall submit a Quality Plan which is in compliance with the Quality Requirement in Supplemental General Conditions Section 1A, Item 12, prior to start of work.

2.8 Contractor will be evaluated utilizing the Safety and Housekeeping Scorecards found in the Safety and Contractor Requirements (Appendix A), Attachment A18 and Attachment A19.

END OF SECTION 1C

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1D - 1

SECTION 1D − GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 This specification technical section together with attached appendices covers the requirements for the earthwork construction for Ameren Missouri Labadie Energy Center Utility Waste Landfill (UWF) Cell 1 and Pond 1.

1.2 Codes, Standards, and Regulations

1.2.1 The Contractor shall, as a minimum, perform the necessary work to meet the requirements of the codes, standards and regulations set forth in this specification. In the exercise of his experience and knowledge of the equipment, materials and work covered by this Contract, the Contractor shall perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with other codes, standards and regulations consistent with providing a safe and reliable product.

1.2.2 Any deviations from this specification shall be documented by the submittal of an alternate proposal. Alternate proposal shall list exception by specification section in numerical order on the first page of the alternate proposal. Alternate proposal shall list breaker data sheets from specification after exception sheet. Manufacturing schedule, delivery date, and price shall follow the proposal data sheets. Individual manufacturer specification technical selling points shall be listed at the end of the proposal along with the terms and conditions.

1.2.3 After award, Contractor shall plan on having one design review meeting conference call with the customer. Contractor shall send five (5) sets of drawings and documents for approval for this meeting. See submittal requirements in Information Required By Bidders (Section 1C), Item 2.0. Contractor is responsible for setting up meeting and coordinating conference call.

1.3 Equipment and materials shall be complete in all respects within the limits herein outlined. Errors or

omissions required to be corrected in the field shall be done by the manufacturer or its duly authorized representative at the Vendor’s expense.

1.3.1 The latest revisions or addenda to codes, standards and regulations set forth as the date of the

Contract shall apply. 1.4 The following codes, standards and regulations, with the issue dates noted, shall be complied with except as

modified by this Specification. Materials not specified shall be in accordance with references within the codes and standards listed, or if not listed, with the latest applicable industry standard wherever possible. Conflicts between either the codes, standards, or this Specification shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for resolution.

a) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) b) The Basic Building Code of the Building Officials of Code Administrations International, Inc. (BOCA) c) America Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) d) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) e) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) f) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) g) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) h) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) i) American Welding Society (AWS) j) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) k) Underwriters Laboratories, (UL) l) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) m) Geosynthetic Institute (GSI)

2.0 DESIGN AND MATERIAL 2.1 The design basis is the Ameren Missouri Labadie Energy Center Utility Waste Landfill Construction

Permit Application (CPA), Construction Permit Number 0907101, Franklin County, Missouri, January 2013, Revised August 2013, REVISED November 2013 as approved by the Missouri Department of Natural Resources Solid Waste Management Program (MDNR-SWMP), and all pertinent regulations and permits referenced therein.

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1D - 2 2.2 The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements of the Land Disturbance Permit; Ameren Missouri

“Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Labadie Energy Center, Utility Waste Landfill Project, Franklin County, Missouri,” Preparation Date April 14, 2014, as amended (“SWPPP”); and all other permits.

2.3 Design change, material change/substitution or information requests require the Contractor to submit request

to the Responsible Engineer for approval prior to project changes. Written approval is required from the Responsible Engineer or construction supervisor. If the Responsible Engineer approves the request, he will issue an FCN (Field Change Notice) per Ameren Design Control process.

3.0 TECHNICAL SERVICES – Not Used. 4.0 TESTING 4.1 Contractor, all Sub Contractors, manufacturers and suppliers shall comply with Appendix P - Construction

Quality Assurance Plan in the approved Construction Permit Application. 4.1.1 There shall be weekly meetings between Company personnel, CQA personnel, Contractor and Sub

Contractor(s) to review and discuss such topics as previous work, future work, problems, schedule revisions and other issues.

4.1.2 The Company will require unscheduled meetings to address issues as circumstances dictate. 4.1.3 Contractor shall give the Company a minimum of seven (7) days advance written notification prior to

the start of preparation of subgrade, placement of fill, and construction of the test pad, so that the Company may notify the MDNR-SWMP and the IRPE.

4.2 Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) will be provided by the CQA Engineer under subcontract to the

Company. 5.0 PRE-SHIPMENT INSPECTION 5.1 The Owner reserves the right to inspect the manufactured materials prior to shipment. 5.2 The Vendor shall notify the Owner of all Shipments not less than 14 days prior to the date of shipment to allow

the Owner to inspect the materials if so desired. 6.0 SHIPPING 6.1 Shipments to the plant site shall be consigned to the shipping address as defined in Summary of Work

(Section 1B), Item 1.2.1. 6.2 The vendor shall include costs of shipping all materials and associated equipment together in the price quote. 6.3 The vendor shall be responsible for delivery to the Owner’s site F.O.B. This shall include special work

required to support delivery of heavy and/or oversized items such as, but not limited to, road repairs, road upgrades or extensions, power line disconnections and reconnections, bridge reinforcements, grade alterations, and the like. The Vendor shall provide and coordinate all special services required to complete all deliveries based on the existing conditions surrounding the site on the Contract Date.

6.4 The Vendor shall discuss with the Owner the routing of shipments and shall reroute the same as indicated by

the Owner provided the freight rates and overall costs are no greater than by other routes. 6.5 Truck shipments shall be delivered to the Project Site only when the Contractor’s representative is present to

receive delivery. Deliveries shall not be made to the Plant. The Company shall not be responsible for the security or protection of shipments to the Project Site.

6.6 Packages shall be clearly marked with the Contract Number and Purchase Order Number where applicable.

Packing lists shall identify Contract Number, Purchase Order Number and item numbers and quantities, bills of lading shall identify the Contract number and Purchase Order Number.

6.7 Materials required for protection during shipping and storage shall be treated for fire resistance. Wood

protection shall be Class A, fire retardant, pressure treated type. 6.8 Coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion discoloration, and other damages. Surfaces

which are damaged shall be repaired.

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 1D - 3 7.0 WARRANTY 7.1 The Warranty shall be warranted by the contractor against defects in materials, performance, and

workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance by Ameren. The length of the warranty supersedes the length specified in the GCC’s (General Conditions of Contract). Contractor shall include parts, contractor service engineer, and labor to remove and install the necessary parts and equipment.

Note: As used herein “Seller” means Vendor and “Buyer” means Customer. Seller warrants that its services, including without limitation, its design, inspection, and installation services, and the equipment and materials to be supplied by Seller under this contract, shall be free of defects and shall conform to the requirements of the contract.

END OF SECTION 1D

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 01300-1

SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

1.2.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance Submittals. 5. Construction Photographs. 6. Maintenance Manuals. 7. Warranties.

1.2.2 Administrative Submittals: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions, other applicable

Division 1 Sections, and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Construction Progress Schedule including Schedule of Values 2. Performance and Payment Bonds. 3. Insurance certificates. 4. Applications for Payment. 5. Certified Payroll Reports. 6. Partial and Final Receipt of Payment and Release Forms. 7. Affidavit Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law. 8. Record Drawings. 9. Notification Permits, etc.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.3.1 The procedures shall comply with the General and Supplementary General Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other contractors, all required submittals indicated in Part 3 of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

1.3.1.1 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.

1.3.1.2 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

1.3.1.3 The Company reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with

other submittals until all related submittals are received.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

1.4.1 Drawings, details and instructions provided by the Contractor shall be in accordance with Section 1A-5.0.

1.4.2 Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise

indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.


1.4.3 Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches.

1.5 PRODUCT DATA

1.5.1 Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.

1.5.1.1 Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data

includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information:

a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 1.5.1.2 Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents

has been confirmed. 1.6 SAMPLES

1.6.1. Submit full-size, fully fabricated samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.

1.6.1.1 Submit samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit samples for a

final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.

a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the

material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to other Sections for requirements for samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

c. Refer to other Sections for samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of sample submittals.

d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Company's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS

1.7.1 Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the specifications.


1.7.2 Certifications: Where other Sections of the specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.

1.7.2.1 Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual

authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. 1.8 WARRANTIES

Submit all required manufacturer’s warranties in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions, Section 1D-8.0, and this and other sections of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION

Contractor shall submit the required information for materials and products in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions and this and other Sections of the contract documents. The following list is provided for the convenience of the Contractor but does not change the Contractor’s responsibility to meet the requirements of other Sections.

Section Description When Required 1A-7.1 Organization chart and resumes for management team Prior to Mobilize 1A-7.6 Signed Contractor Agreement of Understanding form (Attachment A17) Prior to start 1A-7.8.4 Distribute minutes of progress meetings Within 2 days 1A-9.4 Inventory of materials being removed from site Prior to removal 1A-12.3, 1C-1.6.2 Copy of Contractor’s quality management program and procedures With Bid 1A-15.0 Complete accounting information, material invoices, total cost updates Weekly 1B-1.3.11 Work plan and schedule for construction of overpass and embankment Prior to installation 1B-2.4.9 Geographic Positioning System (GPS), 2 portable GPS units At mobilization 1B-3.0 Contractor’s Schedule 10 days after Award 1B-8.2 Report of completed activities with man-days expended 3 wks. after completion 1C-1.1.1 Base Lump Sum Bid With Bid 1C-1.1.2 Unit Price for Off-Site Fill per Cubic Yard With Bid 1C-1.1.3 Breakout cost for safety personnel per Appendix A, Item 4.2 With Bid 1C-1.2.1 List of major subcontractors, with contact information and qualifications With Bid 1C-1.2.2 Schedule of time and material (T&M) rates With Bib 1C-1.3.1 Project Execution Plan With Bid 1C-1.3.1.1 Location(s) of off-site borrow source(s) for general fill material With Bid 1C-1.3.1.2 Description of GPS System With Bid 1C-1.4 Exceptions With Bid 1C-1.5.1 Completed Contractor Environmental Safety & Health Data Form (A9) With Bid 1C-1.5.2 Resume of Contractor’s safety personnel associated with the Project With Bid 1C-1.5.3, App. A Contractor’s ES&H program manual With Bid 1C-2.1 Contractor Schedule in accordance with Section 01320 and Appendix D 10 days after Award 1C-2.2 Revised Project Execution Plan 10 days after Award 1C-2.3 Contractor Management Plan 10 days after Award 1C-2.4 Permits required for off-site borrow source(s) After Award 1C-2.6 FME Plan in accordance with Appendix X After Award 1C-2.7 Project-Specific Quality Plan in Accordance with 1A – Item 12.5 After Award 1D-1.2.3 Design Review Meeting Conference Call, 5 sets of drawings & documents After Award 1D-4.1.3 Written notice prior to start of listed earthwork activities 7 days prior to start 01320-1.2.2 Preliminary Schedule of Submittals 10 days after Award 01320-1.2.4 Updated Schedule of Submittals With meeting minutes 01500-1.5 Inspections and permits required for temporary utilities Prior to use 02200-1.6 Samples of off-site materials 14 days before delivery 02511-1.5 25-lbs. samples of each aggregate for crushed stone paving 7 days before delivery 02511-1.5 Manufacturer, product specifications for woven geotextile Prior to delivery 02535-1.4.2 Shop drawings of precast concrete culvert Prior to fabrication


Section Description When Required 02625-1.4.2 Proposed erosion control plan 10 days after Award 02625-1.4.3 Inspections of SWPPP As required by SWPPP 02625-1.4.4 Records and training log per Section 6 of SWPPP As required by SWPPP 02625-2.2 Certifications and samples of materials for SWPPP Prior to installing 02820-1.4.1 Manufacturer of guardrail system with drawings and material specifications Prior to shipping 02831-1.5.1 Product data for fencing and gates Prior to fabrication 02831-1.5.5 Shop drawings of fence, gates, posts, rails, and other components Prior to fabrication 02891-1.4.1 Manufacturer(s) of permanent signs with drawings and specifications Prior to fabrication 02936-1.6 Submittals for permanent seed, fertilizer, mulch, methods Prior to installing 03300-1.4.1 Mix design and chemical analysis for each type of application Prior to delivery 03600-1.4.1 Name and qualifications of design/builder for precast concrete overpass With Bid 03600-1.4.1 Design calculations, drawings, material specifications for overpass Prior to fabrication 03600-1.4.2 Resume and qualifications for Field Supervisor for installation of overpass 30 days prior to const. 03600-1.4.3 Copies of approvals and permits from Franklin County Prior to installation 03610-1.4.1 Name and qualifications for design/builder of MSE wing walls With Bid 03610-1.4.2 Design calculations, drawings, material specifications for MSE wing walls 30 days prior to const. 03610-1.4.3 Manufacturer’s certifications for retaining wall components 30 days prior to const. 03610-1.4.4 Manufacturer’s certification for MSE walls system 30 days prior to const. 03610-1.4.5 Test reports documenting strength of modular concrete units and geo-grid Prior to start of const. 03610-1.4.6 Resume and qualifications for Field Supervisor for installation of MSE walls Prior to start of const. App. A-1.4.11 Incident/Accident Reporting (Attachments A1, A2 & A3 if applicable) Within 24 hours App. A-4.4 Project-specific ES&H Action Plan with Emergency Response Action Plan After Award App. A-4.5 Onsite ES&H representative to coordinate Contractor ES&H activities At mobilization App. A-4.5 Frequencies of all walkie-talkie 2-way radios (Attachment A14) At mobilization App. A-4.7.2 Quantities, timetables and characterization of wastes to be generated After Award App. A-4.7.8 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for materials brought onto jobsite At delivery App. A-4.7.8 Notification of materials brought onto jobsite in excess of planned quantity Prior to delivery App. A-4.9 Documentation of OSHA training Maintained on site App. A-4.11.4 Monthly Contractor Accident Statistics Report (Attachment A10) Monthly App. A-4.12.7 Crane Maintenance Safety Checklist (Attachment A16) Prior to operation App. A-4.13.2 Critical Lift Plan if required by Critical Lift Determination (Item 4.13.1) Prior to lift Attach. A15 Documentation of employee and Sub Contractor drug testing Prior to assignment Attach. A17 Contractor Agreement of Understanding Prior to mobilization Appendix E Material Safety Data Sheets Contractor Affidavit, if required Prior to delivery App. W-2.1 Contractor’s designated person to monitor welding related activities At mobilization App. W-2.2 Applicable Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) At mobilization App. W-2.3 Weld Map, schedule description of welds Prior to operations App. W-2.4 Qualification records for each welder Prior to operations

END OF SECTION 01300


SECTION 01320 - SCHEDULES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Appendix D – Standard Contractor Scheduling Requirements 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.2.1 Submit to the Ameren Construction Supervisor within ten (10) days following the Award a preliminary

progress schedule showing the rate of progress the Contractor agrees to maintain and the order in which he proposed to carry out the various phases of work.

1.2.2 Schedule shall show percentage of work completed at any time, anticipated monthly payments by

Company, as well as significant milestone dates such as listed in Section 1B-3.0 which shall serve as check points to determine compliance with approved schedule.

1.2.3 Submit an updated schedule for presentation at each progress meeting. The Contractor shall update

the schedule as necessary to reflect the current schedule and its relationship to the original schedule. The updated schedule shall reflect any changes in the logic, sequence, durations or completion date. Payments to the Contractor shall be suspended if the progress schedule is not adequately updated to reflect actual conditions.

1.2.4 Submit progress schedules to Sub Contractors to permit coordinating their progress schedules to the

general construction work. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of other construction activities.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE – BAR CHART SCHEDULE 1.3.1. The Contractor for shall prepare a construction schedule for the entire Project in accordance with the

requirements of Appendix D and Section 1B-3.0.

1.3.1.1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week.

1.3.1.2 For significant construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an

estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within the time bar. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion percentage.

1.3.1.3 Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

Coordinate each element on schedule with other construction activities. Include minor elements involved in the overall sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.

1.3.1.4. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the list of Sub Contracts, Submittal

Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1.3.1.5 Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Upon acceptance of the Construction Progress Schedule, prepare and submit a complete schedule

of submittals. Coordinate the submittal schedule with Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS, the approved Construction Progress Schedule, list of Sub Contracts, and the list of products.

1.4.2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information. 1. Scheduled date for the first submittal. 2. Related Section number.


3. Submittal category. 4. Name of the subcontractor. 5. Description of the part of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for resubmittal. 7. Scheduled date for the Company's final release or approval. 1.4.3 Distribution: Following the Company's response to the initial submittal schedule, print and distribute

copies to the Company, Sub Contractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated.

1. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 2. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. 3. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned part of the Work

and are no longer involved in construction activities. 1.4.4 Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 PROJECT INSPECTION 1.5.1 The Ameren Construction Supervisor will designate the time for a regular update inspection at which

time representatives of the Company, Engineer and Contractor will inspect the Project and agree on progress of all activities. The information so obtained may be the basis for the Contractor's schedule update.

1.5.2 The Ameren Construction Supervisor will review progress with the Contractor. PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CRITICAL DATES

The Schedule prepared and maintained by the Contractor shall show as a minimum the completion and milestone dates listed in Section 1B-3.0 for the timely completion of the Work.

3.2 NOTIFICATION OF MDNR – SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM The Contractor shall notify the Company and the Company shall notify the MDNR – Solid Waste Management

Program (SWMP) and the IRPE before the start of each construction activity in accordance with Section 1D-4.1.3. The Contractor shall not directly communicate with the MDNR-SWMP.



SECTION 01500 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form,

and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Section 02100 – Site Clearing and Preparation Section 02200 – Earthwork Section 02625 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Program (SWPPP) Section 02831 – Fencing and Gates

Ameren Missouri “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Labadie Energy Center, Utility Waste Landfill Project, Franklin County, Missouri,” (“SWPPP”) Preparation Date April 14, 2014, and as amended.

1.2 SUMMARY 1.2.1 This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including

temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. 1.2.2 Temporary utilities are the discretion of the Contractor. 1.2.3 Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Field office, temporary sanitation facilities, and storage area. 2. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. 1.2.4 Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 2. Environmental protection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. 1.3.2 Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility

before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.4.1 The site does not have any utilities for temporary connections. 1.4.2 All operations shall be in accordance with the SWPPP. 1.4.3 Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in

a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall furnish copies of all permits and inspection reports to the Company prior to use.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve

the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

3.1.2 Contractor’s office, storage trailers and other temporary facilities shall be located in the temporary

parking and laydown area shown on the Contract Drawings. The Company shall be not responsible for security or protection of the Contractor’s temporary facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION . 3.2.1 Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing

service, other than power to site office (3.1.2). Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.

3.2.2 Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Company. The

Company will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. 3.3 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION 3.3.1 Temporary and Contractor Name Signs: All signs must be approved by the Company. Support on

posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Contractor may place his companies name on the job or storage trailer.

3.3.2 Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and

visitors. 3.4 COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE 3.4.1 Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily in accordance with SWPPP. 3.4.2 Comply with requirements of Appendix A-4.7 for removal of hazardous or combustible waste material

and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

3.4.3 Collection of concrete wash-out shall be in accordance with SWPPP. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 3.5.1 Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection

of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

3.5.2 Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft,

provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

3.5.3 Temporary Fencing: Contractor shall maintain security around the existing UWL facilities by

installing and maintaining temporary fencing as required in Section 02831. The temporary fencing shall become the property of the Company at the end of the Project.

3.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION


3.6.1 All operations shall be in accordance with the SWPPP. A portion of the BMP’s installed for Phase 1

shall be replaced or relocated as shown on the Contract Drawings. New BMP’s shall be installed for the construction of the access road embankment, or as directed by the Company. BMP’s for the access road embankment shall be removed at the end of construction and the area re-graded, seeded and mulched as needed.

3.6.2 Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods

that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.

3.6.3 Construct and operate wash-off facility for vehicles in accordance with SWPPP.

3.6.4 Contractor shall clean public right-of-ways of mud or tracked materials as required by the Ameren Construction Supervisor or Franklin County. Contractor shall use equipment specifically designed for street cleaning and approved by the Ameren Construction Supervisor.

3.6.5 All refueling stations and fuel tanks shall have a containment system to prevent spread of

contamination in the event of a spill. Contractor shall have equipment to collect and removed spilled fuel or other liquids.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES, PARKING, LAYDOWN AREA

3.7.1 Temporary construction entrances off of Labadie Bottom Road were installed under Phase 1 construction. The parking and laydown area that was constructed for Phase 1 shall be modified has shown on the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall add, modify and maintain temporary construction entrances, parking and laydown area at no additional cost to the Company.

3.7.2 Plans for expansion or the addition of construction entrances shall be approved by the Company

prior to construction. Plans shall show modifications to the SWPPP as needed. Contractor shall obtain any necessary permits from Franklin County, and submit copies of permits to the Company.

3.7.3 Temporary construction entrances, parking and laydown area will remain after the completion of the

Work unless required to be removed by the Company. 3.8 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 3.8.1 Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary

facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. 3.8.2 Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by

freezing temperatures and similar elements. 3.8.3 Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when

replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. The temporary fence and gate at the existing ash pond shall NOT be removed.

3.8.4 Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities other than the temporary fence and gate

are the Contractor's property. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period.


LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. 02100 - 1

SECTION 02100 SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1.1.1 Clear and grub defined construction areas of plant life/grass. 1.1.2 Remove surface debris. 1.1.3 Remove portion of the perimeter fence of the existing ash pond and immediately install temporary

fence to maintain security. 1.1.4 Construct temporary facilities. 1.1.5 Repair or replace protection of designated potential wetlands. 1.1.6 Install, repair or replace best management practices (BMPs) in accordance with SWPPP. 1.1.7 Install, repair or replace temporary protection for permanent monitoring wells.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 02200 – Earthwork Section 02511 – Crushed Stone Paving Section 02625 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Program (SWPPP) Section 02831 – Temporary and Permanent Fences Ameren Missouri “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Labadie Energy Center, Utility Waste Landfill Project, Franklin County, Missouri,” (“SWPPP”) Preparation Date April 14, 2014, and as amended.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to all applicable Local, State and Federal laws, codes and ordinances for disposal of debris. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The Company will retain a CQA Engineer to observe grading operations, and verify that the requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

1.5.1 Clearing: Clearing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory disposal of trees, downed timber, snags, brush, garbage, trash, debris, fencing, and other items occurring in the designated areas to be cleared.

1.5.2 Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory disposal of stumps, roots, and

matted roots from the designated grubbing areas. Grubbing also includes filling of holes from the grubbing operation.

1.5.3 Stripping: Stripping shall consist of the removal and satisfactory disposal of crops, weeds, grass,

and other vegetative materials to the ground surface and all topsoil. 1.5.4 Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables, underground services, overhead

electric lines, and all appurtenant equipment and facilities. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

1.6.1 Ameren previously contracted to: strip and stockpile topsoil over a portion of the site for topsoil stockpile, stockpile suitable clay liner soils; complete rough grading; and install Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) features; and install protections for the designated potential wetlands.

1.6.2 The topographic survey is shown in the Contact Drawings for information only and depicts the

general existing site conditions prior to Phase 1 Construction (see Section 1B-1.3.2).


1.6.3 All clearing, grubbing, stripping, filling and backfilling shall be constructed to the lines, grades, and cross sections indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Company.

1.6.4 Temporary haul roads shall be located and constructed as approved by the Company within the

construction limits. Haul roads constructed during the contract duration shall be removed after work is completed and the impacted area restored to its pre-construction conditions. All costs associated with these haul roads shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.

1.6.5 The Contractor shall not block or restrict the flow in a natural drain, existing culvert, ditch or channel

at any time without obtaining prior written approval from the Company. This approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any damage caused by his operation. The Contractor shall monitor the flow and provide sufficient free discharge areas so that conditions are not worsened upstream or downstream by possible floods during construction.

1.6.6 Contractor shall prevent damage to crops outside of the area of Work as a direct or indirect result of

his construction activities. All damages, delays and expenses associated with damage or the prevention of damage to crops outside of the area of Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be reimbursed by the Company.

1.6.7 Contractor shall continuously maintain all roadways free of mud or tracked materials during site

operations. Contractor shall use equipment specifically designed for street cleaning and approved by the Ameren Construction Supervisor.

1.7 CONTROL OF SURFACE WATER AND GROUND WATER

The level of the ground water on site is controlled by the level of the adjacent Missouri River. The Contractor shall manage storm water so that it does not collect in excavations or shall install sumps and pumps to remove surface storm water so that it does not interfere with operations. Operations will be temporarily halted if the ground water level rises to within 2 to 3 feet of the bottom of any excavation subgrade. The Company shall not pay for dewatering of the excavations to lower the ground water level.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 General berm, subgrade and roadway fill material shall be provided by the Contractor from an off-site source,

which will need to be tested and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to arrival on site. Refer to Section 02200.

2.2 Temporary fence shall be in accordance with Section 2831. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SITE PREPARATION

3.1.1 Silt fences and other erosion control devices shall be installed where needed to prevent sedimentation in areas outside the limits of construction. Provide, install and maintain siltation and erosion control devices in accordance with Section 02625. Erosion control devices that remain from the previous contract may be repaired and maintained where they are located at the limits of construction for this Work.

3.1.2 Control of Surface Runoff: Direct storm water runoff away from fill areas to collection pits/basins.

Runoff that collects in the excavations shall be removed by the Contractor as needed to continue operations. Temporary ditches, dry wells, or sump pumps may be used with the approval of the Company or Geotechnical Engineer.

3.2 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING

3.2.1 Perform clearing only in areas where earthwork or other construction operations are to be performed. 3.2.2. Clear and grub all existing areas to be excavated or to accept fill of all trees, plants, debris, and other

items. Debris shall be placed in an area designated by the Company or Geotechnical Engineer. 3.2.3 Remove all miscellaneous surface debris in areas to be graded. This shall include any rubble or

stones larger than three inches in diameter.


3.3.4 Should any underground utilities be encountered, immediately take all necessary precautions and immediately notify the Company or Geotechnical Engineer.

3.3 PROTECTION

3.3.1 Protect adjacent agricultural areas. 3.3.2 Repair or replace and maintain protection of designated potential wetlands in accordance with

Section 02625. 3.3.3 Install, modify, repair or replace and maintain best management practices (BMPs) for SWPPP in

accordance with Section 02625. 3.3.4 Protect benchmarks, monitoring wells and existing work from damage or displacement. 3.3.5 Request all local utilities to mark all known utilities at least one week in advance of commencing site

clearing. 3.3.6 Protect all above or below ground utilities which are to remain.

3.4 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FENCE

Contractor shall remove the existing perimeter fencing at the existing ash pond to the extents shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall install temporary fencing to maintain security of the existing ash pond facilities during and after Phase 1A construction in accordance with Section 02831.



SECTION 02200 – EARTHWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

1.1.1 The work in this Section includes all excavation, trenching, filling, backfilling, compacting, grading and all related items necessary to complete the work indicated or specified in the Contract Documents.

1.1.2 Construction of the perimeter berms for Cell 1 and Pond 1, subgrade fill for Cell 1, and access road

embankment utilizing suitable off-site fill material approved by the CQA Engineer in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2.1 Section 01300 - Submittals 1.2.2 Section 02100 – Site Clearing and Preparation 1.2.3 Section 02511 – Crushed Stone Paving 1.2.4 Section 02535 – Culverts 1.2.5 Section 03600 – Labadie Bottom Road Overpass 1.2.6 Section 03610 - Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ASTM D422 “Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils” 1.3.2 ASTM D698 “Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-Pound

(2.49kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (304.8 mm) Drop” 1.3.3 ASTM D2487 “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes” 1.3.4 ASTM D2488 “Practice for Description and Classification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)” 1.3.5 ASTM D2922 “Shallow Depth Nuclear Density Tests” 1.3.6 ASTM D2937 “Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive Cylinder Method” 1.3.7 ASTM D2974 “Standard Test Method for Moisture, Ash and Organic Matter of Peat and Other

Organic Soils 1.3.8 ASTM D3017 “Water Content by Nuclear Methods” 1.3.9 ASTM D4253 “Maximum Index Density of Soils using a Vibratory Table” 1.3.10 ASTM D4254 “Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density” 1.3.11 ASTM D4318 “Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils” 1.3.12 ASTM D4373 ”Standard Test Method for Calcium Carbonate Content of Soils” 1.3.13 ASTM D5084 “Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated Porous Materials Using a

Flexible Wall Permeameter” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 The Company will retain a CQA Engineer to observe grading operations, and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.4.2 The Company will retain a licensed Surveyor to verify that the geometry and dimensions of the

earthwork meets the requirements of Section 02200-3.5 at the completion of construction. If the results of the Surveyor show that the grading requirements have not been met, then the Contractor shall correct the grading and shall coordinate with the Company’s Surveyor to re-survey the work. The Contractor shall pay for all subsequent surveys to correct the grading. Only the Surveyor retained by the Company shall verify the final geometry and dimensions of earthwork at the completion of construction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.5.1 Existing utility lines that are shown on the Contract Drawings or the locations of which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained shall be protected from damage during excavation.


1.5.2 The Contractor shall prevent damage to crops outside of the area of Work as a direct or indirect result of his construction activities. All damages, delays and expenses associated with damage or the prevention of damage to crops outside of the area of Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be reimbursed by the Company.

1.5.3 Contractor shall continuously maintain all roadways free of CCP, mud or tracked materials during site

operations. Contractor shall use equipment specifically designed for street cleaning and approved by the Ameren Construction Supervisor.

1.5.4 Refer to Section 1B-1.3.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall submit samples of off-site materials to the CQA Engineer in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals a minimum of 14 days prior to delivery of the materials to the site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL BERM FILL

2.1.1 General berm fill material for construction of perimeter berms, access road embankment, and perimeter road shall be free of rock larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, or other deleterious matter. The ASTM Classification of acceptable fill material shall be CL, SC, and/or GC. Soil materials shall be mixed to produce a homogeneous fill.

2.1.2 The compacted fill shall have a minimum moist unit weight of 120 pcf when compacted in place in

accordance with Section 02200-3.4, shall have an undrained shear strength of 1000 psf or greater, and effective internal friction angle of 30° or greater as determined from laboratory testing by the Geotechnical Engineer.

2.2 SUBGRADE FILL IN CELL 1

2.2.1 Subgrade fill may consist of cohesionless soils defined in 2.2.1 or cohesive soil meeting the requirements of Section 2.1.

2.2.2 Subgrade fill may consist of compacted poorly-graded sand (ASTM Classification SP), poorly-graded

sand with some fines (SP-SM, with 5 to 12% passing U.S. #200 sieve), or gravelly sands (GP or GP-SP). When compacted in accordance with Section 02200-3.4, the cohesionless subgrade fill shall have a minimum moist unit weight of 120 PCF, and an effective internal friction angle of 30º or greater as determined from laboratory testing by the Geotechnical Engineer.

2.3 Topsoil or vegetative cover consists of the surface layer of soil on site that contains organic material, and shall

be free of root balls, grass, stalks, crop residue, timber, rocks larger than one inch, or debris. 2.4 Crushed limestone for pavement – see Section 02511 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES

Contractor shall verify the location, type and depth of each utility, and provide temporary protection of buried utilities in accordance with Section 1B – Summary of Work.

3.2 SUBGRADES

3.2.1 The areas to receive fill shall to be cleared and stripped. Placement of fill shall not begin in an area until the stripping of topsoil or the placement and compaction of backfill is approved by the CQA Engineer.

3.2.2 CQA Engineer shall approve subgrades prior to placement of fill. Contractor shall proofroll

subgrades with a fully-load tandem dump track or scraper as directed by the CQA Engineer. If the CQA Engineer identifies unsuitable material, then the Contractor shall excavate unsatisfactory soil material and replace with compacted backfill or fill material in accordance with other sections of these specifications.


3.2.3 Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities at no cost to the Company.

3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL PLACEMENT 3.3.1 Backfill excavations promptly following acceptance of affected work below final grade. 3.3.2 Do not place snow, ice or frozen earth in fill and do not place fill on a frozen surface. 3.3.3 Perimeter berms and embankments shall be constructed in uniform reaches or sections so that the

uncompleted ends of the fill have a temporary slope that is no steeper than 1(V) to 4(H). The Company or CQA Engineer shall approve the locations of fill placement.

3.3.4 Slopes that are steeper than 1(V) to 4(H) shall be continuously benched in not less than 12-inch rises

as the work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit placing and compacting operations. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the ground line and the vertical side of the previous bench.

3.3.5 Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer to achieve the

minimum percent of maximum density specified. 3.3.6 Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to

specified density.

3.4 COMPACTION

3.4.1 Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Place evenly alongside structures and utilities to required elevations.

3.4.2 Compact all cohesive soils unless otherwise specified to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry unit

weight as determined by the Standard Proctor Moisture Density Test (ASTM D698). The moisture content of the fill at the time of compaction shall not be less than optimum moisture content. The maximum moisture content at the time of compaction will be governed by the minimum required dry unit weight.

3.4.3 Granular or cohesionless materials that do not exhibit a moisture-density relationship from the ASTM

D698 standard test method shall be compacted to a minimum relative density of 75% as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.

3.4.4 Compaction of the vegetative cover layer shall be done by a minimum of two (2) uniform complete

coverages with a tracked bulldozer with a minimum applied ground pressure of 1000 PSF. The CQA Engineer shall approve of compaction.

3.5 GRADING

3.5.1 General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross-sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

3.5.2 Tolerances unless otherwise specified in other sections:

3.5.2.1 Perimeter Berms and Crushed Stone Paving: not less than the elevations shown on the

Contract Drawings nor more than 0.25 feet above the elevations shown. 3.5.2.2 Subgrade below Clay Liner: + 0.10 feet. 3.5.2.3 Storm Water Inlet and Emergency Spillway: +0.10 feet. 3.5.2.3 Other areas: + 0.25 feet

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.6.1 Contractor shall allow the CQA Engineer to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer and shall not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements.


3.6.2 The degree of compaction for cohesionless sands will be tested on the compacted lift below the surface confined lift. The Contractor shall excavate a test area as directed by the CQA Engineer for testing and restore the excavated surface lift(s) at no additional expense to the Company.

3.6.3 If test results indicate that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and

moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, re-compact, and re-test until obtaining required density.

3.7 PROTECTION

3.7.1 Protect newly graded areas from actions of the elements or construction activities. 3.7.2 Settled or eroded areas shall be filled and repaired and grades reestablished to the required

elevations and slopes.



SECTION 02220 – CLAY LINER TEST PAD

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED This Section includes the placement, compaction and testing of a Test Pad of the stockpiled clay liner material

to demonstrate the effectiveness of the compactor and construction procedures to achieve the minimum required dry unit weight as determined by the CQA Engineer.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 02200 – Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ASTM D422 “Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils” 1.3.2 D1140 – Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 Sieve 1.3.3 ASTM D698 “Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-Pound

(2.49kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (304.8 mm) Drop” 1.3.4 ASTM D2487 “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes” 1.3.5 ASTM D2488 “Practice for Description and Classification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)” 1.3.6 ASTM D2922 “Shallow Depth Nuclear Density Tests” 1.3.7 ASTM D2937 “Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive Cylinder Method” 1.3.8 ASTM D2974 “Standard Test Method for Moisture, Ash and Organic Matter of Peat and Other

Organic Soils 1.3.9 ASTM D3017 “Water Content by Nuclear Methods” 1.3.10 ASTM D4318 “Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils” 1.3.11 ASTM D4373 ”Standard Test Method for Calcium Carbonate Content of Soils” 1.3.12 ASTM D5084 “Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated Porous Materials Using a

Flexible Wall Permeameter” 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The Company will retain a geotechnical engineering firm to perform Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) and testing for the clay liner test pad.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 All clay fill to be used for the test pad shall be from the existing stockpile north of Labadie Bottom Road that

has been tested by the CQA Engineer. 2.2 COMPACTOR Compactor shall be a Caterpillar (CAT) 815F Series 2 self-propelled chevron-foot compactor. The feet shall

be 7.5 inches high or greater. The operating weight shall be 45,000 pounds or more. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 The construction and testing of the test pad shall be done after the subgrade fill within Cell 1 has been

completed and approved by the CQA Engineer over the area of the test pad. The Contractor shall notify the Company in accordance with Section 1D-4.1.3 prior to the start of the test pad construction.

3.2 The test pad will be a minimum of 75 feet wide by 150 feet long, or large enough to allow construction

equipment the necessary room to successfully complete required passes and compaction. The approximate size and location of the test pad shall be approved by the CQA Engineer. The CQA Engineer shall observe all activities pertaining to the test pad construction.


3.3 The test pad will be constructed 3 feet thick to accommodate the field sampling and testing. 3.4 Contractor shall moisture-condition the clay liner material in the stockpile as necessary in accordance with

Section 02200. The moisture content at the time of placement and compaction in the test pad shall be above the optimum moisture content as determined by the CQA Engineer and shall be no more than 4% above optimum.

3.5 The clay liner material shall be placed in 8-inch loose lifts. The Contractor shall check the thickness of the

loose lift with a portable GPS receiver. 3.6 COMPACTION PROCEDURE

3.6.1 The compactor shall make a “double-pass” in the longitudinal direction and then a double-pass in the transverse direction with respect to the edges of the test pad. A “double-pass” shall mean that the compactor moved laterally the width of the drum after each pass so that each lift was completely rolled in the same path twice in each direction.

3.6.2 After completing the two double-passes, the CQA Engineer shall test the dry unit weight of the

compacted lift. If the lift fails to meet the minimum dry unit weight determined by the CQA Engineer, then the Contractor shall repeat the compaction procedure as directed by the CQA Engineer.

3.6.3 After a lift passes compaction as determined by the CQA Engineer, then the Contractor will add the

next loose lift. 3.6.4 Once a compaction procedure is demonstrated to achieve the required dry unit weight, then the

Contractor shall follow that same procedure. 3.7 The Contractor shall roll the surface of the test pad with a smooth drum roller after the final lift is approved by

the CQA Engineer, and then shall cover the test pad with plastic to prevent desiccation. 3.8 At the completion of test pad construction, verification testing will be completed by the CQA Engineer in

accordance with the following testing schedule:

3.8.1 Two laboratory hydraulic conductivity tests shall be performed utilizing the Flexible Wall Permeameter Test (ASTM D 5084) on undisturbed samples obtained from the completed test pad. Soil samples will be collected by pushing Shelby tubes at random locations on the test pad.

3.8.2 Bulk samples will be taken to the laboratory for Liquid Limit (LL) and Plasticity Index (PI) and Standard Proctor Compaction tests.

3.8.3 One in-situ hydraulic conductivity test shall be performed on the completed test pad using a Sealed

Double Ring Infiltrometer Test (ASTM D 5093) or a series of 5 Boutwell Permeameter Tests (ASTM D 6391-99).

3.8.4 Two or more test pits shall be excavated by the Contractor in the test pad to observe interlift bonding

of the clay. The excavation of the test pits shall be under the direction a representative of MDNR-SWMP. The test pits will be located at random locations in an effort to view representative test pad soil profiles.

3.9 The CQA Engineer will evaluate the test results to determine whether the clay liner meets the requirements of

the MDNR-SWMP. If the test pad is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall work with the CQA Engineer to modify the construction procedures. If the test pad is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall construct a new test pad in accordance with the modified procedures, and the tests will be repeated.

3.10 If the test pad is constructed in accordance with all of the requirements and directions of the CQA Engineer

and subsequently is found to be unsatisfactory, then the Company will negotiate the construction of subsequent test pad(s) on a time-and-materials basis with the Contractor.

3.11 The clay liner test pad will be left in place at the end of the Project.



SECTION 02511 – CRUSHED STONE PAVING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

The work pertaining to this section includes all labor, tools, material and equipment necessary for the final shaping and compaction of the subgrade and construction of the crushed limestone aggregate paving as shown on the Construction Drawings or as specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

1.2.1 Missouri Department of Transportation (MoDOT) Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, 2012, with Addendums.

1.2.2 Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission (MHTC) Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction, July 2009, with Supplemental Plans effective October 1, 2014.

1.2.3 ASTM C136 “Sieve Analyses of Fine and Coarse Aggregates” 1.2.4 ASTM D422 “Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils” 1.2.5 ASTM D698 “Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-Pound

(2.49kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (304.8 mm) Drop” 1.2.6 ASTM D2487 “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes” 1.2.7 ASTM D2488 “Practice for Description and Classification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)” 1.2.8 ASTM D2922 “Shallow Depth Nuclear Density Tests” 1.2.9 ASTM D3017 “Water Content by Nuclear Methods” 1.2.10 ASTM D3786 Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics 1.2.11 ASTM D4253 “Maximum Index Density of Soils using a Vibratory Table” 1.2.12 ASTM D4254 “Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density” 1.2.13 ASTM D4533 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles 1.2.14 ASTM D4632 Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles 1.2.15 ASTM D4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related

Products 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 02100 – Clearing and Site Preparation Section 02200 – Earthwork

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The Company will retain the services of an independent Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) Engineer to observe the porous pavement installation and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall submit 25-lbs samples of each aggregate to the CQA Engineer for testing a minimum of 7 working days prior to delivery to the site. Contractor shall submit proposed manufacturer, product specifications and sample for woven geotextile to CQA Engineer for approval prior to shipment to the site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CRUSHED LIMESTONE AGGREGATE

2.1.1 Base course: crushed aggregate shall comply with MoDOT Section 1007.4 – Type 7 Aggregate, shall be clean, tough, and durable; free of thin and elongated pieces of soft and objectionable matter; shall not contain reclaimed asphalt or concrete, with the following gradation:


Nominal Size Percent Passing by Weight 2 inch sieve 100 1 inch sieve 70 – 100 U.S. No. 8 sieve 15 – 50 U.S. No. 200 sieve 0 – 12

2.1.2 Surface course: crushed aggregate shall comply with MoDOT Section 1006. Aggregate shall be

clean, tough, and durable; free of thin and elongated pieces of soft and objectionable matter; shall not contain reclaimed asphalt or concrete, and have Gradation A as follows:

Nominal Size Percent Passing by Weight

1-inch sieve 100 ¾-inch sieve 80 – 100 U.S. No. 4 sieve 60 maximum U.S. No. 10 sieve 10 – 35 U.S. No. 200 sieve 0 – 10

2.2 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE

The reinforcement for the crushed stone paving shall be a woven polypropylene geotextile such as HP570 manufactured by TenCate Mirafi, or approved equal. The geotextile shall have shall be resistant to ultraviolet degradation, to damage under normal construction practices, and resistant to biological or chemical degradation. The geotextile shall have the following mechanical properties (minimum average roll value):

Mechanical Property Test Method Minimum Average Roll Value Grab tensile strength ASTM D4632 475 lbs. Grab tensile elongation ASTM D4632 12% Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D4533 180 lbs. Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D3786 1200 psi Puncture Strength ASTM D4833 195 lbs.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE Subgrade shall be proof-rolled and compacted in conformance with Section 02200 – Earthwork. 3.2 GEOTEXTILE REINFORCEMENT

The geotextile shall be placed on the approved compacted subgrade as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The minimum overlap shall be 36 inches.

3.3 CRUSHED LIMESTONE AGGREGATE PAVING

3.3.1 The base course shall be compacted base crushed aggregate with a minimum thickness of 9 inches. The base course shall only be applied to approved subgrade.

3.3.2 The top course shall be compacted top cap aggregate with a minimum thickness of 3 inches. The

top course shall only be applied to approved base course. 3.3.3 The crushed limestone aggregate shall be placed and compacted in conformance with Section

02200 - Earthwork.

3.4 GRADE CONTROL

3.4.1 During construction, the lines and grades including crown and cross slope indicated for the aggregate surface course shall be maintained by means of line and grade stakes placed by the Contractor.

3.4.2 Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, the cross-slope for drainage on crushed stone

paving shall be 2%. The cross-slope on the berm road around Cell 1 shall slope downward toward the Cell. The cross-slope on the perimeter roads at the base of the perimeter berms and the ramps shall slope downward away from the toe of the berm.


3.5 SMOOTHNESS TEST

The surface of each layer shall not show any deviations in excess of 1- inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge applied both parallel with and at right angles to the centerline of the flow of traffic. Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by the Contractor by removing material, replacing with new material, or reworking existing material and compacting, as directed.

3.6 THICKNESS

The completed thickness of each course shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. The thickness of the aggregate surface course shall be measured at intervals in such manner that there will be a thickness measurement for at least each 500 square yards of the aggregate surface course. When the measured thickness of the aggregate surface course is less than 2-1/2 inches, the Contractor, at no additional expense to the Company shall correct such areas by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, re-blading, and re-compacting, as directed by the Company. Where the measured thickness of the aggregate surface course is more than 1/2 inch thicker than that indicated, it shall be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements provided all surfaces freely drain.

3.7 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK

The Contractor shall maintain the completed work throughout construction and shall replace and re-grade any portions that become damaged by construction traffic as directed by the Company.



SECTION 02535 – CULVERTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED This Section pertains to furnishing and installing of a reinforced concrete culvert for storm water drainage below the access road embankment as shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 02200 – Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ASTM C76 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 1.3.2 Missouri Department of Transportation (MoDOT) Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway

Construction, 2012, with Addendums. 1.3.3 Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission (MHTC) Missouri Standard Plans for Highway

Construction, July 2009, with Supplemental Plans effective October 1, 2014. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals:

1.4.2 Sealed shop drawings of all precast concrete elements showing product dimensions, steel reinforcement, maximum loadings and performance capacities prior to fabrication.

PART 2 – PPRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) CULVERTS 2.1.1 Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 03300.

2.1.2 Reinforced concrete culverts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C76 for Class III and MoDOT Section 1026 – Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Perform all excavation, trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 02200. 3.2 Reinforced concrete pipe culverts shall be installed as shown on the contract drawings and shall conform to

the requirements of MoDOT Section 726.3 – Construction Requirements. The bedding shall be Category 3. The flowline of the culvert shall follow the existing contours such that there is no increase in ponding of runoff north of the access road embankment or increase in flooding of Labadie Bottom Road.



SECTION 02625 – STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PROGRAM (SWPPP) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1.1.1 Replace, repair and maintain the existing Best Management Practices (BMP’s) installed for Phase 1

Construction. 1.1.2 Modification of existing BMP’s, installation of new BMP’s, and maintenance of temporary water

pollution control measures to prevent discharge of pollutants such as sediment, chemicals, fuels, lubricants, bitumen, raw sewage, or other harmful material from the project.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2.1 Section 01300 – Submittals 1.2.2 Section 02100 – Clearing and Site Preparation 1.2.3 Section 02200 – Earthwork 1.2.4 Ameren Missouri “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Labadie Energy Center, Utility Waste

Landfill Project, Franklin County, Missouri,” (SWPPP) Preparation Date April 14, 2014, and as amended.

1.2.5 State of Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR) Operating Permit for Land Disturbance Activities, Permit MORA04758.

1.3 GENERAL

1.3.1 The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the SWPPP. 1.3.2 The Contractor shall manage his operations to control water pollution in accordance with this

specification, the SWPPP, and applicable County and State regulations and permits. Construction of permanent drainage facilities and other contract work, contributing to control of erosion, shall be scheduled at the earliest practicable time.

1.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain temporary erosion control measures and BMP’s.

The Contractor shall prevent sediment or polluted storm water discharge from the site. 1.3.4 The Company may require installation of additional erosion control facilities by the Contractor if in the

sole opinion of the Company the Contractor’s efforts are inadequate. 1.3.5 The BMP’s for the construction of the access road embankment and Labadie Bottom Road Overpass

shall be removed at the end of construction and the disturbed areas shall be seeded and mulched. Other BMP’s are to remain after Phase 1A construction unless otherwise specified by the Company.

1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 1.4.2 The Contractor shall submit within 10 days after Award proposed changes to the existing BMP’s or

new BMP’s for review and approval by the Company. Approval of the plan does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibility to prevent the discharge of pollutants into the receiving drainage ways. The Contractor shall incorporate the requirements in the SWPPP for this Project into Contractor’s erosion control plan.

1.4.3 Inspections: SWPPP, Section 2.2 and Attachment 3 1.4.4 Corrective Action Log: SWPPP, Section 2.3 and Attachment 4 1.4.5 Record Keeping: SWPPP, Section 2.4 and Attachment 5 1.4.6 Training Log: SWPPP, Section 2.6 and Attachment 7


1.5 REFERENCES


1.5.2 Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission (MHTC) Missouri Standard Plans for Highway

Construction, July 2009, with Supplemental Plans effective October 1, 2014. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Temporary slope drains: see SWPPP 2.1.2 Ditch Checks: see Section 3 of SWPPP 2.1.3 Riprap for Temporary Erosion Control: Type 1 Rock Blanket conforming to MoDOT 611.32. 2.1.4 Pipe: Corrugated metal (16 Ga.) or ADS N12 Corrugated Plastic. 2.1.5 Temporary Seeding: see Section 3 of SWPPP 2.1.6 Mulch shall be wheat straw. 2.1.7 Wire Supported and Self Supporting Silt Fence: see Section 3 of SWPPP 2.2 CERTIFICATION AND SAMPLING 2.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish a manufacturer’s certification, stating the material conforms to the

requirements of these specifications prior to installation. 2.2.2 The certification shall include, or have attached, typical results of tests for the specified properties,

representative of the materials supplied prior to installation. 2.2.3. The Company reserves the right to sample and test any material offered for use. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.1 All operations shall be in accordance with the SWPPP. 3.1.2 The Company may limit the surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and

grubbing, excavation, borrow, or fill operations. 3.1.3 The Company may direct the Contractor to provide immediate permanent or temporary pollution

control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams, other watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of water impoundment. Work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, slope drains, use of temporary mulches, seeding or other control devices or methods to control erosion.

3.1.4 The Contractor shall incorporate permanent erosion control features at the earliest practicable time. 3.1.5 The Contractor at no additional cost shall provide temporary pollution control measures needed to

control erosion during normal construction practices to the Company. 3.1.6 The Contractor shall designate trained and knowledgeable personnel to coordinate all SWPPP

activities, and identify these personnel to the Company during construction. (Missouri Department of Natural Resources offers training classes in Erosion Control free of charge in Jefferson City.)

3.1.7 The SWPPP is a living document. As the conditions of the site changes, the SWPPP should be

updated by the Contractor.


3.1.8 The SWPPP is subject to random inspection by the Company or Engineer. The SWPPP should be kept up to date by the Contractor and available for inspection at any time.

3.1.9 If Contractor determines that any BMP should need modification, the changes shall be dated and

documented, and all necessary field changes performed. 3.1.10 Contractor shall continuously maintain all paved roadways free of CCP, mud or tracked materials

during site operations. Contractor shall use equipment specifically designed for street cleaning and approved by the Ameren Construction Supervisor.

3.2 LIMITATION OF AREA DISTURBED

3.2.1 The Contractor’s operations shall be scheduled to install permanent erosion control features

immediately after clearing and grubbing, and grading. 3.2.2 The Company may limit the area of clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow, and embankment

operations commensurate with the Contractor’s capability and progress in completing the finish grading, mulching, seeding, and other such permanent pollution control measures current.

3.2.3. The Contractor shall respond to seasonal variations. If required by weather, temporary erosion

control measures shall be taken immediately. 3.3 BORROW AND WASTE AREAS Material pits other than commercially operated sources and material spoil areas shall be subject to pollution

control measures of this specification. An offsite location does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligation to prevent the introduction of sediment or other pollutants into receiving waterways.

3.4 CONFLICT WITH FEDERAL, STATE OR LOCAL LAWS, RULES OR REGULATIONS

In case of conflict between these requirements and pollution control laws, rules, or regulations or other

Federal, State or local agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules, or regulations shall apply. 3.5 SEDIMENT REMOVAL

3.5.1 Sediment deposits shall be removed when: a) The deposits reach approximately one-half the height of a ditch check, straw bale barrier or

silt fence. b) The sediments have reduced the Ponded volume of sediment basins to one-third of the

original volume.

3.5.2 Requested by the Company.

3.5.3 Sediment removed from erosion control features shall be deposited in a location where it will not erode into construction areas or watercourses.

Specification UE-2169 Phase 2 Sheet No. 02625 - 4

Ameren Environmental Services (ES) Contact

Ameren Construction Site Supervisor (Supervisor)

SWPPP Inspector All Contractors conducting work on-site

Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3)

• Provide the initial SWP3 field book.

• Provide replacement pages as changes are needed.

• Maintain all SWP3 documentation for 3 years after termination of the permit.

• Designate a location to maintain the book on-site. If there is no appropriate work trailer on-site, a mail box or board can be used.

• Collect signatures from each contractor working on the site on page iii of the SWP3.

• Keep the SWP3 book up to date with any replacement pages provided.

• Note any required changes and report that information to the Supervisor

• Return the book, mark up drawings and inspection reports to Supervisor at the end of the project.

• Sign the Contractor Certification Page (SWP3, page iii).

On-Site Mark Up drawings

• Provide a set of drawings to the Inspector.

• Maintain mark-ups of the drawings to indicate locations of BMPs, disturbed areas, stabilized areas, etc.

Permit (SWP3 Attachment 10)

• ES to provide a copy of the land disturbance permit in the SWP3 and laminated copy to post.

• Post a copy of the permit in the construction trailer or in a visible location on-site if no trailer available.

Inspections (SWP3 Section 2.0 and Attachments 3-6)

• Assigns responsibility for any actions required based on Inspection reports.

• Conduct the required inspections and reports as noted in the permit and the SWP3.

• Contact the Supervisor with any inspection notes within 24 hours of the inspection.

• Electronically submit weekly summary notes to Supervisor and ES as stated in the SWP3.

BMPs (SWP3 Section 3 and Attachment 8)

• Initial list of acceptable types of BMPs and installation notes provided in the SWP3.

• Available for consultation when needed.

• Works with the Inspector to determine what BMPs are needed.

• Assigns responsibility for BMP installation and maintenance to the appropriate contractor.

• Protect any BMPs on-site • Place or maintain any BMPs

as directed by the Supervisor.

Agency Contact (SWP3 Section 2)

• ES will conduct all communication with any environmental regulatory agency regarding this permit or SWP3.



SECTION 02820 – GUARDRAILS


Furnish and install guardrails for the access road over Labadie Bottom Road as shown in the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2.2 Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES


1.3.2 Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission (MHTC) Missouri Standard Plans for Highway

Construction, July 2009, with Supplemental Plans effective October 1, 2014. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Contractor shall submit name of manufacturer of guardrail system, with drawings and material certifications, for approval by the Company prior to delivery on site.

1.4.2 The procedures shall comply with the General and Supplementary General Conditions and other

applicable sections of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other contractors. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 All materials shall be in accordance with Division 1000 and Section 1040 of MoDOT Standard Specifications

for Highway Construction. 2.2 Steel posts, channel rails, anchor plates, bearing plates, and washers shall be structural steel in accordance

with AASHTO M 270, Grade 36, and shall be in accordance with MoDOT Section 1040.2.2. The steel beam guardrail shall be Type A, 12 gage, and shall be galvanized by the continuous method.

2.3 Plastic guardrail spacer blocks shall be in accordance with MoDOT Section 1040.2.3 and MHTC Drawing

606.00AV, Sheet 5 of 8. 2.4 End sections shall be flared, 12 gage, in accordance with MoDOT 1040.3.2 and MHTC Drawing 606.00AV,

Sheet 6 of 8. 2.5 Steel posts shall be W6x9. Length shall be 6 feet except where depth of embedment is limited due to precast

concrete arch sections. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 Steel posts may be driven where the thickness of fill is greater than 3’-10”. Where the thickness of fill above

the precast concrete arch sections is less than 3’-10”, then the steel posts shall be set in a 10-inch diameter drilled hole to the full depth of the fill. The annular space shall be backfilled with concrete. The height of the steel posts above grade shall be 2’-3 5/8” per standard MoDOT detail.

3.2 Clear distance from back of steel posts to headwall shall be a minimum of 2’-0”.


3.3 The guard rail sections shall be lapped in the direction of the traffic at splices. 3.4 Spacing of steel posts shall be nominal 6’-3”.



SECTION 02831 – TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT FENCES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

The work of this Section includes furnishing and installing all fence framework, wire mesh fabric, barbed wire, gates, and accessories for temporary fencing at existing ash pond, security fencing along headwall of Labadie Bottom Road Overpass, and safety fencing along the MSE wing walls, in accordance with the Contract Documents.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 01300 – Submittals Section 03600 – Labadie Bottom Road Overpass Section 03610 – Mechanically-Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 ASTM A53-12 “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless”

1.3.2 ASTM A153-09 “Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware” 1.3.3 ASTM A491-11 “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric” 1.3.4 ASTM F567-11a “Standard Specification for Installation of Chain-Link Fence” 1.3.5 ASTM F1043-11A “Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial

Fence Framework” 1.3.6 Missouri Department of Transportation (MoDOT) Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway

Construction, 2012, with Addendums. 1.3.7 Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission (MHTC) Missouri Standard Plans for Highway

Construction, July 2009, with Supplemental Plans effective October 1, 2014. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 Security Fencing and Temporary Fencing:

1.4.1.1 Structural Performance: Provide chain-link fences, fence panels with base plates or frames, and gates capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated in 1.4.2.

1.4.2 Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing for Wind Velocity Pressure - Determine based

on mesh size and pattern specified, and on the following minimum design wind pressures: a) Wind Speed: 80 MPH b) Fence Height: minimum 6 feet c) Line Post Group: ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe d) Wind Exposure Category: C

1.4.2 Safety Fencing: Safety fencing along the tops of the MSE wing walls shall be in accordance with MoDOT Standard

Specification Section 607 and MHTC Standard Drawing 607.11H.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1.5.1 Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates.

1.5.2 Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 1.5.3 Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 1.5.4 Gates and hardware.


1.5.5 Shop Drawings: Show locations of fences, gates, posts, rails, tension wires, details of extended posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage, attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances. If any components of the existing fence may be re-used, then those components shall be noted to the drawings.


1.6.1 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.6.2 The Company will retain the services of an independent Construction Quality Assurance (CQA)

Engineer to observe the fencing and gates installation and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.7.1 Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

1.7.2 Temporary Fence: Posts for the temporary fence may be driven posts on the perimeter of the

existing ash pond. The liner of the ash pond shall not be damaged. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 Security Fencing and Temporary Fencing:

2.1.1 Chain Link Fabric: In accordance with ASTM Standard A491-11; 6'-0" high, made of No. 9 gauge steel wire, woven in a 1" mesh and coated with a Class II aluminum coating of 0.4 oz/sf. Top and bottom selvages shall have a twisted barbed finish.

2.1.2 The design of the temporary fence shall be approved by the Company. The portable temporary

fence panels and gates shall be manufactured by Academy Fence Company or an approved equal. 2.2 Safety Fencing

Safety fencing along the tops of the MSE wing walls shall be in accordance with MoDOT Standard Specification Section 607 and MHTC Standard Drawing 607.11H. Safety fencing may be installed on concrete cap of MSE wing walls, on Type B gutter as shown on Drawing 607.11H, or on driven posts behind the MSE walls. The design of the safety fencing shall be coordinated with the design of the MSE wing walls, and shall be approved by the Company.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 Temporary Fencing

3.1.1 Remove a length of the existing chain link fence along the ash pond as shown on the Contract Drawings or a sufficient length to accommodate the construction of the access road embankment. Remove the components of the fence from an existing post to another existing post.

3.1.2 The fence shall follow the ground line unless otherwise specified. It shall be neat, plumb, aligned

true, stretched taut, and free from sags and bellies. Sufficient terminal posts must be provided to insure that bottom closure shall be within one inch of the ground surface elevation.

3.1.3 Components of the existing fence that are removed and not re-used shall be disposed of by the

Contractor. 3.1.4 Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the temporary fence along the line shown on the

Drawings. Security of the ash pond shall be maintained at all times during and after the Phase 1A


construction. The temporary fence shall keep animals from entering the ash pond area. If gates or panels are opened during work, these shall be closed at the end of the shift.

3.1.5 Temporary fence shall remain after the completion of the Work.

3.2 Security Fencing and Safety Fencing

3.2.1 Security fencing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the shop drawings approved by the Company, and the MSE wall manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2.2 Safety fencing shall be installed in accordance with MoDOT Standard Specification Section 607 and

MHTC Standard Drawing 607.11H. 3.2.3 The safety fencing and the security fencing shall be connected in a manner than will permit extension

of the security fencing along the access road in the future without modification of the installed fences.



SECTION 02891 – PERMANENT SIGNS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

This Section includes the requirements for furnishing an installing permanent traffic signs as shown on the Contract Drawings.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES



1.3.3 Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 2009 edition with Revisions 1 and 2 dated May 2012.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Contractor shall submit name of manufacturer of the permanent traffic signs with drawings and specifications for approval by the Company prior to fabrication.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT ENTRANCE WARNING SIGN

2.1.1 Sign shall conform to type W2-2L in the MUTCD. 2.1.2 The materials and fabrication of signs and fasteners shall conform to the requirements of MoDOT

Section 1042, with aluminum flat sheet, with Type 1 reflective sheeting and Type L-1 screen processed letters.

2.1.3 Posts shall be galvanized steel U-channel meeting the requirements for MoDOT Section 9032.1

Low Clearance Warning Sign 2.2 LOW CLEARANCE WARNING SIGNS

2.2.1 Two height clearance signs shall be fixed to both side of the Labadie Bottom Overpass – one at the center of Labadie Bottom Road and one at the right edge of pavement (4 total).

2.2.2 Signs shall conform to type W12-2a in the MUTCD and shall state the clear height to the nearest one

inch not exceeding the actual clear height. 2.2.3 The materials and fabrication of signs and fasteners shall conform to the requirements of MoDOT

Section 1042, with aluminum flat sheet, with Type 1 reflective sheeting and Type L-1 screen processed letters.

PART 3 – EXECUTION


3.1 The signs shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings and in conformance with the requirements of MoDOT Section 903 "Highway Signing."

3.2 The fabrication and installation of signs on Labadie Bottom Road right-of-way shall be approved by Franklin

County and the Company. 3.3 The fabrication and installation of signs on Ameren Missouri’s property shall be approved by the Company.



SECTION 02936 – PERMANENT SEEDING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

The work pertaining to this section includes all labor, tools, material and equipment necessary for preparing, fertilizing, seeding, mulching, and maintaining permanent seeding on the access road embankments as shown on the Construction Drawings or as specified herein.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 02100 – Site Clearing and Preparation Section 02200 – Earthwork Section 02625 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Program (SWPPP)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perrenial Sorrel and Brome Grass.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight,

date of packaging, percent germination, and location of packaging. 1.4.2 The CQA Engineer will observe the seeding installation and verify that requirements of these

specifications are being met.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.5.1 Deliver products to site; store and protect products from weather. 1.5.2 Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. 1.5.3 Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis and manufacturer name. Bulk

fertilizer may be substituted, provided that delivery tickets provide the same information required for bagged fertilizer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

1.6.1 Switch grass seed shall be state certified. The Contractor shall furnish signed copies of statement from the suppliers, certifying that each container of seed delivered complies with specified requirements and is labeled in accordance with the Federal Seed Act and is at least equal to the requirements specified. This certification shall be furnished on or with all copies of seed invoices. Each lot of seed will be tested by the Company in accordance with the latest Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act, at the discretion of the Company.

1.6.2 Fertilizer: The Contractor shall furnish duplicate copies of invoices showing quantities and grade of

fertilizer. Upon completion of the project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer used shall be made against total area treated, and if minimum rates of application have not been met, additional quantities of material to make up minimum application specified shall be distributed as required.

1.6.3 Mulch: At least 30 days prior to commencing seeding operations, the Company shall be notified of

sources from which mulch materials are available and the quantities thereof, and representative samples of the materials proposed for use shall be submitted for approval.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


2.1 FERTILIZERS

2.1.1 Starter Fertilizer: shall be provided and applied to the temporary seeding sites, so that not more than 1.0 pound of nitrogen (N) per 1000 sq.ft. (45 pounds N per acre), and 2.0 pounds of phosphorus (P2O5) per 1000 sq.ft. (90 pounds P2O5 per acre), and 2.0 pounds of potassium (K2O) per 1000 sq.ft. (90 pounds K2O per acre) are applied. The fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in bags or other convenient containers, fully labeled or otherwise designated in accordance with the applicable State fertilizer laws, and bearing the name, trade name or trademark, and warranty of the producer. Fertilizer may be supplied in bulk provided an analysis of samples tested in a laboratory is furnished for each shipment of fertilizer delivered to the project.

2.1.2 A fertilizer of 0-20-20 grade shall be provided and applied to the permanent seeding sites, so that not

more than 2.0 pounds of phosphorus (P2O5) per 1000 sq.ft. and 2.0 pounds of potassium (K2O) per 1000 sq.ft. are applied. The fertilizer shall be nitrogen (N) free (No Nitrogen shall be applied at time of permanent seeding). The fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment, shall be provided. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in bags or other convenient containers, fully labeled or otherwise designated in accordance with the applicable State fertilizer laws, and bearing the name, trade name or trademark, and warranty of the producer. Fertilizer may be supplied in bulk provided an analysis of samples tested in a laboratory is furnished for each shipment of fertilizer delivered to the project.

2.2 SEED BED MATERIALS

2.2.1 Agricultural Limestone: shall be a finely ground limestone rock, containing a minimum of a combined total of "calcium and magnesium carbonate equivalent" from 85 to 90%. All the material shall pass a 3/16" screen, approximately 90% shall pass a #8 screen and approximately 15 to 20% shall pass a #100 screen.

2.2.2 Water: The Contractor will furnish water at the project site as required for the execution of all work until

a strong vegetative cover has been established for a minimum of 60 days. 2.2.3 Topsoil: The Contractor shall insure that sufficient topsoil is incorporated into the seed bed to

guarantee satisfactory turf growth. 2.2.4. Soil for repairs shall be of at least equal quality to that which exists in areas adjacent to the area to be

repaired. Any soil used shall be free from roots, stones, and other materials that hinder grading, planting, and maintenance operations and that is free from objectionable weed seed and toxic substances.

2.3 SEEDING

2.3.1 Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act. Seed shall be furnished in sealed, standard containers unless approved by the Company. Seed that is wet or moldy or that has been otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be acceptable. All seed shall be blended by supplier prior to delivery.

2.3.2 Permanent seed mixture to be used shall be as follows:

Kinds of Seed Pounds Pure Live Seed (PLS)/Acre Swithgrass (Blackwell or Cave-in-Rock) (Panicum virgatum) 15 lbs. Wild Rye (Elymus canadensis) 15 lbs. Annual Ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum) 20 lbs. Oats or Wheat* 30 lbs. Total Pounds Pure Live Seed/Acre 80 lbs./PLS * Wheat shall be applied in the autumn; Oats shall be applied in the spring.

2.3.3 Temporary (fall cover) seed mixture to be used shall be as described in SWPPP. 2.3.4. Bulk Seed: All grass seed will meet minimum of 98% purity and 85% germination, as indicated on the

labels. 2.4 STRAW


Shall be threshed straw of hay, oats, wheat, barley, or rye not chopped in short lengths. 2.5 MULCH

Mulch shall be mature prairie hay, or if prairie hay is not available, straw of cereal grain such as oats or wheat. Materials containing objectionable weed seeds or other species detrimental to the planting will not be acceptable.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE

3.1.1 Equipment, in good condition, shall be provided for the proper preparation of the ground and for handling and placing all materials. Equipment shall be approved before work is started.

3.1.2 Clearing: Prior to grading and tilling, vegetation that may interfere with operations shall be mowed,

grubbed, and raked. The surface shall be cleared of stumps, roots, cable, wire, and other materials that might hinder the work, or interfere with future mowing.

3.1.3 Grading: Previously established grades shall be maintained on the areas to be seeded in a true and

even condition; necessary repairs shall be made by adding soil as necessary to previously graded areas. All surfaces shall be left in an even and properly compacted condition to prevent formation of depressions.

3.1.4 Tillage

3.1.4.1 The soil of temporary seeding sites shall be loosened to a minimum average depth of 2.0

inches at sites where the slope is shallower than 3:1. At sites where the slope is 3:1 or steeper, the soil shall be loosened to a depth of 0.5 to 1.0 inch. The soil shall be loosened with rototillers, disk harrows, chisel plows, rippers, bulldozers, or other soil preparation equipment, which shall leave the soil with an irregular open surface. Bulldozers that are used to loosen the soil surface shall leave the surface with an open irregular surface, and with track's ridges run parallel to the slope.

3.1.4.2 At permanent seeding sites two tillage operations shall be conducted to destroy pre-existing

vegetation prior to permanent seeding. During the first tillage the permanent seeding sites shall be tilled to an average depth of 3.0 to 5.0 inches. Two weeks should be allowed to elapse between tillage operations so that weed seeds and perennial plant parts may have time to germinate or re-grow, and so be destroyed by the second tilling. During the second tillage the permanent seeding sites shall be tilled to an average depth of 3.0 to 5.0 inches. After the second tillage, should dead vegetation at the soil surface be in excess of 1.5 inches in thickness, the soil shall be re-tilled to a suitable depth, so that most of the vegetation is incorporated into the soil. Permanent seeding sites shall be rolled and firmed with a corrugated metal roller or cultipacker immediately following tilling operations and prior to planting. After tillage, all stones larger than 3 inches in diameter and other materials that might hinder the work or subsequent maintenance shall be cleared. The work shall be performed only during periods when, in the opinion of the Company, beneficial results are likely to be obtained. When drought, excessive moisture, or other unsatisfactory conditions prevail, the work shall be stopped when directed.

3.1.5 Fertilizer

3.1.5.1 At temporary seeding sites, starter fertilizer may be applied up to ten (10) days before

seeding, or at the time of seeding, or up to five (5) days after seeding operations are completed. A starter fertilizer shall be provided and applied to the temporary seeding sites, so that not more than 1.0 pound of nitrogen (N) per 1000 ft2 (45 pounds N per acre), and 2.0 pounds of phosphorus (P2O5) per 1000 ft2 (90 pounds P2O5 per acre), and 2.0 pounds of potassium (K2O) per 1000 ft2 (90 pounds K2) per acre) are applied.

3.1.5.2 At permanent seeding sites, fertilizer may be applied up to ten (10) days before seeding, or

at the time of seeding, or up to five (5) days after seeding operations are completed. A fertilizer of 0-20-20 grade shall be provided and applied to the permanent seeding sites, so that not more than 2.0 pounds of phosphorus (P2O5) per 1000 ft2 and 2.0 pounds of potassium (K2O) per 1000 ft2 are applied. The fertilizer shall be nitrogen (N) free (No Nitrogen shall be applied during permanent seeding).


3.1.6 Leveling: Surface irregularities, resulting from tillage or fertilizing or other operations before seeding,

shall be leveled prior to seeding. 3.2 PLANTING SEED

3.2.1 Time and Conditions

3.2.1.1 Permanent seed mixture shall be sown only between August 1 and September 30 or April 1 and May 31, unless otherwise approved by the Company. When delays in operations extend the work beyond the most favorable planting season for species designated or when conditions are such by reason of drought, high winds, excessive moisture, or other factors that satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained, work shall be halted and resumed only when conditions are favorable or when approved alternate or corrective measures and procedures have been effected. If inspection during seeding operations, or after there is show of green, indicates that areas have been left unplanted, additional seed shall be sown as directed.

3.2.1.2 Temporary seeding mixture (Fall Cover Crop) shall be sown between dates of August 15 to

September 30 and/or on any areas brought to a temporary or final grade outside of the permanent seed mixture season that will not be finalized or revisited within 30 days of stoppage, completion, or halting of activities. If inspection during seeding operations, or after there is show of green, indicates that areas have been left unplanted, additional seed shall be sown as directed. No seeding shall occur between October 1 and April 1 without approval from the Company.

3.2.2 Seeding Method

3.2.2.1 Seeding method shall be drill seeding for both temporary and permanent seed mixtures. The use of a standard grain drill is allowed provided that for permanent seeding a standard legume box is provided for the switchgrass seed, otherwise a native grass drill or rangeland grass drill of the “TruaxTM-type/like” shall be used. The drill shall be equipped with double coulter furrow openers, depth bands, press wheels and agitators in the seed box. The seed shall be uniformly spread in two directions at right angles to each other, using one half of the total seed to be distributed in each direction, unless extreme slopes interfere with the safe or practical use of the seeding equipment, in which case one or more passes in the same direction shall be an acceptable substitute.

3.2.2.2 The seed shall be incorporated into the soil to an average depth of 1/8 to ¼ inch below the

soil surface. 3.2.2.3 The temporary grass seed mixture shall be drilled at a rate of 75 pure live seed pounds per

acre. 3.2.2.4 The permanent grass seed mixture shall be drilled at a rate of 80 pure live seed pounds per

acre. 3.2.2.5 Contractor may propose alternative methods of seeding, such as hydroseeding, for approval

by the Company.

3.3 MULCHING

3.3.1 Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre. Mulch shall be spread by hand, blower-type mulch spreader, or other approved method. Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes, and continued uniformly until the area is covered. The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped. Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface. All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding. Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading.

3.3.2 Mechanical anchor shall be a V-type-wheel land packer; a scalloped-disk land packer designed to force

mulch into the soil surface; or other suitable equipment. Mulch may also be glued to the ground surface using an approved biodegradable glue.

3.4 PROTECTION


Protection shall be provided against traffic or other use by erecting barricades immediately after treatment is completed, and by placing warning signs as directed, on various areas.

3.5 REPAIRING, RE-SEEDING, & WARRANTY The Contractor shall maintain all seeded areas as needed to develop and maintain a strong vegetative cover for

a minimum of 3 years after substantial completion. The Contractor is not required to warrantee after this time; however, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage or lack of cover caused by elements under his control. The Company may direct that areas that do not attain the required cover or areas that become damaged be repaired and reseeded to specification requirements.



SECTION 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

This Section includes the requirements for cast-in-place concrete, the locations of which are shown on the Contract Drawings.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Form, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2.1 Section 02200 - Earthwork 1.2.2 Section 02831 – Fencing and Gates 1.2.3 Section 02891 – Permanent Signs 1.2.4 Section 03600 – Labadie Bottom Road Overpass

1.3 REFERENCES

1.3.1 Missouri Department of Transportation (MoDOT) Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, effective date March 2012 with Addendums

1.3.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318-11 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 1.3.3 ACI 211.1 -91 (R2009) “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and

Mass Concrete” 1.3.4 ACI 301-10 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings” 1.3.5 ACI 304.2R-96 “Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods” 1.3.6 ACI 305.1-06 “Specification for Hot Weather Concreting” 1.3.7 ACI 306R-10 “Guide for Cold Weather Concreting” 1.3.8 ACI 309R-05 “Guide for Consolidations of Concrete” 1.3.9 ASTM A185-05 “Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete” 1.3.10 ASTM A615-12 “Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement” 1.3.11 ASTM C31 “Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field” 1.3.12 ASTM C33 “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates” 1.3.13 ASTM C39 “Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens” 1.3.14 ASTM C42-12 “Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of

Concrete” 1.3.15 ASTM C94-12 “Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” 1.3.16 ASTM C143-12 “Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete” 1.3.17 ASTM C150 “Standard Specification for Portland Cement” 1.3.18 ASTM C171-07 “Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete” 1.3.19 ASTM C172-10 “Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete” 1.3.20 ASTM C231-10 “Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure

Method” 1.3.21 ASTM C260-10 “Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete” 1.3.22 ASTM C309-11 “Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete” 1.3.23 ASTM C494-12 “Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete” 1.3.24 ASTM C618-12 “Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for

Use in Concrete” 1.3.25 ASTM C1064-11 “Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement

Concrete” 1.3.26 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Contractor shall submit concrete mix design for each type of application shown on the Contract Drawings or Specified. Concrete supplier shall submit chemical analyses of cement and concrete demonstrating compliance with ACI 318 requirements for special exposure conditions.


applicable sections of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness


as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other contractors, all required submittals indicated in Part 2 of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.


1.5.1 The Contractor shall comply with provisions of ACI 301-10, ACI 318-11 and CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice,” except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

1.5.2 Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying

with ASTM C94-12 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.5.3 The Company will retain the services of an independent Construction Quality Assurance (CQA)

Engineer to observe the cast-in-place concrete installation, perform materials evaluation testing, and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE 2.1.1 Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2.1.2 Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type F. 2.1.3 Aggregates: Aggregate shall be in accordance with MoDOT Section 1005.-.Aggregate for Concrete. 2.1.4 Gradation for Coarse Aggregate (MoDOT Section 1005.2.4 Gradation E). 2.1.5 Gradation for Fine Aggregate (MoDOT Section 1005.3.5). 2.1.6 Water: Potable. 2.2 ADMIXTURES 2.2.1 Provide admixtures that are compatible with one another and do not contain more than 0.1 percent

chloride ions. 2.2.2 Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 2.2.3 Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. 2.2.4 High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. 2.2.5 Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. 2.3 CURING MATERIALS 2.3.1 Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 2.3.2 Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,

complying with ASTM C171 2.3.3 Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet

complying with ASTM C171. 2.3.4 Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I, Class A or

B, wax free. 2.3.5 Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I, Class B that has a

maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. 2.4 REINFORCING 2.4.1 Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2.4.2 Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 2.5 JOINT SEALANT Joint sealant shall be traffic-grade, non-asphalt, and non-extruding sealant. 2.6 MIX DESIGN 2.6.1 Comply with mix design procedures specified in ACI 301 and proportion mixes according to ACI

211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:


1. Compressive Strength (f’c): 4000 psi at 28 days unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.40 maximum at point of placement. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches at point of placement, if hand placed, and 1 inch at point of

placement if machine placed. 4. Air Content: 6.0 percent in accordance with ACI 318-02 Section 4.2. 5. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM D94. 2.6.2 The mix design for concrete shall comply with the requirements in ACI 318, Section 4.2.3 and

Section 4.3. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE PLACEMENT Comply with ACI 304 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Place concrete in a

continuous operation within planned joints or sections. Consolidate placed concrete according to ACI 309R using mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented with hand-rodding and tamping. Screed and darby or bull-float the surface before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.

3.2 FINISHING 3.2.1 Slabs-on-grade shall have a light broom finish unless otherwise specified. Draw a soft bristled broom

across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform fine-line texture. 3.2.2 Toweling shall provide a smooth, even, dense finish free from blemishes including trowel marks. 3.2.3 Final Tooling: Tool edges and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to a radius of 3/8-

inch. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.2.4 Joints: The location of joints are shown on the contract drawings or stated in the specifications.

Joints may be either tooled or sawn. If the joints are sawn, the joints shall be sawn within 12 hours of the placements of the concrete. Joints shall be sealed.

3.2.5 Protection: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and

during finishing operations with an evaporation-control film. Apply film according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when applicable in hot weather, and with the requirements of ACI 306 when applicable in cold weather.

3.3 CURING 3.3.1 Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from exposed

surfaces. Moisture-cure concrete by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, continuously wetted absorptive cover, or curing with a moisture-retaining cover. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

3.3.2 Apply membrane-forming curing compound to concrete as soon as final finishing operations are

complete. Apply uniformly according to manufacturer's directions. Re-coat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4.1 The CQA Engineer may sample concrete, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete

placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following: 3.4.1.1 Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM

C94. 3.4.1.2 Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but

no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

3.4.1.3 Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method - one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.


3.4.1.4 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064 - one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

3.4.1.5 Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise.

3.4.2 Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class

exceeding 5 cubic yards (CY) but less than 25 CY, plus one set for each additional 50 CY. Minimum of one set for each slab-on-grade or pavement. Test two specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain two specimen in reserve for later testing, if required. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 CY, Company may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

3.4.2.1 When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

3.4.2.2 Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device may

be used by the Company but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3.4.2.3 Additional Tests: The Company's testing agency will make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other characteristics have not been met, as directed by Company. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed by Company.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 3.5.1 Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, and does not meet the

requirements of this section. 3.5.2 Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. 3.5.3 Maintain concrete free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete

slabs-on-grade not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.



SECTION 03600 – LABADIE BOTTOM ROAD OVERPASS


Design and build a precast concrete bridge for the access road over Labadie Bottom Road as shown on the Contract Drawings.



1.2.2 Section 02200 – Earthwork 1.2.3 Section 02831 – Temporary and Permanent Fences 1.2.4 Section 02891 – Permanent Signs 1.2.5 Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.2.6 Section 03610 – Mechanically-Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls

1.3 REFERENCES



1.3.3 MoDOT Engineering Policy Guide 1.3.4 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 17th edition, 2002. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01320.

1.4.2 Contractor shall submit name of designer/builder of the precast concrete overpass with design calculations, drawings and material specifications for approval by the Company. The design/builder shall have successfully completed construction of similar overpasses. The design calculations and drawings shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in Missouri. The precast manufacturer shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Certification Program.

1.4.3 Contractor shall submit the resume and qualifications of the Field Supervisor for approval by the

Company. The Field Supervisor shall have had recent and successful experience with the construction of precast concrete bridges of the same type and size as this Work.

1.4.4 Copies of approvals and permits from the Franklin County Highway Department shall be submitted to

the Company. 1.4.5 The procedures shall comply with the General and Supplementary General Conditions and other


1.5 APPROVALS 1.5.1 Final plans for the overpass shall be approved by the Franklin County Highway Department. 1.5.2 Contractor shall obtain permits from the Franklin County Highway Department for working in the

right-of-way of Labadie Bottom Road and for traffic control during construction. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS 1.6.1 Labadie Bottom Road is a 2-lane, asphalt concrete paved road with low traffic volume. Most of the

traffic is contractors entering Labadie Energy Center. The construction entrance is immediately north


of the access road embankment. Lane restrictions or closures shall be coordinated with the Labadie Energy Center as well as Franklin County Highway Department. Also refer to Section 1B-1.3.

1.6.2 Ameren Missouri must replace a transmission line pole north of the Labadie Plant construction

entrance to raise one of the overhead electric transmission lines before the embankment for the access road may be fully constructed. THERE ARE MULTIPLE HIGH-VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES IN THE VICINITY OF THE SITE WHICH WILL REQURE CAREFUL PLANNING FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE OVERPASS, SUCH AS POSITIONING AND OPERATING CRANES.

1.6.3 The site of the overpass is relatively flat and poorly draining. Control of surface runoff around

excavations will be required. 1.6.4 The site is located in the floodplain of the Missouri River. The site is protected by several levees.

However, it is possible that the overpass may be flooded for a period of months. The FEMA 500-year flood level at the site is el. 487.55.

1.6.5 Numerous geotechnical borings, geologic borings, and cone penetrometer (CPT) soundings were

made for the Utility Waste Landfill. Attachment 1 to this Section contains a plan of the site of the overpass showing the locations of the borings and CPT soundings closest to the site. Attachment 1 also contains the corresponding individual boring logs and CPT sounding logs.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7.1 The Company will retain the services of an independent Construction Quality Assurance (CQA)

Engineer to observe the cast-in-place concrete installation, perform materials evaluation testing, and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.7.2 The Representative of the designer and manufacturer of the pre-cast concrete components shall be

on site full-time during the erection of the pre-cast units and periodically as required to verify that the construction of the foundations, handling and erection of the pre-cast concrete components, construction of the head walls, and all other components meet the requirements of the design.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN

2.1.1 The precast concrete overpass shall be designed in accordance with MoDOT Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, MoDOT Standard Plans for Highway Construction, MoDOT Engineering Policy Guide, and AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

2.1.2 The design traffic load shall be MoDOT standard HS25 which is 1.25 times AASHTO HS20 loading. 2.1.3 The minimum clearances for traffic through the overpass are shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.1.4 The design shall consider flood conditions, such as current or wave forces, or impact by floating

debris, on the overpass superstructure up to the 500-year flood level. A floodplain analysis estimated that the maximum velocity of flood water is 2 feet per second or less.

2.1.5 Loading due to a seismic event shall be considered, but not simultaneous with flood conditions. The

Peak Horizontal Ground Acceleration from a Site Specific Response Analysis is 0.12g at the base of the embankment and 0.08g at the top of the embankment (el. 488).

2.2 FOUNDATIONS

2.2.1 The overpass structure shall be supported on continuous shallow footings. The subsurface soils consist of low-, medium- and high-plastic clays with varying silt and sand seams and content. The undrained shear strength of the clays in previous borings and CPT soundings has been 1000 psf to 1100 psf. The base of the footings shall be a minimum of 30 inches below grade. The footings may be designed for an ultimate bearing capacity of 6000 psf. A minimum factor of safety of 2.0 shall be used.

2.2.2 Foundations may be cast-in-place reinforced concrete footings or precast concrete elements.

2.3 HEADWALLS


The design of the headwalls shall incorporate the attachment of the security chain-link fencing as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with Section 02831.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 Precast concrete elements shall be shipped, lifted, handled, and stored in accordance with the precast

manufacturer’s instructions and in a manner to prevent cracking or damage. 3.2 FOUNDATIONS AND STEM WALLS

3.2.1 The CQA Engineer shall inspect the excavated subgrade bearing surfaces for the footings. If the subgrade is soft or consists of high plastic clay, then the CQA Engineer shall direct the Contractor to over-excavate the soft or unacceptable soil and replace it with compacted crushed aggregate.

3.2.2 If precast footings are used, Contractor shall place and compact a minimum 6-inch thick base rock

layer the full width of the footing. Compacted crushed aggregate shall be used to backfill over-excavated soil.

3.2.3 Cast-in-place footings and stem walls shall be constructed in accordance with Section 03300. 3.2.4 If cast-in-place wing walls are used, the foundations for the precast structure elements must be

connected by reinforcement to form a monolithic body.

3.3 Construction of the precast concrete structure elements and headwalls shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Contractor shall maintain the structure span during all phases of construction and shall not permit lateral spreading of the precast elements by the means specified by the precast manufacturer and/or procedures approved by the precast manufacturer.

3.4 Backfill shall be placed and compacted in accordance with the precast manufacturer’s instructions. No backfill

shall be placed against any structural element until approved by the CQA Engineer or the precast manufacturer’s representative on site. Fill associated with the precast structure and wingwalls shall be of the type specified by the precast manufacturer and as shown on the precast construction drawings. The general embankment fill shall be in accordance with Section 02200.

3.5 Contractor shall install permanent signs on the north and south faces of the overpass stating the actual clear

height between the pavement and the lowest element of the overpass. The signs shall be located at the centerline of Labadie Bottom Road and at the right edge of the pavement.

3.6 The construction shall be approved by Franklin County prior to acceptance by the Company.



SECTION 03600 – ATTACHMENT 1

PARTIAL PLAN OF BORINGS AND CPT SOUNDINGS

LOGS OF BORINGS

LOGS AND RESULTS OF CPT SOUNDINGS

LOGS OF GEOLOGIC BORINGS

The prospective contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the boring logs and CPT soundings herein but not for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding, design or construction. The data contained in this Attachment are made available to the prospective contractor for his convenience and shall be used solely at the prospective contractor’s responsibility. The prospective contractor is cautioned that the use of these data is for information purposes only and that the data are not necessarily indicative of all conditions that may occur on this project. Reitz & Jens, Inc., GREDELL Engineering Resources and Ameren Missouri assume no responsibility concerning the interpretations of the data by the prospective contractor.

Sheet 3600-5

Stratification lines shown on the logs represent approximate soil boundaries; actual changes in strata may be gradual or occur betweensamples.

Figure A-0

Notes:

Symbol Description

KEY TO SOIL SYMBOLS

Topsoil

Silty SAND or Sandy SILT (SM)

High plastic CLAY (CH)

Poorly-graded SAND (SP)

Medium to high plastic CLAY

Low plastic Silty CLAY (CL)

Poorly-graded SAND &GRAVEL (GP)

Very Weathered LIMESTONE

Clayey Sandy SILT (ML)

Poorly-graded SAND withtraces of fines

Low plastic CLAY (CL)

Clayey SAND or Sandy CLAY(SC)

Low plastic Clayey SILT (ML)

Well-graded SAND with nofines (SW)

Inorganic, non-plastic SILT(ML)

Symbol Description

Clayey Silty SAND (SC-SM)

LIMESTONE

MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS

Water table duringdrilling

Moisture content (%)

N-value from StandardPenetrationTest, ASTM D-1586 (blows/ft)

Shear strength fromPocket Penetrometer (tsf)

Boring continues

Delayed Readingof Water table

Shear strength fromPocket Torvane (tsf)

Shear strength (Qu/2) fromUnconfined Compression Test,ASTM D-2166 (tsf)

SOIL SAMPLERS

2-in. O.D. Split-Spoon

3-in. O.D. Shelby Tube

KEY TO BORING LOGS

Sheet 3600-6

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

465

460

455

450

445

440

435

100

78

94

83

72

89

100

TOPSOIL (4")Silty CLAY (CL-CH), brown, moderatelyplastic, stiff, dry

CLAY (CH), grayish brown, high plastic, stiff,moist

With tan silty fine sand laminations

SAND (SP), tan, fine, medium-dense withsporatic clay balls

Becoming grayish tan, without clay balls

Boring terminated at 25'-0"

2-3-4

2-4-6

2-3-4

4-5-6

3-4-4

1-3-4

1-4-4

20.2

33.2

30.6

B O R I N G L O G B-5Labadie Power Plant UWL DSI LOCATION: N EFranklin County, Missouri ELEVATION: 467 DATUM: NAVD88CLIENT: Ameren Missouri DATE DRILLED: 3-12-2007

DRILLER: Midwest WATER LEVELS: DURING DRILLING 16.5 FEETMETHOD: CFA N BORING DRY AT COMPLETION OF DRILLINGTYPE OF SPT HAMMER: Automatic AT FEET AFTER HOURSHAMMER EFFICIENCY (%): AT FEET AFTER HOURSLOGGED BY: J. Pruett PIEZOMETER: INSTALLED AT FEET

DEP

TH (F

EET)

ELEV

ATI

ON

WA

TER

TA

BLE

GR

APH

IC L

OG

SAM

PLE

TYPE

PER

CEN

T R

ECO

VER

Y

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

DR

Y U

NIT

WEI

GH

T (P

CF)

BLO

WS

PER

6 IN

CH

ESR

QD

= R

OC

K Q

UA

LITY

DES

.

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

PER

CEN

T B

Y W

EIG

HT

SHEAR STRENGTH, tsf

20 40 60 PL LL

% FINES (PASSING #200 SIEVE)MOISTURE CONTENT, %

N-VALUE (BLOWS PER LAST FOOT)

1 2 3

File

: 200

8012

455

QU/2 PP SV

STANDARD PENETRATION TEST

TV

Figure A-5 Sheet 1

STRATIFICATION LINES AREAPPROXIMATE SOIL BOUNDARIESONLY; ACTUAL CHANGES MAY BEGRADUAL OR MAY OCCUR BETWEENSAMPLES.

of 1Sheet 3600-7

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

460

455

450

445

440

435

79

78

90

100

100

72

100

83

CLAY (CL), grayish brown, soft, slightlysilty, with fine sand and silt seams, and roots,moist

With lignite and limonite, no roots

Sandy SILT (ML), gray and tan, with finesand, very looseWith traces of clay, saturatedNote: switched to mud rotary after sample.

SAND (SP), grayish tan, medium-dense, finewith traces medium-grain sand and silt

Becoming fine- to medium-grain, traces coarsesand and silt

97.287.388.0

1-1-2

82.4

0-0-1

2-4-4

3-5-7

8-6-8

3-6-8

24.129.633.3

35.3

37.5

42.6

87.1

B O R I N G L O G B-58Labadie Power Plant UWL DSI LOCATION: N 994038.1 E 726928.7Franklin County, Missouri ELEVATION: 464.3 DATUM: NAVD88CLIENT: Ameren Missouri DATE DRILLED: 11-06-2009

DRILLER: Terra Drill WATER LEVELS: DURING DRILLING 4 FEETMETHOD: 4.25" N BORING DRY AT COMPLETION OF DRILLINGTYPE OF SPT HAMMER: Automatic AT 1 FEET AFTER 23 HOURSHAMMER EFFICIENCY (%): 86.3 AT FEET AFTER HOURSLOGGED BY: J. Pruett PIEZOMETER: INSTALLED AT FEET

DEP

TH (F

EET)

ELEV

ATI

ON

WA

TER

TA

BLE

GR

APH

IC L

OG

SAM

PLE

TYPE

PER

CEN

T R

ECO

VER

Y


DR

Y U

NIT

WEI

GH

T (P

CF)

BLO

WS

PER

6 IN

CH

ESR

QD

= R

OC

K Q

UA

LITY

DES

.

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

PER

CEN

T B

Y W

EIG

HT

SHEAR STRENGTH, tsf

20 40 60 PL LL



1 2 3

File

: 200

8012

455

QU/2 PP SV


TV

Figure A-17 Sheet 1

STRATIFICATION LINES AREAPPROXIMATE SOIL BOUNDARIESONLY; ACTUAL CHANGES MAY BEGRADUAL OR MAY OCCUR BETWEENSAMPLES.

of 2Sheet 3600-8

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

430

425

420

415

410

405

400

395

100With traces of gravel (<1")

Boring terminated in sand at 35'-0"

6-8-11

B O R I N G L O G B-58Labadie Power Plant UWL DSI

DEP

TH (F

EET)

ELEV

ATI

ON

WA

TER

TA

BLE

GR

APH

IC L

OG

SAM

PLE

TYPE

PER

CEN

T R

ECO

VER

Y


DR

Y U

NIT

WEI

GH

T (P

CF)

BLO

WS

PER

6 IN

CH

ESR

QD

= R

OC

K Q

UA

LITY

DES

.

MO

ISTU

RE

CO

NTE

NT

PER

CEN

T B

Y W

EIG

HT

SHEAR STRENGTH, tsf

20 40 60 PL LL



1 2 3

File

: 200

8012

455

QU/2 PP SV


TV

Figure A-17 Sheet 2 of 2Sheet 3600-9

LEGENDSymbol Description

KEY TO SOIL SYMBOLS

Organic Material qc = Cone Tip Pressure, tons/sq. ft.

Clay fs = Skin Friction, tons/sq. ft.

Silty Clay to Clay Rf = Friction ratio (fs/qc) in %

Clayey Silt to Silty Clay u2 = Porewater Pressure, psi

Sandy Silt to Clayey Silt N60 = Calculated Equivalent N-value,

blows/foot, (Standard Penetration Test)

Silty Sand to Sandy Silt Su = Calculated Undrained Shear

Strength, ksf

Sand to Silty Sand Phi = Friction Angle, degrees

Sand

Gravelly Sand to Sand

Notes:1. Borings were made on February 1 thru February 6, 2010 by Terra Drill, Inc. using 1.5” diameter cone

pentrometer with pore pressure measurements (CPTu) owned and operated by Reitz & Jens. Borings were backfilled the same day with Bentonite chips.

2. Borings were located by Reitz & Jens, and were staked after drilling. Borings elevations were later surveyed with respect to the existing structure. “Foundation Depth” noted on the log is based on the survey and provided plans.

3. Borings were logged in the field by Reitz & Jens Geological Engineer, who monitored and conducted all CPT related work.

4. Soil classification and equivalent N60 were based upon Robertson 19861.5. Undrained shear strength (Su) is based on Lunne, Robertson, Powell (1997)2. Internal friction Angle

(Phi or O) is based on Bowles (1996)3.6. Stratification lines shown on the log represent approximate soil boundaries; actual changes in strata

may be gradual.

1 Robertson et al. (1986) Use of piezometer cone data. Proceedings of the ASCE Specialty Conference: In Situ 86: Use of In Situ Tests in Geotechnical Engineering. ASCE 1986 2 Lunne, T. Robertson, P.K. and Powell, J.J.M. (1997) Cone Penetration Testing in Geotechnical Practice,Published by Blackie Academic & Professional. 3 Bowles, Joseph E. (1996) Foundation Analysis and Design. McGraw-Hill. 5th ed. Page 180.

Figure 2-0

Sheet 3600-10

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

Dep

th [f

t]

8.79

0 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

>1.639>1.775>1.817>1.785>1.796>1.754

>6.627

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

>48.67>51.78>52.22>51.62>51.31>49.89>47.91

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-37

Project ID:2008012455

Client:Ameren Missouri

Project:Labadie Power Plant UWL DSI

Position:X: 726940.78 ft, Y: 994633.33 ft

Location:Labadie, MO

Ground level:466.80

Date:10/22/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:1 C-12

Fig:

File: Labadie C-037.cpd

U2

Sleeve area [cm2]: 150Tip area [cm2]: 10Cone No: 4274

Classification byRobertson 1986

Clay (3)

Silty sand to sandy silt (7)

Clayey silt to silty clay (5)

Sandy silt to clayey silt (6)

Silty clay to clay (4)

Clay (3)



Clay (3)

Sand to silty sand (8)

Sand (9)


Sand (9)





Sand (9)

Gravelly sand to sand (10)

Sand (9)


Sheet 3600-11

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

35.0

40.0

45.0

50.0

55.0

60.0

Dep

th [f

t]

8.790 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

>49.75>50.74

>47.56

>92.92

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-37




Position:X: 726940.78 ft, Y: 994633.33 ft


Ground level:466.80

Date:10/22/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:2 C-12

Fig:


U2




Sand (9)


Sand (9)


Sand (9)


Sheet 3600-12

Client: Ameren MissouriProject name: Labadie Power Plant UWL DSITest no.: C-37Test date: 10/22/2009Location: Labadie MOFile name: Labadie C-037.cpd CPT-Pro Calculated Values Reitz and Jens Calculated Values

DepthCorrected

pointresistance

Correctedlocal

friction

Porepressurebehindcone

Soil TypeSPT

EnergyRatio N60

Undrainedshear

strength

Totaloverburden

stress

Effective total overburden str

R&J Phi Angle

Relativedensity

Unitweight

CorrectedN60

UnitWeight

TotalOverburden

EffectiveOverburden

Es(OCR=4)

[ft] [MPa] [MPa] [lb/in^2] [bpf] [ksf] [MPa] [MPa] [degrees] [%] [g/cm^3] [bpf] [pcf] [ksf] [ksf] (ksf)1.25 1.954 0.025 1.4591 Sandy silt to clayey silt (6) 8.6 1.728 0.007 0.007 24.6 1.85 8.6 115 0.15 0.15 1633.75 1.052 0.036 3.0346 Clay (3) 8.2 1.153 0.021 0.021 22.5 1.81 8.2 113 0.44 0.44 3466.25 0.791 0.035 2.4193 Clayey silt to silty clay (5) 6.8 1.051 0.034 0.034 1.8 6.8 112 0.71 0.71 6318.75 3.245 0.026 0.8893 Sand to silty sand (8) 10.0 1.069 0.048 0.047 29.0 56 1.88 6.4 117 1.00 0.98 27011.25 8.698 0.044 1.4771 Sand to silty sand (8) 20.7 0.062 0.055 32.8 72 1.95 13.2 122 1.29 1.14 72413.75 8.499 0.044 2.7271 Sand (9) 20.5 0.077 0.062 32.6 69 1.94 10.2 121 1.60 1.29 70716.25 20.798 0.112 2.9372 Sand (9) 41.6 0.091 0.069 37.4 93 1.99 20.8 124 1.89 1.44 173018.75 23.411 0.162 3.5804 Sand (9) 46.8 0.106 0.076 38.1 95 1.99 23.4 124 2.20 1.58 194821.25 9.61 0.068 4.3623 Sand to silty sand (8) 21.3 0.121 0.083 33.0 67 1.96 13.6 122 2.52 1.73 80023.75 3.579 0.033 7.0228 Silty sand to sandy silt (7) 11.1 2.437 0.135 0.09 27.8 52 1.89 7.1 118 2.81 1.87 29826.25 8.758 0.032 7.3435 Gravelly sand to sand (10) 19.1 0.15 0.096 30.3 71 1.93 13.0 120 3.12 2.00 72928.75 17.304 0.049 8.6996 Sand to silty sand (8) 32.1 0.165 0.104 36.3 81 2.01 20.6 125 3.43 2.16 144031.25 9.674 0.028 9.9585 Gravelly sand to sand (10) 19.7 0.179 0.111 32.2 60 1.96 13.4 122 3.72 2.31 80533.75 25.914 0.07 10.656 Sand (9) 44.4 0.194 0.118 38.6 92 2.03 22.2 127 4.04 2.45 215636.25 21.1 0.052 12.0146 Gravelly sand to sand (10) 38.7 0.209 0.125 37.5 85 2.01 26.3 125 4.35 2.60 175638.75 19.297 0.053 12.7964 Sand (9) 37.7 0.224 0.133 37.1 81 2 18.8 125 4.66 2.77 160641.25 41.944 0.12 13.5675 Sand (9) 70.4 0.234 0.138 40.2 99 2.03 35.2 127 4.87 2.87 3490

REITZ & JENS, INC. Consulting Engineers Figure C-12, Page 3

Sheet 3600-13

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

Dep

th [f

t]

2.59

0 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-44




Position:X: 727235.79 ft, Y: 994339.90 ft


Ground level:466.50

Date:11/2/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:1 C-15

Fig:


U2



Clay (3)



Clay (3)











Sand (9)




Sand (9)


Sand (9)


Sheet 3600-14

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

35.0

40.0

45.0

50.0

55.0

60.0

Dep

th [f

t]

2.590 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

>23.5480

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-44




Position:X: 727235.79 ft, Y: 994339.90 ft


Ground level:466.50

Date:11/2/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:2 C-15

Fig:


U2




Sand (9)


Sheet 3600-15


DepthCorrected

pointresistance

Correctedlocal

friction


Soil TypeSPT

EnergyRatio N60

Undrainedshear

strength

Totaloverburden

stress


R&J Phi Angle

Relativedensity

Unitweight

CorrectedN60

UnitWeight

TotalOverburden

EffectiveOverburden

Es(OCR=4)

[ft] [MPa] [MPa] [lb/in^2] [bpf] [ksf] [MPa] [MPa] [degrees] [%] [g/cm^3] [bpf] [pcf] [ksf] [ksf] (ksf)1.25 1.18 0.024 0.2853 Clay (3) 6.4 1.157 0.007 0.007 22.4 1.8 6.4 112 0.15 0.15 3473.75 0.857 0.032 -1.4812 Silty clay to clay (4) 8.0 1.168 0.021 0.017 1.8 8.0 112 0.44 0.35 5846.25 2.063 0.02 -3.2071 Silty sand to sandy silt (7) 7.4 1.586 0.034 0.023 24.8 61 1.86 4.8 116 0.71 0.48 1728.75 3.96 0.021 2.2709 Sand to silty sand (8) 11.2 0.048 0.029 27.9 61 1.91 7.1 119 1.00 0.60 32911.25 4.262 0.027 3.7265 Silty sand to sandy silt (7) 12.5 0.063 0.036 28.4 59 1.91 8.0 119 1.31 0.75 35513.75 6.633 0.036 4.0381 Sand (9) 16.2 0.077 0.043 30.9 67 1.94 8.1 121 1.60 0.89 55216.25 6.564 0.036 6.1911 Sand to silty sand (8) 16.4 0.091 0.05 30.6 69 1.93 10.5 120 1.89 1.04 54618.75 7.334 0.037 6.6235 Sand to silty sand (8) 17.0 0.106 0.056 31.5 65 1.95 10.9 122 2.20 1.16 61021.25 5.752 0.028 8.4539 Sand to silty sand (8) 14.4 0.12 0.063 30.3 58 1.94 9.2 121 2.50 1.31 47923.75 8.548 0.036 9.47 Sand (9) 18.7 0.135 0.07 32.3 66 1.96 9.4 122 2.81 1.46 71126.25 15.729 0.06 10.3871 Sand (9) 31.4 0.15 0.078 35.9 83 1.99 15.7 124 3.12 1.62 130928.75 16.368 0.047 11.4914 Sand (9) 32.7 0.165 0.085 36.3 83 1.99 16.4 124 3.43 1.77 136231.25 20.063 0.052 12.3276 Sand (9) 36.6 0.18 0.092 37.2 88 2.01 18.3 125 3.74 1.91 166933.75 9.879 0.044 15.4016 Sandy silt to clayey silt (6) 21.6 0.195 0.099 32.6 72 1.95 21.6 122 4.06 2.06 82236.25 4.032 0.077 28.8202 Sandy silt to clayey silt (6) 16.1 0.202 0.103 28.1 1.84 16.1 115 4.20 2.14 335


Sheet 3600-16

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

Dep

th [f

t] 0.46

0 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

>6.776>7.077>8.757>7.392

>7.717>10.229>10.934>11.297>10.622>9.633>10.773>9.912>8.159>8.094>8.229>8.889>9.010>6.965>7.142>8.704>7.783>7.882>7.589

>8.632

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-74




Position:X: 727218.57 ft, Y: 993741.14 ft


Ground level:464.60

Date:11/3/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:1 C-27

Fig:


U2



Clay (3)


Clay (3)


Clay (3)

Clay (3)






Sand (9)


Sand (9)

Sheet 3600-17

0 100 200 300

0 100 200 300

qc [T/ft^2]

qc [T/ft^2]

35.0

40.0

45.0

50.0

55.0

60.0

Dep

th [f

t]

0.460 0.5 1.0 1.5

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

fs [T/ft^2]

Rf [%]

>3.633>5.565

0 5 10 15 20

0 5 10 15 20

u2 [lb/in^2]

u2 [lb/in^2]

0 10 20 30 40

0 10 20 30 40

N60 []

N60 []

>65.48

0 1 2 3 4

20 30 40 50

Su(qc) [ksf]

Phi [degrees]

Test no:C-74




Position:X: 727218.57 ft, Y: 993741.14 ft


Ground level:464.60

Date:11/3/2009

Scale:1 : 44

Page:2 C-27

Fig:


U2



Sand (9)




Sheet 3600-18


DepthCorrected

pointresistance

Correctedlocal

friction


Soil TypeSPT

EnergyRatio N60

Undrainedshear

strength

Totaloverburden

stress


R&J Phi Angle

Relativedensity

Unitweight

CorrectedN60

UnitWeight

TotalOverburden

EffectiveOverburden

Es(OCR=4)

[ft] [MPa] [MPa] [lb/in^2] [bpf] [ksf] [MPa] [MPa] [degrees] [%] [g/cm^3] [bpf] [pcf] [ksf] [ksf] (ksf)1.25 1.07 0.028 -0.6326 Clay (3) 6.9 1.018 0.007 0.004 21.6 1.79 6.9 112 0.15 0.08 3053.75 0.739 0.054 0.7696 Clay (3) 7.4 1 0.02 0.01 1.72 7.4 107 0.42 0.21 3006.25 0.488 0.05 1.2734 Silty clay to clay (4) 3.7 0.633 0.032 0.014 1.39 3.7 87 0.67 0.29 3178.75 0.361 0.029 3.5105 Silty clay to clay (4) 2.4 0.44 0.042 0.016 1.34 2.4 84 0.87 0.33 22011.25 0.276 0.017 7.3389 Clay (3) 2.4 0.302 0.052 0.019 1.43 2.4 89 1.08 0.40 9113.75 1.873 0.022 5.1653 Sand to silty sand (8) 6.3 0.363 0.064 0.024 22.6 63 1.81 4.1 113 1.33 0.50 15616.25 5.465 0.028 5.4159 Sand (9) 14.4 0.078 0.03 29.8 69 1.92 7.2 120 1.62 0.62 45518.75 10.558 0.048 8.072 Sand (9) 21.1 0.093 0.037 33.9 83 1.98 10.6 124 1.93 0.77 87821.25 7.764 0.04 8.4275 Sand (9) 17.4 0.108 0.044 31.9 70 1.95 8.7 122 2.25 0.92 64623.75 13.584 0.053 10.0533 Sand (9) 27.2 0.122 0.051 35.2 85 1.99 13.6 124 2.54 1.06 113026.25 12.735 0.052 11.2107 Sand (9) 25.5 0.137 0.059 34.9 81 1.99 12.7 124 2.85 1.23 106028.75 12.333 0.043 12.2506 Sand (9) 24.6 0.152 0.066 34.7 79 1.99 12.3 124 3.16 1.37 102631.25 10.198 0.032 13.3244 Sand (9) 20.4 0.167 0.073 33.6 72 1.98 10.2 124 3.47 1.52 84833.75 8.807 0.151 16.417 Sandy silt to clayey silt (6) 28.1 0.182 0.08 32.0 59 1.92 28.1 120 3.79 1.66 73336.25 11.41 0.442 15.4751 Sandy silt to clayey silt (6) 45.6 0.189 0.084 34.3 1.9 45.6 119 3.93 1.75 949


Sheet 3600-19

Sheet 3600-20

Sheet 3600-21

Sheet 3600-22

Sheet 3600-23


SECTION 03610

MECHANICALLY-STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1.1.1 This Section pertains to the construction of the wing walls for the Labadie Bottom Overpass. 1.1.2 The design of the overpass is to include wing walls as shown on the Contract Drawings. The wing

walls are intended to be mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) precast concrete block retaining walls. However, Contractor may choose to design and build precast concrete retaining walls or cast-in-place concrete retaining walls as an alternative. Such design change, shall be approved by the Company.



1.2.2 Section 02200 – Earthwork 1.2.3 Section 02831 – Temporary and Permanent Fences 1.2.4 Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.2.5 Section 03600 – Labadie Bottom Road Overpass

1.3 REFERENCES



1.3.3 National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls 1.3.4 NCMA TEK 2-4 – “Specifications for Segmental Retaining Wall Units” 1.3.5 NCMA SRWU-1 – “Determination of Connection Strength between Geosynthetics and Segmental

Concrete Units” 1.3.6 NCMA SRWU-2 – “Determination of Shear Strength between Segmental Concrete Units” 1.3.7 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C140 – “Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units” 1.3.8 ASTM C1262 – “Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Concrete Units” 1.3.9 ASTM D422 “Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils” 1.3.10 ASTM D4355 “Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture

and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus” 1.3.11 ASTM D4632 “Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles” 1.3.12 ASTM D4833 “Geomembrane Puncture Testing”

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Contractor shall submit certification that the Sub Contract design-builder of MSE system has demonstrated experience in the design and construction of similar size and types of MSE retaining walls on previous projects. Contractor shall submit a list of previous projects totaling 500,000 square feet or more where the specific retaining wall system has been used successfully and showing that the design-builder for the MSE is qualified and has a record of successful performance. Contact names and telephone numbers shall be listed for each project. The design-builder and suppliers shall be approved by the Company.

1.4.2 Contractor shall submit detailed design calculations and drawings of the wing walls at least 30 days

prior to the start of construction of the wing walls. The design calculations shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in Missouri and shall state the design assumptions, all design parameters, bearing capacity, global stability, internal stability, factors of safety, and design cases. The design and drawings shall be approved by Company.


1.4.3 Contractor shall submit a manufacturer's certification that the retaining wall system components including the precast concrete units, the geogrid reinforcement, and the drainage aggregate meet the requirements of this Specification. The contractor’s submittal package shall include but not be limited to actual test results for tension/creep, durability and aging, construction damage, geogrid and facing connection, pullout, and quality control.

1.4.4 Contractor of MSE retaining walls shall submit certification, prior to start of work, that the precast

concrete units and specific geogrid: 1.4.4.1 have been successfully utilized on a minimum of five (5) similar projects, that is height, soil

fill types, erection tolerances, submergence, etc.; and 1.4.4.2 have been successfully installed on a minimum of 1 million (1,000,000) square feet of

retaining walls. 1.4.5 Contractor shall submit a test report documenting strength of specific modular precast concrete unit

and geogrid reinforcement connection. The maximum design tensile load of the geogrid shall be equal to the laboratory tested ultimate strength of geogrid and facing unit connection at a maximum normal force limited by the height of the structure divided by a safety factor of 1.5. The connection strength evaluation shall be performed in accordance with NCMA test method SRWU-1.

1.4.6 Contractor shall submit the resume and qualifications of the Field Supervisor for approval by the

Company. The Field Supervisor shall have had recent and successful experience with the construction of MSE retaining walls of the same type and size as this Work.



1.5 SITE CONDITIONS See Sections 1B-3.0 and 03600-1.6 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The Company will retain the services of an independent Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) Engineer to observe the cast-in-place concrete installation, perform materials evaluation testing, and verify that requirements of these specifications are being met.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.7.1 Contractor shall inspect materials upon delivery to assure that specified type and grade of materials have been received and proper color and texture of units have been received.

1.7.2 Contractor shall prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials which may affix

themselves, from coming in contact with materials. 1.7.3 Contractor shall store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.7.4 Contractor shall protect materials from damage. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into

the retaining walls. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

2.1.1 Precast concrete units shall be machine formed, Portland Cement concrete blocks specifically designed for retaining wall applications.

2.1.2 Concrete units shall conform to the requirements of NCMA TEK 2-4 and have a minimum 28 days

compressive strength (f’c) of 3500 psi and a maximum absorption of 8 pounds per cubic feet as determined in accordance with ASTM C140. The concrete shall have adequate freeze-thaw protection and meet the requirements of ASTM C1262.


2.1.3 The minimum wall thickness shall be 12 inches. 2.1.4 All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper

placing of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of the construction. Any cracks or chips observed during construction shall fall within the guidelines outlined in NCMA TEK 2-4.

2.1.5 Dimensions of units shall not differ more than 1/8-inch except height, which shall not differ more than

+1/16-inch as measured in accordance with ASTM C140. The height of any unit shall not differ more than +1/16-inch from front to back or from side to side.

2.1.6 Bond configuration shall run with bonds nominally located at midpoint vertically to adjacent units, in

both straight and curved alignments. 2.1.7 If pins are used by the retaining wall manufacturer to interconnect precast concrete units, they shall

consist of a non-degrading polymer or galvanized steel and be made for the express use with the precast concrete units supplied.

2.1.8 Cap adhesive shall meet the requirements of the precast concrete unit manufacturer. 2.1.9 For any corners shown on the construction plans, precast concrete units shall be capable of

providing overlap of units on each successive course so that walls meeting at corner are interlocked and continuous. Precast concrete units that require corners to be mitered shall not be allowed.

2.1.10 Precast concrete units shall be capable of providing a split face, textured surface for all vertical

surfaces that will be exposed after completion of wall, including any exposed sides and backs of units.

2.2 GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT

2.2.1 The geogrid reinforcement shall be a biaxial grid structure designed for the support of MSE walls. It shall be formed from select polypropylene material, with a minimum tensile modulus of 18,500 pounds per foot, minimum junction strength of 1050 pounds per foot, nominal opening size of 1.8 inch to 2.5 inch, minimum 70 percent open area, and containing a minimum of 0.5 percent carbon black. The geogrid shall have high flexural rigidity and shall maintain its reinforcement and interlock capabilities under repeated dynamic loads, shall be resistant to ultraviolet degradation, to damage under normal construction practices, and resistant to biological or chemical degradation.

2.2.2 The manufacturers/suppliers of the geogrid reinforcement shall have demonstrated construction of

similar size and types of segmental retaining walls on previous projects. 2.2.3 The type, strength, and placement location of the reinforcing geogrid shall be as shown on the final,

sealed construction plans. 2.3 LEVELING PAD

Material for leveling pad shall consist of compacted sand, gravel, or combination thereof and shall be a minimum of 6 inches in depth. Lean concrete with a strength of 200-300 psi and three inches thick maximum may also be used as a leveling pad material. The leveling pad should extend laterally at least a distance of 6 inches from the toe and heel of the lowermost MSE unit.

2.4 REINFORCED (INFILL) SOIL

2.4.1. The reinforced soil material shall be free of debris and consist of one of the following inorganic USCS soil types: GP, GW, SW, SP, SM, meeting the following gradation, as determined in accordance with ASTM D422:

U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing

4 inch 100 No. 4 20 – 100

No. 40 0 – 60 No. 200 0 – 10

2.4.2. The plasticity of the fine fraction of the reinforced soil shall be less than 20.


2.4.3 The pH of the backfill material shall be between 3 and 9 when tested in accordance with ASTM D51. 2.4.5 The minimum internal friction angle (ϕ) of the reinforced soil shall be 34 degrees.

2.5 GEOTEXTILE FILTER

Geotextile filter fabric shall be needle-punched non-woven polypropylene fibers with grad tensile strength (ASTM D4632) of 300 LBS. or more at 50% elongation, trapezoidal tear strength of 115 LBS. or more, puncture strength (ASTM D4833) of 175 LBS., and UV resistance (ASTM D4355) of 70% strength after 500 hours.

2.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

2.6.1 The dimensions of the wing walls shall be such that the 1(v)-to-3(h) slope is met at all locations including the wrap-around slope at the ends of the walls.

2.6.2 The minimum factors of safety shall be: 2.6.2.1 Overturning: 2.0 2.6.2.2 Bearing Capacity: 2.0 2.6.2.3 Global Stability: 1.5 2.6.2.4 Sliding: 1.5 2.6.2.5 Reinforcement pullout: 1.5 2.6.3 Properties of retained earth: see requirements for Section 02200 – 2.1. 2.6.4 The location of the design fill height for passive pressure shall be the wall toe. The top one foot of

the soil height shall be disregarded due to the possibility of erosion and freeze-thaw 2.6.5 The maximum vertical batter shall be 1-1/2 inches per foot. 2.6.6 The seismic design load shall be in accordance with Section 03600 – 2.1.5. PART 3 – EXECUTION

The wing walls shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the contract drawings and in conformance with the approved design of the wing walls.


LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. A - 1

APPENDIX A - SAFETY AND CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Contractor and their employees are responsible for their safety.

1.1 Contractor General Requirements

1.1.1 Contractor supervision and personnel shall obtain site-specific training. This will include, but not be limited to:

• Workman’s Protection Assurance (WPA) / Hold Tag Equipment Lock-out • Hot Works • Confined Spaces • Commissioning WPA Procedure • Other Safety Requirements listed in this specification

Note: Contractor employees may be barred from Ameren property for failure to comply with WPA procedures. Contract may be terminated or Contractor may lose future work for failure to enforce WPA. See the following WPA Authorization Form (Attachment A5) for sign-on access to the Ameren automated WPA system at each plant site.

1.1.2 Contractor administers appropriate disciplinary action if their employees violate Job Working Rules.

1.1.3 Contractor must hold daily job briefings.

1.1.4 All rolling equipment must be inspected prior to use.

1.1.5 Ameren reserves the right to bar any individual from Company property.

1.2 Rules to Live By

Rules to Live By is focused on activities that have the potential to produce a fatality or serious injury. While there are many hazards that can produce serious injuries, the items listed below are so significant that a single violation warrants immediate intervention by the Contractor. Actions determined to be in violation of these rules may result in permanent barring from all Ameren facilities. Ameren may conduct an independent investigation as necessary.

Fall Protection – Failure to use proper fall protection when there is a risk of a fall that is greater than 6 feet

WPA (Lock Out / Tag Out) – Violation of a tag, lock or tag-out device that is used for employee and contractor protection.

Electrical Safety – Failure to follow the proper procedures and wear proper personal protective equipment when working on energized equipment.

Confined Space Entry – Failure to evaluate a confined space and perform air monitoring checks prior to entry.

Rigging / Hoisting – Walking or working under a suspended load.

Trenching and Shoring – Entering an excavation greater than 5 feet deep that has not been properly sloped or shored.

1.2.1 It is the expectation that the Contractor will enforce our RTLB program and discipline the RTLB violators. All violators will be removed immediately from the site, after which the Contractor will be required to formally submit on their letterhead a detailed report on the incident, noting internal meeting(s), additional training that was conducted, and what will be done to prevent a reoccurrence, prior to return of the employee.

1.2.2 Violations of other safe work practices also may result in permanent barring from all Ameren Facilities.


1.2.3 Contractors will be assessed $2,000 per RTLB violation that Ameren personnel find during the project. Contractor is to donate assessment to a mutually agreed-upon charity.

1.3 Safe Work Practices

1.3.1 Hard hats with bill facing forward, appropriate safety shoes and foam-lined safety glasses with side shields must be worn at all times in all locations past the Construction Gate. Safety shoes must be compliant with ANSI Z41 effective January 2008. Safety glasses must be compliant with ANSI Z87.1 or equivalent. Supervisors may permit the removal of hard hats and safety glasses in areas such as trailers, or training rooms.

1.3.2 Wear a hardhat, safety glasses, and a welding hood when welding.

1.3.3 Wear foam-lined safety goggles over non-safety rated prescription eyewear.

1.3.4 Foam-lined safety glasses shall be worn at all times. Contractor employees who wear prescription safety eyewear shall also have the foam-lined feature.

1.3.5 Face shields must be worn over safety glasses when grinding, chipping, jack hammering, power sawing, handling hazardous chemicals, or performing other tasks that could result in a face or eye injury.

1.3.6 Wear appropriate gloves to protect hands from cuts, burns, temperature extremes, chemicals, biological agents or other hazards.

1.3.7 Wear hearing protection when performing noisy work, such as jack-hammering, or where posted.

1.3.8 Hair must be cut or contained above shoulder length and must not interfere with protective headgear.

1.3.9 Shorts, shirts without sleeves or with sleeves rolled up above the shoulder are not permitted.

1.3.10 Gas bottles must be secured to prevent tipping. Gas bottles must be capped or have a regulator installed. Oxy/acetylene bottles must be separated by at least 20-foot or a 5-foot barrier with a one-hour fire rating while in storage.

1.3.11 During welding or “burning”:

• Use temporary shielding to protect personnel beside, above and below the work; free falling of sparks below a cutter/welder’s feet is not allowed

• Contain slag, sparks, etc.

• Place weld rod stubs in containers after removal from stingers, and place all other trash in appropriate containers.

1.3.12 Safety harnesses are required when working on surfaces over six (6) feet high that do not have guardrails or other fall protection. Attach lanyards and lifelines to structural members capable of supporting the load requirement (5000 lbs. anchor point).

1.3.13 On portable man lifts, fall protection is required per manufacturer’s instructions. The lift must be secure and stable prior to use.

1.3.14 For overhead work rolling scaffolds, mechanical lift platforms are preferred over ladders.

1.3.15 If straight or extension ladders must be used, one worker must hold the ladder until another worker has tied the top to a substantial anchor point. Prior to working above 6 feet off the straight or extension ladder, worker is to don fall protection harness with lifeline, using or establishing an anchor point overhead for clip attachment, as required by Rules to Live By.

1.3.16 If a step ladder must be used when the worker’s feet are on or above the fifth rung, the top of the ladder must be tied to a substantial anchor or a second worker must hold the ladder. Prior to working above 6 feet off the step ladder, worker is to don fall protection harness with lifeline, using or establishing an anchor point overhead for clip attachment, as required by Rules to Live By.


1.3.17 Daily clean-up of the work area is required. Keep stairways and aisles clear at all times. Tie extension cords, welding leads, air hoses, etc., to middle rail of the handrail and/or route overhead.

1.3.18 Barricade at least 6 feet from the hole or edge if grating or handrail sections are being removed or installed.

1.3.19 Barricade below lifting/hoisting activities.

1.3.20 All electrical junction boxes, duct panels, etc., are to be kept closed whenever possible.

1.3.21 Vent gas-powered equipment, such as welders, generators, compressors or power tools, to the outdoors. Exhaust from equipment near doors must not enter the plant when the doors are opened.

1.3.22 Plant Fire System Equipment is NOT for routine work unless specifically authorized by the Plant.

1.3.23 If the plant allows Contractor employees to use elevators, observe the following rules:

• No equipment on elevators may extend through the roof access opening.

• Transport bulk materials in freight elevators and obey the posted weight limits.

• Only tools and materials that can be carried by hand are allowed on passenger elevators.

1.3.24 Qualified electricians are required to wear fire-retardant (FR) clothing or 100% natural fibers when working on exposed, energized circuits. FR clothing must meet arc flash labels and be appropriate for the tasks being performed.

1.3.25 Reflective safety vests must be worn by all personnel who work on or near active highways, roads, or parking lots. Vests are also required for other work that places personnel near motor vehicles such as flaggers, riggers, survey crews, etc. ANSI/ISEA 107, Class III high-visibility reflective safety vests shall be worn for maximum visibility. Ameren may require vests on other projects.

1.3.26 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI’s ) shall be used to protect all 120 VAC electrical equipment including electric hand tools and cord sets. The use of 480 VAC GFCI’s is required when working in wet locations.

1.3.27 Adding slugs within electrical devices requires written approval by Ameren representative. Equipment rated fuses and/or circuit breakers shall not be removed and replaced with ones of different set parameters without written approval by an Ameren representative

1.3.28 Contractor shall follow safety requirements for working on elevated platforms per Elevated Platform Safety Requirements (Appendix Y).

1.3.29 We want this to be a SAFE job. YOU CAN HELP. Report all unsafe acts and conditions to your Supervisor. Consult a Contractor or Ameren Supervisor if there are any questions about work rules or safety requirements.

1.4 Other Safety Requirements

1.4.1 If outages are required, the Contractor shall coordinate with the SPOC to obtain lock-outs and releases in accordance with the Plant’s WPA/Hold Card procedures and operating practices. Equipment with a WPA/Hold Card tag shall never be serviced or removed.

1.4.2 Contractors must comply with all Federal, State and Local laws, regulations and ordinances for work in permit-required confined spaces. Contractors shall obtain information from the plant designee on the location and other pertinent information regarding confined space entry. Any entry involving both Contractor and Ameren employees shall be coordinated through the SPOC.

1.4.3 Only qualified and authorized persons should work on energized electrical equipment.

1.4.4 All lifting/hoisting activities near overhead, high tension power lines must include awareness of and observance of the following safe working clearances:


Voltage Clearance 13.8 kV 10 feet 69 kV 11 feet

138 kV 13 feet 161 kV 14 feet 230 kV 16 feet 345 kV 29 feet

1.4.5 Ameren must review contractor qualifications before contractor employees may work in high voltage areas.

1.4.6 Contractor shall coordinate hot work, (i.e., welding, brazing, heating and cutting), with Company personnel to assure that Ameren safety requirements are met as outlined on Hot Work Permit (Attachment A8).

1.4.6.1 A Hot Work Checklist/Permit must be utilized when performing hot work such as welding, cutting, grinding, or any other activity that produces sparks. Contractor may use their own forms or Ameren’s but work should be coordinated through the SPOC.

1.4.7 Plant equipment identified with a nuclear radiation symbol (as seen below) is NOT to be serviced by

unauthorized personnel):

1.4.8 All equipment on the project shall be used in accordance with Federal, State, and Local ES&H requirements in addition to the manufacturer’s instructions and guidelines. Equipment shall not be modified in any way for use other than what the manufacturer intended.

1.4.8.1 Any alterations must be approved by the manufacturer in writing. Only trained and authorized persons shall operate machinery or equipment.

1.4.8.2 Use hand-held power tools only for their intended purpose. Do not use tools that are broken, have dull blades, dull bits, have damaged cords, or have damaged/missing guards. Hand-held power tool switches should not be modified by any means to maintain power without constant trigger pressure. (Ref. OSHA 29CFR1910.243.

1.4.8.3 All Grinders guards/handles must remain on grinders at all times. If a guard or handle is required to be removed because of a tight work area, a permit must be completed and maintained at work location. See Grinder Plan (Attachment A6).

1.4.9 Ameren expects that all Electrical Contractors will follow the common work practice that a check of all wires being demoed is performed to ensure that all wires are dead and de-terminated before wrecking. If wires are found live, verification will be made prior to wires being terminated or cut.

1.4.10 Barricades

NOTE: Do not rely on barricade tape and flags to prevent a fall that is more than 6 feet.

• When attended, install barricade tape no less than 6 feet from opening.


• Use fall protection if personnel are working closer than 6 feet to the opening.

• When unattended, cover the floor opening with a temporary cover, or temporary handrails 42 inches in height that include a mid-rail and toe board. Temporary covers must be able to support at least twice the load to which they will be subjected (including people, equipment and/or vehicle traffic).

• Temporary covers must be secured when installed in such a way as to prevent accidental movement by wind, traffic, or employees.

1.4.10.1 Barricades must be used to warn employees about a hazard or restrict employees’ access to a hazardous area. Barricades must have an information tag listing the responsible person, date of erection, and purpose. Barricade signs should indicate the Contractor, reason, and expiration date/time. Remove the barricade when work is completed. See Barricade Tag (Attachment A4).

1.4.10.2 Any employee may erect a barricade. The person responsible for the barricade must remove it when the hazard no longer exists.

NOTE: Any time red Barricade tape is to be used, the Contractor must inform the Construction Project Lead/SPOC, who in turn will notify the Shift Supervisor.

• Red barricade tape shall be used to warn personnel DO NOT ENTER dangerous areas. These areas may only be entered with authorization from the person who erected the barricade.

• Yellow and magenta tape shall be used to warn personnel DO NOT ENTER an area because radiography is creating a radiation hazard.

• Yellow barricade tape shall be used to warn personnel of immediate hazards that have the potential to cause injury. Areas barricaded with yellow may be entered once the hazard is identified and can be avoided.

• Green barricade tape shall be used to warn personnel of possible exposure to hexavalant chromium. Respiratory protection is required in these areas.

Contractors are responsible for compliance with the OSHA Regulation on Hexavalant Chromium. “Regulated Areas” should be clearly demarcated with Green barricade tape with a caution tag that clearly states the hazard in the work area, (e.g., “Hex Chrome Exposure – Respiratory Protection Required”). In general, regulated areas should be established a minimum distance from the activity as described below;

1. 5 Feet – Welding on boiler tubes, steam piping and other materials that contain 2.5% chromium or less

2. 10 Feet – Welding on Stainless steel and other materials that contain more than 2.5% chromium.

3. 20 Feet and/or Visible plume – Plasma arc cutting, air arc cutting, chamfer-trodes, cut-trodes and other processes lacking sufficient air monitoring data by Ameren for the protection of our employees.

Contractors are responsible for air monitoring as required for their employee protection and validation of engineering controls. The guidelines for barricading are based on employee exposures based on collection of data by Ameren. These distances are guidelines and may be increased or decreased based on air monitoring data. Ameren Safety Department will request air monitoring data at the beginning of each job, especially if the process is new or not sufficiently monitored in the past.

• A Nuclear Radiation Sign (see Item 1.4.7 above) is used to warn unauthorized personnel not to tamper with or remove instruments or equipment.


• Flashing yellow lights may be used with barricades.

• Other barricades may be used for roadwork and for other special situations.

1.4.11 Incident/Accident Reporting

1.4.11.1 In the event of a incident/injury to a Contractor or Subcontractor employee, the SPOC shall be notified ASAP, and a written report provided no later than 24 hours after the incident/injury.

1.4.11.1.1 This notification shall include a detailed description of the accident or injury, including the names of those involved. (Incident/Accident Investigation Report (Attachment A1)) and (Witness Statement (Attachment A2)) must be utilized to provide the required notification.

1.4.11.1.2 OSHA Recordable injuries and minor injuries requiring first aid must be recorded using the First Aid Register (Attachment A3), which must be forwarded to the SPOC.

1.4.11.1.3 On Ameren Coordinated Insurance Program (ACIP) projects, copies of all first reports of injury and supporting investigation information should be faxed to the designated claims manager and ACIP broker (see Ameren Safety Supv. for contact numbers).

1.4.11.2 For any serious incident or injury:

• First — Notify the Plant Shift Supervisor or designee immediately. The Shift Supervisor will make the Emergency call and implement appropriate Plant Emergency Response procedures.

• Second — Provide First Aid for the injured as required until professional Emergency Responders arrive.

• Third — Secure the area to ensure safety of other personnel.

• Fourth — Notify the SPOC via phone, PA, radio, or in person.

1.4.11.3 The accident scene must be secured for the accident investigation. Equipment or material can only be moved to prevent further injury until a review of the accident is completed.

1.4.11.4 Follow up verbal messages to the SPOC with written notifications within 24 hours as directed in Item 1.4.11.1.

1.4.12 Imminent Danger Situations

1.4.12.1 Contractor must suspend work immediately upon discovery of any situation that may, in their opinion, reasonably be expected to cause serious physical harm, illness, death, or significant environmental or equipment damage.

1.4.12.2 ES&H concern(s) must be corrected, to the satisfaction of the Contractor and Company, before work may resume.

1.4.12.3 Examples of “imminent danger” situations may include, but are not limited to the following:

• Falls from elevations

• Excavations not properly sloped or shored

• Radiation hazards

• Electrocution hazards

• Injury to the public


• Unsafe operation of vehicles, machinery or heavy equipment

• Improper or non-existent WPA/Hold Card equipment lockout

• Release of hazardous substances (OSHA 40CFR Part 302) into the environment in excess of the reportable quantity

1.4.13 Abandoned Piping and Demolishing Abandoned Piping

Ameren expects all Contractors to follow the Guidelines for Abandoned Piping and Demolishing Abandoned Piping (Attachment A20), while performing work on piping and/or utilities which are considered to be abandoned or will be abandoned in place.

1.4.14 Excavations

1.4.14.1 Contractor shall non-destructive excavate all underground construction activities, unless given approval by the SPOC to do otherwise.

1.4.14.2 High Suction Vacuum Contractors working at the Ameren site must have a vacuum relief valve located within equipment, a vacuum break at the point of operation, along with equipment that is grounded while operating.

2.0 WORKERS PROTECTION ASSURANCE PROCEDURE FOR OUTSIDE CONTRACT OR CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL

GENERAL

It is necessary to assure the safety of outside contract personnel and Ameren personnel throughout construction of new system equipment and/or modification of existing system equipment. The following is a brief outline of procedures, to guide outside contract personnel in dealing with Ameren operating authorities to obtain Worker's Protection Assurances (WPA).

2.1 Definition

2.1.1 Worker's Protection Assurance:

WPA is the name given to the process used by Ameren to ensure the safety of those who work on generation, transmission and substation equipment.

2.1.1.1 It’s primary purpose is to ensure the SAFETY of the worker.

2.1.1.2 The Ameren WPA system uses a series of Tags and a Sign-On procedure.

2.1.1.3 The reliability and integrity of the WPA process relies upon all persons on the plant site understanding and honoring the WPA Tags and Sign-On procedure.

2.1.1.4 WPA is the Operating Authority's assurance to the person obtaining Worker's Protection Assurance that: (see Operating Authority below)

Either 1) The equipment covered by the Worker's Protection Assurance has been completely isolated from energy sources (see Out of Service below)

Or 2) The equipment is placed in a special status requested by the person receiving the Worker's Protection Assurance (see Local Control below)

2.1.2 Types of WPA Authorities

2.1.2.1 Custody Authority

2.1.2.1.2 The Custody Authority is the person who is responsible for and “in charge” of all of the equipment in a system or power plant (usually the Plant Manager).

2.1.2.2 Jurisdictional Authority

2.1.2.2.1 The Jurisdictional Authority is the individual or group of individuals, responsible for the overall direction and coordination of the Ameren system equipment.


2.1.2.2.2 The Jurisdictional Authority of Plant Equipment (coal pile to turbine) is the Plant Operating Supervisor.

2.1.2.2.3 The Jurisdictional Authority (generator to Electrical System) is the Transmission Dispatcher / Power Dispatcher.

2.1.2.3 Functional Authority

2.1.2.3.1 The Functional Authority is the individual or group of individuals, who perform or direct someone else to perform detailed operations, such as switching or valving.

2.1.2.3.2 The Functional Authority of Most Plant Equipment (coal pile to turbine) is the Operating Supervisor.

2.1.2.3.3 The Functional Authority (Electrical System) is the Transmission Dispatcher.

In a power plant, one person, the Operating Supervisor in the Control Room, approves and issues the WPA.

2.1.2.4 Functional Agents

2.1.2.4.1 One type of Functional Agent is the Unit Operating Engineer (UOE) He creates the documentation.

2.1.2.4.2 Another type of Functional Agent is the Plant Operating Engineer (POE). He performs the work and hangs the tags.

The Plant’s UOE and the POE always perform the above duties, never Contractor personnel.

2.1.3 WPA Isolation Point:

2.1.3.1 A WPA Isolation Point may be any of the following energy-isolating devices:

• Switch • Circuit Breaker • Valve • Coupling • Drive Belt • Chain

2.1.4 Boundary:

2.1.4.1 A Boundary is a collection of energy-isolation devices that form a “zone of protection or control” around the equipment to be serviced.

• The status of equipment within a WPA Boundary can only be changed after the Holder has Signed-Off the WPA and the WPA tag(s) have been removed.

2.2 Equipment Covered By Worker's Protection Assurances

2.2.1 All system equipment under the jurisdiction of an Operating Authority must be covered by Worker's Protection Assurance when it is to be worked on or tested.

2.2.2 The only equipment that can be covered by Worker's Protection Assurance is equipment under an Operating Authority's jurisdiction.

2.2.2.1 Equipment connected to energy sources but not released to the jurisdiction of an Operating Authority can only be protected by Worker's Protection Assurance on the isolating device (or devices) between the energy source and the equipment.

In this case it is only possible for the Operating Authority to assure the person receiving Worker's Protection Assurance that the particular isolating device (or devices) connecting the new equipment to his energy sources is protected and he cannot assure the person


receiving the Worker's Protection Assurance that the equipment is completely isolated. Therefore, it is better for all new equipment to be released to the jurisdiction of an Operating Authority as soon as possible.

2.3 Description and Purpose of Tags

2.3.1 General Notes:

2.3.1.1 When you see a WPA tag on equipment, it is telling you to stay clear of the equipment and keep hands off (violating WPA tags will result in disciplinary action up to and including termination).

2.3.1.2 Only the Functional Authority of the equipment may order tags to be placed or removed.

2.3.1.3 Tags will ordinarily be executed and attached by an Operator or his agent.

2.3.1.4 Tags, record sheets and WPA sheets will have the equipment name, etc., along with the serial number of the WPA record.

2.3.2 Function Authority’s Hold Off Tag

2.3.2.1 Definition:

2.3.2.1.1 The Hold Off is an inviolable order of a Functional Authority that the disconnect device(s) which it is intended to cover must not be closed (or opened in the case of valves) under any circumstances unless definitely ordered or approved by him and then only if the Hold Off tag is first ordered removed.

2.3.2.2 Issued to:

2.3.2.2.1 Only to the Functional Authority (never to a worker).

2.3.2.3 Usage:

2.3.2.3.1 The Hold Off is an Operating Authority’s tool which he may choose to use any time he feels it would contribute to a safer working environment.

2.3.2.3.2 To properly isolate equipment from all sources of normal energy and tag them with Hold Off tags so the Functional Authority may issue an Out of Service or Restraint to a supervisor or workman so work on designated equipment may proceed.

2.3.2.4 Equipment Status:

2.3.2.4.1 Operator must obtain the approval of, or be acting under the orders of, his Functional Authority before changing the status of, or working on any equipment bearing a Hold Off tag.

2.3.3 Worker’s Hold Off Tag

2.3.3.1 Definition:

The Worker’s Hold Off is the method by which the Holder of a Local Control isolates equipment he is working on under the Local Control.

2.3.3.2 Workers will create their own Worker’s Hold Off tag by legibly signing a blank Power Plant Hold Off Tag. If the Holder of a Local Control wants to work on the equipment, it must first be isolated from its energy supplies. The Holder would open the breaker, close the valves, etc. to isolate the equipment. The Holder must then hang a Worker’s Hold Off on top of the Local Control to ensure the breaker or valves remain in the de-energized position. A Worker’s Hold Off tag when placed has the same meaning as a Functional Authority’s Hold Off. The Holder would need to remove the Worker’s Hold Off prior to closing the breaker or opening the valves and operating the equipment.

2.3.3.3 A Worker’s Hold Off can only be placed over a Local Control Tag. It cannot be placed by itself.


EXAMPLE OF HOLD OFF TAG

EXAMPLE OF WORKER’S HOLD OFF TAG

2.4 Types of Worker's Protection Assurances

The following types of Worker's Protection Assurances are issued during construction at power plants:

2.4.1 Out of Service (Issued under Hold Off Tag)

2.4.1.1 Definition:

• The Operating Authority’s assurance that the equipment designated is properly isolated from all known energy sources and is appropriately tagged so that it will remain de-energized until the Out of Service is released.

2.4.1.2 Energy Status:

• Isolated from all normal sources and emergency back-up energy sources.

• This does not relieve the person obtaining the protection of the responsibility of making prescribed tests or observations to assure himself that the equipment is safe to work on. Points of isolation and points not to be changed are tagged, where possible, and those points cannot be changed while the Out of Service is in effect. However, equipment inside the zone of protection and not tagged, may be manually operated or tested, since it is in a de-energized state.

Worker’s Hold Off

Worker’s Hold Off tag to be placed over plant-issued

Local Control


2.4.1.3 Usage:

• Maintenance, including complete removal and disassembly.

2.4.1.4 Issued to:

• Supervisors or Workers when authorized by Custody Authority.

2.4.1.5 Persons Covered:

• Holder and anyone working directly for or with the Holder.

2.4.1.6 Physical Location of Holder:

• Does not have to remain on Plant property.

2.4.1.7 Duration:

• No time limitations. Remains in effect until equipment is ready to be restored to service.

2.4.1.8 Predominance:

• Unlimited number of Out of Services may be issued on a single piece of equipment by various people for various reasons. Multiple tags may be required for isolation.

2.4.2 Restraint

2.4.2.1 Definition:

• The Restraint, which is issued on the Functional Authority’s Hold Off, is an assurance given by the Functional Authority to the person to whom it is issued that the equipment it covers has been properly isolated from its energy sources and that normal voltage will not be applied while the Restraint is in effect.


• Isolated from all normal sources and emergency back-up energy sources.

2.4.2.3 Usage:

• The person to whom the Restraint is issued shall have control of the application of test energy in that his consent must be obtained before applying external energy of any magnitude, and he must be informed when the test is completed. Thus, the person should be familiar with the status of the equipment at all times, and to this extent the person shall be responsible for seeing that other persons working on the equipment with that person or under that person’s specific direction are protected against the application of test energy.

• The operator of the high-energy source will direct test and connections required following established standards or procedures or in special cases, specific instructions of the Functional Authority. The operator of the high-energy test source will communicate directly with the person who has the Restraint, but the operator may at no time apply energy until the Holder of the Restraint has given the operator permission to proceed.

2.4.2.4 Issued to:

• Supervisors or Workers when authorized by Custody Authority. In cases where several workers will work on the equipment tested, a qualified worker or supervisor shall be designated to act a coordinator on the job, and that person shall obtain the Restraint.


• Holder and anyone working directly for and with the Holder.



• Must remain on Plant property and in control of the job. If the Holder leaves the site of the test, he must remain “on-call.” The Holder shall not release the Restraint until all persons are removed from the equipment and informed of the intended release.

• The performance of maintenance will be permitted simultaneously with testing on equipment, provided that adequate safety can be maintained between the two jobs.

• If electrical testing is required, the procedures set forth in the System Operating Manual under Restraint, Item 207, will be followed.

2.4.2.7 Duration:

• Released before Holder goes off duty for the day.


• Only one Restraint and no other WPA.

2.4.3 Local Control

2.4.3.1 Definition:

• An authority granted to a person (other than a regular operator) that permits him to operate or direct operation of equipment and gives him the assurance that no operations will be performed on the equipment unless requested or personally approved by him.


• May or may not be de-energized. This is why different tags are used. The Functional Authority’s Hold Off is not in place for this type of WPA.

2.4.3.3 Usage:

• Short duration maintenance or troubleshooting.

2.4.3.4 Issued to:

• Supervisors or Workers when authorized by Custody Authority. Worker must give the reason for the request. Worker must specify if equipment is to be energized or isolated for him.


• Holder and anyone working directly for or with the Holder.


• Must remain on Plant property and in direct control of the job since he is responsible for the safety of his workers.

2.4.3.7 Duration:

• Released before Holder goes off duty. New equipment before acceptance has no time limit.


• Only one Local Control and no other WPA.


EXAMPLE OF LOCAL CONTROL TAG

2.4.4 Clearance

2.4.4.1 Definition:

• A Clearance is the assurance to the Holder that the system or equipment for which it is issued has been properly isolated from its normal energy sources (including any emergency back-up energy sources) and will remain isolated as long as the Clearance is in effect.

2.4.4.2 Usage:

• It is used whenever it is necessary to completely isolate a system or a piece of equipment from its normal energy sources (including any emergency back-up energy sources) to perform the desired work.

2.4.4.3 Issued to:

• Supervisors or Workers when authorized by Custody Authority.


• Holder and anyone working directly for or with the Holder


• Must remain on Plant property and in direct control of the job since he is responsible for the safety of his workers.

2.4.4.6 Duration:

• Released before Holder goes off duty.


• None. An unlimited number of Clearances may be issued concurrently on a system or a piece of equipment. Clearances may also be issued concurrently with Out of Services.

2.5 Exception

2.5.1 If a person holding Worker's Protection Assurance on a piece of equipment is not available and it is necessary because of plant or system emergency to place that piece of equipment in service, the Worker's Protection Assurance can be released to the Operating Authority by a person designated by the Holder of the Worker's Protection Assurance provided:

2.5.1.1 Every attempt has been made to contact the holder of the Worker's Protection Assurance


and

2.5.1.2 A thorough examination by the person releasing the equipment reveals the equipment to be in proper operating order.

3.0 COMMISSIONING JURISDICTIONAL CONTROL AND EQUIPMENT TAGGING

3.1 Commissioning Team Leader, Commissioning Engineer and Specialist

3.1.1 Ensure the following once Construction Turnover Acceptance Form is signed by commissioning team leader.

• Any activities on the turned over system not authorized by a member of the Commissioning Team will promptly cease.

• Any Construction Cards within the boundaries of the turnover are promptly removed.

NOTE

Plant based WPA will be used if commissioning an existing system in the plant or if the new system is tied to existing plant systems. The sole WPA authority would be the control room.

3.1.2 Request “System Under Test” card or applicable WPA based on boundaries turned over to commissioning.

NOTE

In case the new system is independent of the existing plant. “System Under Test” card will be used and administered by commissioning.

3.1.3 Maintain GEN-FRM-ADM-2155-07, System Under Test Card Log.

3.1.4 In the event that a positive isolation device does not exist in a system being turned over, that system’s boundary will be extended into the adjacent system to the first point of positive isolation.


4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY AND HEALTH

4.1 Contractor shall ensure worker and public safety during the course of this project.

4.1.1 Contractors must comply with all applicable Company, Federal, State, and Local health, safety and environmental regulations including, but not limited to, those concerning:

• Safety & Contractor Requirements (Appendix A) and Job Working Rules (Appendix B)

• Public and worker health and safety

• Public’s “Right to Know”

• Fire safety

• Air and water quality

• Flammable materials storage

• Spill control, response and cleanup

• Hazardous and non-hazardous waste handling, identification and disposal

NOTE: Ameren’s policies and procedures applicable to Contractors are available on www.ameren.com under Business Partners Suppliers / Standard Contracts

4.1.2 Refer to Ameren’s Contractor’s Substance Abuse Policy AUE-07-01 (Attachment A15) for minimum substance abuse testing requirements.

4.2 Contractor must have a full-time company corporate Safety Director who oversees and maintains the site safety program and site safety personnel, unless waived by the Ameren Managing Supervisor of Construction. This person must also be available for safety related questions and concerns. A full time company safety personnel must also be onsite for each shift for the entire duration of the project. The cost for the safety personnel shall be broken out in the bids. Resumés of the safety personnel who will be associated with the project must be submitted with the bid.

4.2.1 Ameren reserves the right to request the safety representative be removed from the project and be replaced with a more competent individual, if they are not fulfilling expectations.

4.3 With contract bid, Contractors shall submit:

• Contractor Environmental, Safety & Health Data Form (Attachment A9) (unless specifically exempted from this provision by Company).

• Their company’s ES&H program manual

4.4 After award, Contractor shall submit:

• A project-specific ES&H Action Plan, including an Emergency Response Action Plan that is in accordance with Ameren, Federal, State & Local requirements

4.5 At mobilization, Contractor shall:

• Appoint a competent onsite ES&H representative who will coordinate Contractor ES&H activities, hazardous material and waste handling. The ES&H representative will work with Ameren personnel on ES&H related issues, and implement ES&H rules necessary for safe execution of the project.

• Supply to the SPOC the frequencies of all walkie-talkie 2-way radios they intend to use. Frequencies must be listed to four (4 ) decimal places. Authorization for Two-Way Radios (Attachment A14) must be submitted to the designated SPOC.

4.6 Contractor shall be responsible for tool inspection/maintenance in accordance with the requirements of OSHA standards and manufacturer’s recommendations/instructions.

http://www.ameren.com/


4.7 Handling of Materials and Waste

4.7.1 If project involves use or presence of chemicals or products that are regulated under Section 112 (r) of the Clean Air Act, Sections 302 & 304 of Emergency Planning & Community Right to Know Act, OSHA 29CFR1926.65 or 29CFR1910.120, then Contractor has the choice of adopting the plant’s Health and Safety Plan (HSP) or developing a similar plan that is at least as protective and compliant

If Contractor is responsible for arranging to dispose of a hazardous or otherwise regulated waste where Ameren is identified as the generator of the waste, Company shall review, and approve or reject the waste disposal method and/or facility.

Contractor site personnel shall read and acknowledge by signature that they will comply with the applicable HSP.

Certification of individual training is required prior to hazardous waste operations as defined by OSHA 29CFR1910.120 or equivalent applicable state regulations.

4.7.2 Contractor shall identify as part of the bid, and be prepared to discuss upon award of Contract, the quantities, timetables and characterization, of wastes generated during project.

4.7.3 Contractor shall minimize amount of waste generated and shall discuss waste handling, manifest preparation, record keeping, and disposal with the SPOC in advance of these activities. Contractor should coordinate waste handling Vendors/Subcontractors with Company personnel.

4.7.4 Contractor shall handle, package, label and store wastes in accordance with Ameren, Federal, State and Local requirements.

4.7.5 Contractor shall remove such wastes from the premises in a timely manner for treatment, storage, and/or disposal in full compliance with applicable laws, regulations and ordinances, including documentation requirements.

4.7.6 If Contractor is considered the sole generator of waste, then, such waste is sole responsibility of Contractor and Ameren assumes no responsibility for Contractor’s compliance with applicable regulations.

4.7.7 Contractor shall notify the SPOC before using chemical/material that could create noxious or toxic fumes.

4.7.8 For materials brought onto jobsite, Contractor shall make copies available (upon request) of the Material Data Safety Sheets (MSDS) to the appropriate personnel on the worksite.

Contractor shall provide written notification to the SPOC of any material requiring an MSDS that is brought onsite by Contractor in quantities in excess of that material’s Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA) Threshold Planning Quantity. Such notification is required for SARA Tier II reporting purposes. Chemical of Interest Reporting (Appendix I) in this specification must be filled out and submitted to the SPOC.

4.7.9 Contractor shall ensure that hazardous chemicals or materials are properly contained and labeled, and that employees are adequately trained to recognize, handle and use hazardous chemicals safely

Small quantities (i.e., <10 gal.) of hazardous liquids, such as gasoline, diesel fuels or solvents, brought onto site shall be stored in properly labeled safety containers with flame arrestors and self-closing lids. All container labels must include contents information and display hazard symbols clearly on exterior of each container in accordance with NFPA 704M, OSHA 29CFR1910.1200 or other applicable standard.

4.8 Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) and Lead

4.8.1 In structures built prior to 1981, thermal system insulation, sprayed-on surfacing, and vinyl or asbestos floor tile shall be presumed to be ACM.

• Non-ACM will be labeled as such or otherwise identified by the SPOC and communicated to Contractor.


• Areas containing abatement activities will have warning signs, be barricaded, and access will be limited.

4.8.2 Ameren ES&H Management Instruction Asbestos Exposure Controls and Work Practices, ES-REG-203, specifies policies and procedures for contractors performing asbestos abatement work. Hardcopies may be requested from the SPOC.

Proposals for an ACM abatement project must designate:

• Scaffolding needs

• Glove bag and containment areas

• Potable water and shower requirements and locations

• Methods to protect scaffolding tubing from contamination after containment is removed

• Methods to minimize non-ACM dust outside the containment areas

• Methods to move ACM bags from containment areas to ACM receptacles

4.8.3 Ameren ES&H Lead Management Instruction, ES-REG-211, specifies policies and procedures for Contractors performing lead abatement work. Hardcopies may be requested from the SPOC.

4.9 ES&H Training Requirements

4.9.1 Documentation of OSHA training for Contractor craft workers and supervisors must be maintained onsite and made available to Ameren. Effective September 1, 2006, the minimum training standard is OSHA 10 for Contractor craft workers and OSHA 30 for Contractor supervisors.

4.9.2 Contractor will maintain documentation of ES&H training on project and must provide requested documentation of training to Company. Contractor shall retain verification of satisfactory training for as long as required by law or six months after completion of contract, whichever is greater.

4.9.3 Job safety awareness meetings will be held with Company and applicable contractors on a frequency determined by Company. The meetings will address industrial safety issues from Contractor job safety reviews.

4.10 Environmental, Safety & Health Surveys

4.10.1 The SPOC and Ameren ES&H personnel will conduct periodic ES&H surveys of the project. Any discrepancies will be reported to Contractor management for immediate correction.

4.10.2 These ES&H surveys do not relieve Contractors of their responsibility to self-inspect their work and equipment and to conduct their work in a safe and environmentally compliant manner.

4.11 Reporting and Investigating Incidents/Accidents

4.11.1 Contractor shall make an immediate report by telephone to the SPOC of any accident involving injury, death, fire, spill, mishandling of oil, regulated/hazardous waste spill, or any other emergency.

4.11.2 In the event of an emergency, Company has authorized the Plant Shift Supervisor and the SPOC to act as emergency coordinators. Contractor shall proceed with appropriate emergency response measures as directed by Plant Shift Supervisor and the SPOC, and take full responsibility for clean-up and disposal of any wastes or materials.

4.11.3 Contractor shall indemnify Company for all related costs and liabilities.

4.11.4 Contractor shall submit a Monthly Contractor Accident Statistics Report (Attachment A10) by the second day of each month for the preceding month’s activities.

4.11.5 Contractor shall investigate all types of events listed in above Item 1.4.11 Incident/Accident Reporting, whether they result in an injury or not, and provide the results of said investigation to Company. An accident investigation does not assign blame; it does determine how to eliminate similar accidents in the future. Company reserves the right to monitor Contractor’s investigation, and


Contractor shall provide the SPOC with all necessary information to all required Company personnel to perform this monitoring function.

4.11.6 Ameren reserves the right to investigate any accidents that occur on its property or in completing work being performed by a Contractor’s employee whether they result in an injury or not. Ameren will conduct further investigations for accidental environmental releases or spills, etc.

4.11.7 A signed Witness Statement (Attachment A2) must be completed by each witness providing factual observations.

4.11.8 An Incident/Accident Investigation Report (Attachment A1) must be submitted to the SPOC within 24 hours to document the investigation. Accident facts, causes, and corrective action should be documented and communicated to employees through ES&H meetings.

4.12 Certifications, Inspections, and Permits

4.12.1 Operations may require a Company permit. Such activities may include but are not limited to: hot work, confined space/vessel entry, excavations, asbestos abatement, lead abatement, etc. Contractor shall determine from the SPOC if any of Contractor’s activities require a Company permit or Contractor permit.

4.12.2 Some states and local authorities require permits for activities such as: excavations, heavy lifts, asbestos/lead abatement, air permits, water permits, hazardous waste generation, etc.

4.12.3 Contractors shall be responsible to secure and comply with these permits, unless the SPOC has delegated this to others in writing.

4.12.4 A third-party-certified Competent Person shall make a thorough annual inspection of cranes and powered hoisting equipment. Cranes shall be inspected and have deficiencies corrected prior to being put into service. Documentation of crane inspections must be maintained onsite by Contractor.

• Crane hooks should be inspected by a Competent Person prior to use. Rigging should be inspected by a Competent Person before each shift. Defective components shall be removed from service immediately. Anti-Two-Block devices, that automatically disengage crane hoist/boom functions when the hook or block approaches the jib or boom tip, shall be used on all cranes.

• All outriggers on mobile cranes must be fully extended and fully deployed when crane is used to lift or support a load.

• If, due to configuration or physical location, all outriggers cannot be fully deployed, calculations must be made from the “on-rubber” section of the load chart. A certified crane specialist must have written calculations and lift instructions reviewed by Ameren. The SPOC may make an exception for light-weight, lift-and-carry operations.

4.12.5 Operators of forklifts, boom lifts, buses, and other mobile equipment must be trained and certified on the operation of the specific equipment.

4.12.6 Operators of cranes must be trained and certified by National Commission for Certification of Crane Operators (CCO), or Operating Engineers Certification Program (OECP). Crane operators must be qualified on each crane type and rating they operate.

4.12.7 Operators of cranes are responsible for completing the Crane Maintenance Safety Checklist (Attachment A16).

4.12.8 A Competent Person shall design and a Competent Person shall erect scaffolding. Only the authorized scaffolding erector can make changes to scaffolding.

4.12.9 A Competent Person must inspect and tag scaffolding prior to initial use, before each work shift, and after any event that could affect its structural integrity. Untagged scaffolds must not be used.

4.13 Critical Lifts


4.13.1 Critical Determination

Contractor shall submit a Critical Lift Plan for any critical lift. Ameren reserves the right to designate any lift as critical. A lift shall be designated as a critical lift if any one of the following conditions exists:

4.13.1.1 Lifting over 50 tons.

4.13.1.2 Lift exceeds 75% of the rated capacity of the crane.

4.13.1.3 Lift requires the use of more than one crane.

a. In no case shall a multiple crane lift be performed in excess of 75% of any one of the crane’s individual load rated capacity at the planned radius.

4.13.1.4 Lifting a non-rigid object.

4.13.1.5 Lifting over equipment or material that could cause or result in a release of hazardous material to the environment.

4.13.1.6 The lifted item requires exceptional care in handling because it is being lifted above critical operating equipment or material and/or building structure.

4.13.1.7 The lifted item requires exceptional care in handling because of size, weight, close-tolerance installation, high susceptibility to damage or other unusual factor.

4.13.1.8 Lift performed in proximity of live electrical connections.

4.13.1.9 Lifting of personnel in baskets and/or personnel harnesses.

4.13.1.10 Lifting of equipment by helicopter.

Any lifts proposed by the contractor that meet the above criteria or determined to be critical by the Project Engineer will be subject to a Critical Lift Plan. Examples of lifts that are generally considered critical are: boiler tube panels, feedwater heaters, conveyor systems, coolers and pump skids, turbines and generators.

4.13.2 Critical Lift Plan

Contractor shall provide a detailed lifting and rigging plan for all lifts identified as critical. All critical lifts will require a Professional Engineer’s seal. Prior to executing lift, lift plans must be submitted to the Project Engineer, reviewed and accepted by a structural engineer in the POS Civil/Structural Group. Ameren will review submittals for general design features. Contractor is responsible for accuracy of calculations. Also prior to executing lift, any changes made in the field to the approved lift plan must be approved by the contractor’s engineer and accepted by the Ameren POS Project and Structural engineers. A copy of the lift plan must be onsite during the lift and must have been reviewed with all personnel involved with the lift, including the Ameren Construction Supervisor. Ameren’s Construction Supervisor shall be provided sufficient notice to allow him/her to witness the critical lift. A critical lift plan shall contain the following, as applicable:

4.13.2.1 Identify the items to be lifted.

4.13.2.2 Weight of the lifted item and total weight of the load (for mobile cranes, see the manufacturer’s instructions regarding components and attachments that must be considered as part of the load).

4.13.2.3 Center of gravity location.

4.13.2.4 Documented step-by-step instructions.

4.13.2.5 Special precautions, if any (such as outrigger or track cribbing for mobile cranes).

4.13.2.6 Evaluation of hazards associated with the lift that include ground support, soil conditions, allowable soil bearing capacity, underground utilities that could be damaged or suddenly collapse, maximum permissible wind speed and any other physical obstruction.


4.13.2.7 A list of each piece of equipment (e.g., crane, hoist, fork truck), accessory, and rigging component (e.g., slings, shackles, spreader bars, yokes) to be used for the lift. (This list shall identify each piece of equipment by type and rated capacity).

4.13.2.8 Designated checkpoints, hold points and estimated instrument readings, as relevant, so that job progress can be checked against the plan.

4.13.2.9 Rigging sketch(es), which include the following:

a. Lift point identification

b. Method(s) of attachment

c. Load vectors

d. Sling angles

e. Accessories used

f. Other factors affecting the equipment capacity

g. Rated capacity of equipment in the configuration(s) in which it will be used. (For cranes, many factors affect rated capacity, including boom length, boom angle and work area.)

h. If rigging points are attached to existing structural steel, it is the responsibility of the contractor's engineer to confirm that the additional loads do not overstress the existing structure, and to design additional bracing/reinforcement if required. Supporting calculations sealed by a Missouri Professional Engineer shall be included with the critical lift plan.

4.13.2.10 A load-path sketch that shows the load path and height at key points in the job. (For lifts with mobile cranes, include the crane position(s) relative to the load and relative to surrounding obstructions.) Where appropriate, include floor-loading diagrams.

4.13.2.11 A sketch indicating lifting and travel speed limitations. (This may be noted on the load path sketch or on a separate sketch.)

4.13.2.12 A sign-off sheet to verify that all inspections/tests required by OSHA are current for all equipment and rigging.

4.13.2.13 The lift plan shall provide specific information for each lift when multiple items of varying weights and/or shapes are included in the lift plan unless an exception is approved by the Ameren structural engineer.

4.14 Respiratory Protection

4.14.1 Contractors must provide a copy of their Respiratory Protection Program to the SPOC before they use respirators. The program must comply current Ameren, Federal, State and local requirements including OSHA 29CFR1910.134. The program must properly address the following:

• Respirator selection

• Respirator training and required test fit procedures

• Respirator cleaning, sanitizing, inspection and maintenance

• Respirator user’s medical clearance

4.15 ES&H Adherence Policy


4.15.1 Action Level One − The SPOC will issue a written Notice of ES&H Non-Compliance (Attachment A11) and Warning Letter for ES&H Non-Compliance (Attachment A12) to Contractor’s management and site ES&H representative if Contractor fails to comply with an applicable ES&H standard.

4.15.2 Action Level Two − The SPOC will issue a Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension (Attachment A13) to Contractor if ES&H non-compliance is not corrected by Action Level One, or if Contractor repeatedly fails to comply with applicable ES&H regulations. The appropriate Ameren Manager and Contractor’s Division Manager, or equivalent, must meet and agree on corrective actions acceptable to Company before Work may resume. Actions may include, but are not limited to:

• Removal of certain Contractor personnel from project.

• Alteration of Contractor’s job procedures.

• Having Ameren implement corrective action and backcharge Contractor.

Contractor shall not resume Work until Ameren accepts the proposed corrective actions. Ameren will retain meeting minutes documenting the agreement.

4.15.3 Action Level Three – Ameren Management may terminate the contract for cause, if Action Level One and Action Level Two do not result in Contractor’s ES&H compliance.


ATTACHMENT A1

INCIDENT/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT

Date of Accident: Time of Accident: Job Number:

Contractor Company Name: Date of Investigation:

Location of Accident:

Did injury result? Yes/No,: Involved Employee Name(s):

Involved Employee SS Number

Employee Job Classification or Skill: Years

In this Skill: Years With Company:

Describe Type of Injury:

Body Part(s) Involved, If applicable:

Injury Classification per OSHA 29CFR1904:

Was property damaged? Yes/No Describe damage/owner:

Is damaged property secured/maintained? Yes/No Person Maintaining

Names of Witnesses/Co-workers (With Social Security No.):

Weather/Wind Conditions: List/Describe personal Protective Equipment (PPE) in use by person exposed or injured.

Chemicals Involved:

Name(s) of Chemicals Encountered:

Form of Chemicals (Solids, Liquid, Dust, Mist Fume):

Describe Radiological Materials (if any):

Volume or Quantity Released:

Description of Accident:

(continued on next page)


INCIDENT/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT (continued)

Contributing Factors: What Corrective Actions Were Taken to Secure the Scene?

Corrective Actions Being Taken to Prevent Recurrence: List Responsible Person & Target Date for Implementation

Action Item: Name: Date: Job being performed at time of incident/accident: Was permit required for task being performed? Yes/No If so, was permit issued? Yes/No If yes, attach a copy of permit in effect at time of accident. Indirect cause of accident:

Investigation Team Members: Injured/Involved: Name Signature Supervisor: Name Signature Ameren SPOC Name Signature ES&H Representative Name Signature Name (Others) Title Signature Name (Others) Title Signature Contractor Representative(s) Contacted: Ameren Representative(s) Contacted: *Attach additional sheets and supplemental data & information as necessary. **Distribution: Original must be filed on-site; 1 copy must be sent promptly to the Corporate ES&H Dept. Must Notify: CCMI and Huntleigh McGehee


ATTACHMENT A2

WITNESS STATEMENT

Name: Title: Social Security Number: Date: Time: Temporary Address: Phone: Permanent Address: Phone: Location at Time of Accident: Describe to the best of your knowledge, what happened just before, during and just after the accident:

Signature


ATTACHMENT A3

FIRST AID REGISTER

Company: Project Name /Number: Jobsite Location:

Month /Year: Site Manager: Page: of

Date Time Name Supervisor/Foreman Type of Injury, Body Part, and Brief Description of Accident *Class

*Class = Classification FAV = First Aid Visit E1= Doctor’s Visit REC – OSHA Recordable Other:


ATTACHMENT A4

BARRICADE TAG


ATTACHMENT A5

CONSTRUCTION WORKER'S PROTECTION ASSURANCE AUTHORIZATION

Date: Operating Supervisor: The following person(s) has authorization to receive W.P.A.: Project Name: Company Name: Company Address: Name Title Office Cell Home E-Mail

Beginning Ending Date Time Date Time Expected Duration: Training is Required for Automated WPA System. Plant Manager or Designee (Designee: Admin. Supt., Operations Supt., Maintenance Supt., Planning/Scheduling, or Operations Supv. {Watch})


ATTACHMENT A6

GRINDER SAFETY PLAN


ATTACHMENT A7

CONTRACTOR REDUCTION IN FORCE REPORT

Contractor Name: Contractor Supervisor: Date Submitted: Time Submitted:

Name of Employee (Please Print) Badge # Date of Reduction

Time of Reduction


ATTACHMENT A8

POWER OPERATIONS HOT WORK CHECKLIST (EXAMPLE)

1. DESCRIPTION – JR#

Location Elevation Work to be done: Welding Brazing Open Flame Cutting / Heating Equipment NOTE: Before authorizing welding, cutting, heating, and brazing, this checklist must be completed. 2. PRE-WORK INSPECTION

Hot Work shall not be performed in the following situations:

a. In areas not authorized by Management. b. In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired, unless authorized by Management. c. In the presence of explosive atmospheres or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside unclean or

improperly prepared tanks, pipes or equipment. d. In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials.

Prior to welding, cutting heating, and brazing (W/C/H/B), you shall perform these basic precautions:

a. Move the object to be W/C/H/B to an area free of hazards. b. If the object to be W/C/H/B cannot readily be moved, then you shall remove all movable fire hazards

within the vicinity to a safe place. c. If the object to be W/C/H/B cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards within 35 feet cannot be removed

(including cable trays), then, immovable fire hazards shall be shielded and a fire watch provided. IF THESE BASIC PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, WELDING, CUTTING HEATING AND BRAZING

SHALL BE PERFORMED. COMPLETE CHECK LIST. 3. ADDITIONAL FIRE WATCH PROVISIONS N/A YES NO

a. Can more than a minor fire develop? b. Are combustible materials closer than 35-ft. to the point of operations? c. Are combustible materials more than 35-ft. but easily ignitable by sparks? d. Do wall or floor openings with a 35-ft. radius expose combustible materials in adjacent areas,

including concealed spaces in walls or floors? e. Are combustible materials adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs

and are they likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation?

NOTE: If you answered yes to any of the above, a fire watch is required. Complete checklist. All of the following conditions must be met, if applicable.



4. PRECAUTIONS N/A YES NO

a. A fire watch will be provided during and for 30 minutes following welding, cutting, heating and brazing. b. The fire watch shall be supplied with a proper portable fire extinguisher in addition to installed operable

plant equipment. c. Cutting and welding equipment is in good condition. d. Combustible materials are protected with covers, guards, or metal shields, or material is removed prior to

start of work. e. Nearby workers are suitably protected against heat, sparks, slag and flash. f. Wall or floor openings are covered or enclosures provided. For elevated work, covers are suspended

beneath to collect sparks or area below is free of combustibles. g. Enclosed equipment is cleaned of all combustible material and purged of flammable vapors. h. Ducts and /or conveyors are suitably protected or shutdown. i. For work near walls, partitions, ceiling or roofs, proper precautions have been taken to prevent ignition of

combustibles inside the barrier of adjacent areas. j. For work on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings, or roofs,

precautions have been taken to prevent ignition by conduction of heat. k. Other

PRE-WORK INSPECTION Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time POST-WORK INSPECTION Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time Supervisors Initials Date Time DEFINITIONS 1. Combustible Material: Any material that, if in the form and under the conditions used, could ignite and burn. 2. Minor Fire: A fire which, if no action is taken to extinguish it, will self-extinguish (burn out), will not propagate

(spread to other materials through the continuity of combustibles), and will not damage any permanent plant equipment.


ATTACHMENT A9

CONTRACTOR ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY & HEALTH DATA FORM

1. ES&H PERFORMANCE HISTORY

A. Interstate or Intrastate Worker’s Compensation Experience Modification Rate (EMR), as shown on Workers Compensation Insurance Policy for three most recent years.

Year EMR *WH/CL

*If self-insured, provide employee Work Hours per Claim. (WH/CL)

THE FOLLOWING DATA FOR LAST THREE (3) YEARS FROM CONTRACTOR’S OSHA LOG

Year

B-1. Employee hours worked

B-2. Fatalities (Column G of OSHA 300 log).

Attach explanation for any fatalities.

B-3. Cases involving days away from work

(Column H of the OSHA 300 Log)

B-4. Job transfer or restricted duty cases (Column J of

OSHA 300 log)

B-5. Cases defined as other recordable cases (Column J

of OSHA 300 Log)

B-6. Total # of cases for B-2, 3, 4 & 5 above.

B-7. “OSHA Incidence Rate” – Formula: Total Recordable Cases x 200,000 Total # of work hours.

B-8. Citations by OSHA and/or other ES&H regulatory

agencies in past 3 years (provide details of each)

C-1. Motor vehicle accidents.

C-2 Miles driven per year, total fleet.



Yes No

2. Do you have a written hazard communication program? Do you have a written ES&H program? Do you have a written company substance abuse program? Do you have a written respiratory protection program?

3. Do you have one or more full time: A. Physicians B. ES&H Professionals C. Industrial Hygienists

4. Do you have a new employee orientation program? I it include the following? A. Company ES&H Policy B. Company ES&H Rules C. ES&H Meeting Attendance D. Company ES&H Record E. Hazard Recognition F. Hazard Reporting G. Injury Reporting H. Personnel Protective Equipment I. Respiratory Protection J. Fire Protection K. Housekeeping L. Toxic Substances M. Electrical Safety N. Safety Harnesses and Lifelines O. First Aid P. Driving Safety Q. Lockout/Tagout R. Ladder/Stairway Safety S. Hearing Conservation T. Trenching and Excavation

5. Do you have a training program for newly hired or promoted first line supervisors?

I it include the following? A. Hazard Recognition B. Safe Work Practices C. ES&H Supervision D. New Employee Orientation E. Tailgate/Toolbox ES&H Meetings F. First Aid Procedures G. Emergency Procedures H. Incident Reporting I. Accident Investigation



6. How often do you hold periodic ES&H meetings for your foremen/supervisors?

A. Weekly C. Bi-Weekly

B. Monthly D. Less Often, As Needed

7. Do you conduct field ES&H inspection of work in progress? Yes No

A. If yes, who conducts the inspection?

B. How often?

Yes No

8. Are accident reports circulated to your management?

9. Is ES&H a (documented ) weighted factor in evaluating the performance of:

A. Foreman

B. Supervisor

C. Management

10. Does your firm hold “Toolbox ES&H Meetings?

How often?

A. Weekly

B. Bi-Weekly

C. Monthly

D. Less Often, As Needed

11. List the most senior staff ES&H professional at your company.

Name: Title: Phone:

12. List the person to contact to discuss the details of the information contained in this document.

Name: Title: Phone:


ATTACHMENT A10

MONTHLY CONTRACTOR ACCIDENT STATISTICS REPORT

Month: Project Name:

Contractor Name: Work hours for the month: Work hours year-to-date: Number of First Aid only cases: Number of injuries & illnesses that received treatment by a physician: Total number of OSHA Recordable injuries & illnesses for the month: Number of restricted duty cases: Number of lost time (days away) cases: Number of motor vehicle accidents: Number of miles driven: Please list injuries and illnesses, which have occurred to employees of your company on the above project this month. Include accident cause, injury/illness suffered and current disposition of injured/ill employee (i.e., returned to work, still off work, awaiting surgery, etc.): Person completing report: Title: Date: Signature: Please submit this report to the SPOC on above project by the second business day of each month, for the preceding month’s work activities.


ATTACHMENT A11

NOTICE OF ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY & HEALTH NON-COMPLIANCE

To: Site Representative for:

Your company has been found to be in non-compliance with one or more Federal, State, or Ameren ES&H requirements as specified below. This ES&H con-compliance must be corrected immediately for your company to meet the requirements of your contract. Item # Item of non-compliance

Applicable ES&H Requirement Applicable ES&H Requirement Applicable ES&H Requirement

Issued By: Signature of the SPOC Date

Received By: Signature of Representative Receiving Notice Date

cc: Superintendent-Construction Management Services

Safety Supervisor Plant Outage Manager


ATTACHMENT A12

WARNING LETTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY & HEALTH NON-COMPLIANCE

Project Name and Number

Your firm, , has been found to be in violation of your contract by

non-compliance with applicable Federal, State, or Ameren ES&H requirements.

On , in accordance with the Ameren ES&H Adherence Policy, your

representative, , was given a Notice of ES&H Non-Compliance (copy attached).

This notice specifies areas where your company does not comply with Federal, State, or Ameren ES&H requirements,

and requests that these items be corrected immediately. If they are not corrected, more stringent measures will be taken

in accordance with Ameren ES&H Adherence Policy.

Thank you for your prompt attention to this matter.

Signature of the SPOC Date

cc: Superintendent-Construction Management Services Safety Supervisor Plant Outage Manager


ATTACHMENT A13

WRITTEN NOTICE OF TEMPORARY JOB SUSPENSION

Your company, , while working on the

project, has been notified of ES&H performance deficiencies in accordance with Ameren’s ES&H Policy. Despite these

written notifications requesting that immediate corrective action be taken to improve your ES&H performance, improvement

has not occurred.

Therefore, in accordance with Action Level Two of the Ameren ES&H Adherence Policy, we are hereby notifying you that

after securing your equipment, job activities on the project named above are to cease. Activities on this project may be

resumed only after your company meets requirements set forth in the Ameren Adherence Policy.

Signature of the SPOC

Time

Date

cc: Superintendent-Construction Management Services Safety Supervisor Plant Outage Manager


ATTACHMENT A14 AUTHORIZATION FOR CONTRACTOR TWO-WAY RADIOS

AUTHORIZATION FOR CONTRACTOR TWO-WAY RADIOS (SAMPLE)

All frequencies must NOT fall between the two ranges of frequencies:

463.5500 to 463.5700 MHz (Plant-Specific)

464.5500 to 464.5700 MHz (Plant-Specific)

• When reporting the frequency, you must include digits four places past the decimal point (e.g., 123.4567).

• If a repeater is being used, you must report both transmit and receive frequencies.

• If no repeater is being used, receive and transmit frequencies will be the same.

• You must submit all frequencies to be used.

CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE Print Name

RADIO MANUFACTURER OR MAKE

HOW MANY CHANNELS BEING USED?

FCC License “Call Sign” e.g. WPUP269

CHANNEL RECEIVE FREQ (MHz) TRANSMIT FREQ (MHz)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Ameren SPOC:

Contractor Rep:

Date:

Date:


ATTACHMENT A15 CONTRACTOR’S SUBSTANCE ABUSE POLICY

Policy No. AUE-POL-000001, Rev. 0

Owner Sponsor Approval Safety Supervisor Manager Gen Cons & Outage Mgmt VP Power Operations Signature on File Signature on File Signature on File

12-17-2007 12-17-2007 12-17-2007 1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 In an effort to provide a drug- and alcohol-free workplace, Ameren establishes the following policy for Contractors:

2.0 SCOPE

2.1 Working on an Ameren work site and being under the influence of drugs or alcohol creates safety risks for all personnel who work on our work sites.

2.2 The term Contractor refers to all non-Ameren personnel hired to perform a service for Ameren who will be on Ameren property and includes all Contractors, their subcontractors and all other non-Ameren persons who are employed by them with active badges for site access. Visitors and delivery drivers are excluded from these requirements.

2.3 This Policy supersedes GP-06-01, Contractor Substance Abuse Policy.

3.0 IMPLEMENTATION

3.1 Contractors shall establish and maintain a confidential drug and alcohol testing program for each of their employees assigned to work on Ameren property, which shall meet the following minimum requirements.

3.1.1 All employees of a Contractor who are assigned to an Ameren site shall be subject to Contractor’s drug and alcohol testing program. Contractor's program shall prohibit employees from buying, selling, consuming, or distributing alcohol or drugs while working for Ameren or while on Ameren property. The program shall also prohibit Contractor employees from reporting to an Ameren site or being on Ameren property while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

3.1.1.1 Contractor's program shall provide for drug testing for substances listed in Section 3.1.4 of this Policy under the following circumstances: pre-assignment testing; random testing; testing for reasonable cause based on observations by Ameren or Contractor supervisor; and testing after any accident or incident that involves injury to personnel or damage to property.

3.1.2 Contractor shall require pre-assignment drug testing, or will assure that each person who will be assigned to an Ameren location has been tested for drug use within the 120-day period immediately prior to the start of work on Ameren premises. Contractor shall provide written documentation from the testing authority to Ameren Construction Project Lead or Plant Station Point of Contact that its employees are either compliant or non-compliant with this Policy. Contractor employees, who are not in compliance with this Policy, will be subject to Section 3.1.6 of this Policy. To maintain confidentiality, Ameren will not accept actual test results. A previous random drug test or drug test conducted for another reason is sufficient to satisfy the pre-assignment testing requirement if test was conducted during the 120-day period prior to working on Ameren premises, and otherwise satisfies the drug testing requirement in Section 3.1.4 of this Policy. Contractor employees who have taken a pre-assignment drug test will be allowed to work pending test results for no more than 5 working days. Testing may be waived pending Ameren management approval for Contractor employees who are working less than 40 hours annually providing site labor.

3.1.2.1 In lieu of pre-assignment testing, Contractor may accept a certificate signed by Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), Substance Abuse Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA) DHHS/SAMHSA-certified drug testing laboratory indicating the results of drug test performed within the 120-day period immediately prior to working on Ameren premises. Identification cards, which indicate employee’s name and date of his/her most recent drug test, may also be accepted if they are traceable to the certification from the DHHS/SAMHSA -certified drug-testing laboratory, which performed the test, and are attested to by Contractor management.

3.1.3 Contractor shall provide site specific random substance abuse testing for each of its employees and its subcontractors' employees assigned to be on Ameren premises. The random testing shall be conducted at a frequency such that a minimum of one test is performed for hours up to the first 2,000


man-hours worked and one additional test for every 2,000 man-hours worked by Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, on Ameren premises. Contractor shall establish a random selection process to ensure that each individual will have an equal chance of being selected and tested each time a random test is scheduled. The random testing pool will include all crafts under the direction of the prime Contractor, including subcontractors. Employees selected for random testing shall not be informed of test until immediately prior to test and shall be accompanied to testing site by a responsible Contractor supervisor as soon as practical on the same day selected. Contractor shall notify Construction Project Lead or Plant Station Point of Contact of random selection results and an Ameren representative may exercise the option of being present during the selection process.

3.1.4 Samples used to comply with this policy shall be analyzed by a NIDA-certified laboratory or quick cup and/or instant cup method. Tests must screen at a minimum for the following substances and levels, however some labor consortium testing programs will be accepted for initial site access only pending Ameren approval. A confirmed positive drug testing will be considered a violation of this policy.

Substance Initial Level Confirmed Level Amphetamines 500 ng/ml 250 ng/ml Barbiturates 300 ng/ml 200 ng/ml Benzodiazepines 300 ng/ml 200 ng/ml Cocaine 150 ng/ml 100 ng/ml Marijuana 50 ng/ml 15 ng/ml Methadone 300 ng/ml 200 ng/ml Opiates 300 ng/ml 150 ng/ml Oxycodone 100 ng/ml 100 ng/ml Propoxyphene 300 ng/ml 200 ng/ml Methamphetamine 500mg/dl 250mg/dl

3.1.5 Contractor's program shall provide for alcohol testing under the following circumstances: random

testing; testing for reasonable cause based on observations by Ameren or Contractor supervisor; and testing after any accident or incident that involves injury to personnel or damage to property. Pre-assignment alcohol testing shall not be required. A test result of .04% blood alcohol concentration or greater as indicated by a breathalyzer or similar test will be considered a violation of this Policy.

3.1.6 Individuals who fail a test, refuse to test or otherwise violate this Policy will be denied site access from all Ameren premises. In addition, Contractor shall notify the applicable consortium to remove employee from the active pool. A Contractor employee who is determined to have violated this policy will be denied site access for a period of one year. After a period of one year, if the individual can demonstrate successful completion of a required treatment program based on Contractor's consortium policy, the individual will be given a last-chance opportunity. However, site access will not be permitted unless the individual has a satisfactory return-to-duty drug test. If at any time an individual is found to have a second violation of this Policy, the individual will be permanently denied site access to all Ameren premises. Contractor shall document all non-compliance on a reduction force report and forward the report to Construction Project Lead or Plant Station Point of Contact. The reduction force report shall include the person’s name, craft and reason stated “Non-Compliance with Ameren Substance Abuse Policy.”

3.1.7 Contractors shall require all of their subcontractors to comply with all provisions of this Substance Abuse Policy. Failure of Contractor or any of its subcontractors to comply with the requirements of this Policy shall be grounds for removal from consideration for any future work and/or termination of the current contract at the discretion of Ameren. Ameren reserves the right to audit Contractor’s drug and alcohol testing program at any time to verify compliance with this policy.

3.1.8 Ameren will not be responsible for any expense or loss of wages due to non-compliance with this Policy.

3.1.9 Ameren retains the right to change or modify this Policy at any time. Ameren also retains the right to waive this Policy for any Contractor that is badged as a visitor.

3.1.10 Any documents relating to this Policy will be maintained in confidence and will not be released without written authorization unless otherwise required by law.


ATTACHMENT A16

DATE: CRANE:

JOB NUMBER/ LOCATION:

TASK:

Has a Total Hazard Analysis (THA) been completed today? YES NO

Comments:

Is access to work area established? YES NO

Comments:

Is all safety equipment on hand and functioning properly? YES NO

Comments:

Have lines of communication between operator and affected employee(s) been established (visual &/or verbal)?

Comments:

When servicing the crane (including crane lubrication), the operator must lower all loads to the ground, and move

all controls to OFF. The engine MUST be stopped before the crane is serviced. The operator is to attach a WARNING sign to the engine start control to warn personnel that crane is being serviced and must not be started.

Comments:

Do not operate crane until all safety guards and covers are securely reinstalled and all maintenance equipment is

removed.

Comments:

Before operator enters cab of crane, the affected employee(s) must be at a minimum safe distance of two feet

from any moving parts.

Comments:

Additional Comments:

CREW SIGNATURES:

CRANE OPERATOR SAFETY CHECKLIST


ATTACHMENT A17 CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT OF UNDERSTANDING

(Form CONMGT0)

All Contractors and Subcontractors will be required to sign and submit this form prior to entering and/or starting work on any Ameren property. • I have been informed of all expectations regarding Ameren Safety / Work rules and ZERO TOLERANCE policies

and will immediately investigate and enforce all such rule and policy violations when they are reported or observed.

• I will cooperate to the fullest extent with any Ameren management or security person in investigating ZERO TOLERANCE policy violations.

• I am aware that Ameren plants contain asbestos, lead and flyash. Where necessary, I will abide by all Ameren, OSHA, State and Local policies, procedures and ordinances in all abatement, containment, waste-disposal, employee protection and reporting activities.

• I will obtain and promptly submit all of the required permits to the Ameren-designated Station Point of Contact (SPOC) prior to starting work.

• I will promptly forward all of the required submittals to the Ameren SPOC.

• I will not allow any employee to enter and / or start work on Ameren property before first conducting a Safety / Work Rules orientation and ensuring they have all required personal protective equipment.

• I will report all violations / actions taken to the Ameren SPOC, on form CONMGT1, each Friday before 9:00 AM.

• I will inform the Ameren SPOC of any sub-contractors in my employ and ensure that they are aware of and meet the conditions of this agreement before they enter and / or start work on Ameren property and will have them complete this Contractor Agreement of Understanding Form.

• Any employee found to have violated a ZERO TOLERANCE policy may be removed and barred immediately from Ameren property and will not be allowed to return to any Ameren property in the future.

• I understand that repeated violation of the Work / Safety rules or ZERO TOLERANCE policies may result in my company’s removal from Ameren property.

Contractor Company (Print)

Contractor Representative (Print) Representative’s Signature Date


ATTACHMENT A18 HOUSEKEEPING SCORECARD

PROJECT NAME: CONTRACTOR NAME: DATE:

HOUSEKEEPING SCORECARD

CATEGORY RATING

COMMENTS POOR EXCELLENT

General Cleanup 1 2 3 4 5

Cords & Hoses

(are out of the way) 1 2 3 4 5

Barricades & Caution Tape

(used & taken down appropriately) 1 2 3 4 5

Other

(e.g., material stored/staged appropriately, no tools on running equipment, no hazardous conditions, etc.)

1 2 3 4 5

Total Housekeeping Score:

Total Points (Total Housekeeping Score x 4) :


ATTACHMENT A19 SAFETY SCORECARD

SAFETY SCORECARD Notwithstanding the provisions below, a “work-related fatality” will result in maximum KPI reduction to the contractor regardless of any other safety criteria.

KPI payment will be based on criteria that are equally weighted as follows:

Section 1 OSHA recordable rate 33⅓ %

Section 2 “Rules to Live By” infraction 33⅓ %

Section 3 Safety observation program 33⅓ %

SECTION 1 OSHA RECORDABLES

OSHA rate is calculated by the following:

2 or more = 0%

less than 2 = 100% of Section 1

Note: Review based on specific job criteria (i.e., duration of project). Ameren POS safety supervisor has final call on OSHA recordable determination.

SECTION 2 "RULES TO LIVE BY" OBSERVATIONS

1 or more = $2,000 penalized assessment per Appendix A

less than 1 = (add) Note: Observations that are self-reported by contractor do not apply to this. Only observations by Owner or Owner's representative apply.

SECTION 3 COMPLETED CARDS

An agreed-upon safety observation card program will be developed as part of site safety process. Observations are based on number of fully completed, meaningful cards generated by contractor’s employees and submitted to Ameren designated representative. These observation cards may show positive coaching as well as corrective coaching. Observation cards completed by Ameren will not be utilized KPI of this section.

< 70 cards = (deduction)

70 - 90 cards = $0

> 90 cards = (add)


ATTACHMENT A20 GUIDELINE FOR ABANDONING PIPING AND DEMOLISHING ABANDONED PIPING

1.0 GENERAL GUIDELINE FOR PROPERLY ABANDONING AND/OR DEMOLISHING PIPING

The division of responsibility for the following actions to be decided at assignment of work:

1.1 A Competent Person shall pre-plan the job prior to the start of the work.

1.2 Determine pipe to be abandoned or demolished. Review P&ID’s and piping isometrics to determine isolation points and material conveyed in piping.

1.3 If a JR is not already in EMPRV, Ameren Single Point of Contact (SPOC) shall create a JR in EMPRV.

1.4 Review WPA requirements with the Responsible Engineer listed on the JR. Ensure proper WPA is in place to isolate lines.

1.5 Conduct a pre-job briefing to discuss site specific safety plan and the following:

1.5.1 PPE required

• Chemical Protection

• Eye & Face Protection

• Foot Protection

• Hand Protection

• Head Protection

• Hearing Protection

• Respiratory Protection

1.5.2 Atmospheric conditions if working in enclosed spaces

1.5.3 WPA

1.6 Ensure proper WPA is in place to isolate lines. As part of WPA, drain lines and confirm all low spots have been drained.

1.7 Take special precautions to ensure environmental spills do not occur.

1.8 At extreme ends of pipe, remove at least a one foot section of pipe from equipment or process piping still in use to ensure complete isolation. Cap ends of process piping that will remain in service.

1.9 For piping that will be abandoned in place, permanently tag abandoned pipe in at least three locations (Steel or Brass tag wired to pipe). Tag shall indicate pipe to be “Abandoned in Place,” applicable JR number, and material pipe conveyed.

1.10 For piping to be demolished, remove piping and dispose of properly.

1.11 Update P&ID’s and piping isometrics as applicable.

END OF APPENDIX A

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. B - 1

APPENDIX B – JOB WORKING RULES AND CONTRACT WORK LIMITATIONS CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS - POWER PLANTS

1.0 JOB WORKING RULES

1.1 Contractor must enforce the Ameren Job Working Rules, included in this specification here as Appendix B, as well as the Contractor’s own work rules. If the rules conflict, the more restrictive rule applies.

2.0 PLANT ACCESS, PARKING AND SECURITY

2.1 Contractor employees must enter the plant only at the entrance where their company name is posted. Security cameras monitor entrances to inform supervisors of violations.

2.2 The speed limit is 10-MPH unless otherwise posted.

2.3 Contractor personnel may not ride in the back of a truck on company property or to/from/between job sites unless properly seated with a seat belt.

2.4 Contractor employee vehicles must park in Construction Parking lot or in areas designated for Contractor use.

2.5 Contractor employees must enter and leave through the designated Construction gate.

2.6 Contractor employees must check in and out of project with their immediate Foreman or General Foreman.

2.7 Security will issue an identification badge to Contractor employees after site orientation training. Badges must be visible at all times while on the site.

2.8 If the site has an electronic badge reader, a green LED light indicates that arrival/departure times have been recorded and the gate is unlocked.

2.8.1 If a badge reader is not available, employees must sign the gate register when arriving or departing.

2.9 Lunch boxes, toolboxes, coolers and other containers are subject to inspection when entering or leaving Ameren premises.

2.10 An Ameren Material Pass (Form 5532NS) signed by the Ameren Station Point of Contact (SPOC) and a Contractor supervisor must be presented to Security when tools or materials are taken off site.

2.11 The Security Guards can:

• De-activate / activate a badge when changing plant locations

• Replace a damaged badge or lost badge

• Update the employee name, Contractor company, or craft. 2.12 Cameras and video recording devices are prohibited unless specifically authorized by Ameren management.

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 The more restrictive rule will govern in the event of any conflict between Ameren and Contractor work rules.

3.2 All Contractor/Subcontractor employees must not leave their work areas during assigned work periods. Any reasonable break periods will be established by the Contractor/Subcontractor.

3.3 Only drink water from drinking fountains or lavatories, other outlets may contain river water.

3.4 Certain plant locations, including cafeterias, locker rooms, and washrooms, may be posted as OFF LIMITS to construction or Contractor personnel.

3.5 Written permission is required before using Ameren equipment or tools, except for public pay phones.


3.6 Radios or “boom boxes” are not allowed because they can disrupt communication and distract workers.

3.7 Ameren's Smoking Policy In keeping with Ameren's corporate values, Ameren strives to provide a work environment that promotes productivity and ensures the safety and well-being of all employees. Smoking presents known health risks to smokers and non-smokers alike. This policy applies to cigarette, pipe, and cigar smoke, as well as e-cigarettes.

3.7.1 Persons Affected This policy applies to all Ameren employees, vendors, contractors, and visitors at any Ameren facility.

3.7.2 Policy All Companies: Smoking is prohibited in all Ameren buildings, any posted areas where hazards may exist, and within a reasonable distance of all entrances, exits, windows that open, and ventilation intakes that serve an enclosed area, except as required by law. All state and local laws or ordinances regarding smoking must be obeyed. Smoking is permitted in a Company vehicle only with the consent of all occupants.

3.7.3 Enforcement Violators of this policy will be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment.

3.8 Daily cleanup of the work area is required. Ameren reserves the right to clean up Contractor's area if Contractor is not fulfilling their housekeeping requirements. Any and all costs associated with the cleanup will be deducted from Contractor's base contract.

4.0 EVACUATION

4.1 If there is an emergency, an evacuation announcement may be made over the plant’s public address system. The evacuation assembly area should be communicated during orientation training.

4.2 In the event of severe weather, an announcement to seek shelter may be made over the public address system. The location of the plant tornado shelter should be communicated during orientation training.

4.3 To report an emergency, contact the Shift Supervisor immediately using the plant’s public address system. Do not hang up. Wait for instructions.

5.0 WORKER’S PROTECTION ASSURANCE OR HOLD CARD PROCEDURE

WARNING: Violation of Workers Protection Assurance (WPA) procedures can cause serious equipment damage, personal injury or death.

When WPA is present, verify that equipment is actually de-energized or in the designated state. Always walk down the job, check voltages, temperatures, pressures, etc. to confirm status.

5.1 WPA is Ameren’s procedure to tag equipment or systems that have been de-energized or put in a specified state, to allow for service or testing. The energy in a system may be electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, chemical, kinetic or nuclear.

5.2 All employees should receive site-specific WPA training including descriptions of the tags and their functions. Workers must sign on and off WPA protection as directed by their supervisor.

5.3 Contractor/Subcontractor employees shall observe all WPA rules and comply with WPA tags at all times. Never use an elevator that has a WPA card on the call button.

6.0 SUBSTANCE ABUSE

ATTENTION: Employees who refuse to take a drug test or have been found to be non-compliant will be escorted off-site immediately and may be subject to permanent barring from Ameren facilities.


6.1 Possession, and/or use of alcohol or drugs, is STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

6.1.1 Drugs, stimulants, “pep pills,” tranquilizers, and similar substances are allowed only if prescribed by a doctor.

6.2 Ameren’s Contractor’s Substance Abuse Policy requires pre-employment and random drug testing of Contractor employees.

7.0 HARASSMENT AND WORKPLACE VIOLENCE POLICIES

7.1 Ameren Corporation has a zero-tolerance policy for behavior that is prohibited under Ameren’s EEO & Anti-Harassment Policy and Ameren’s Workplace Violence Policy Statement. These policies apply to Ameren employees and Contractor/Subcontractor employees.

7.2 Ameren intends that employees, contractors, customers, vendors, and visitors, never feel threatened, intimidated, harassed, offended or demeaned by any individual’s actions, presence, conduct, or communication while they are on Ameren property.

7.3 The following behaviors and actions are STRICTLY PROHIBITED anywhere on Company property and may result in permanent barring from all Ameren facilities:

• Willful violation of safety rules or safe working practices

• Possession of unauthorized firearms, weapons or explosives and/or materials/components that could be used to make explosive devices

• Damaging, mutilating, or willful abuse of supplies, equipment & tools, vandalism of company property, or property of others

• Gambling or stealing

• Urinating in an undesignated area

• Harassment by anyone and in any form

o Harassment includes, but is not limited to, unwelcome or unsolicited conduct or hostility based on or directed at a person or group because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, ethnicity, age, disability, veteran status, pregnancy, marital status, sexual orientation or any other protected factor.

o Conduct that may be considered offensive, hostile, demeaning, or derogatory, regardless of whether it is physical, verbal, or graphic in nature and whether it is done in person, or delivered via phone, fax, e-mail, text message, over a PA system, company mail, or by any other means.

o Examples of Prohibited Physical Conduct:

→ Bullying, wrestling, fighting, horseplay, or spitting on an individual,

→ Sexual conduct such as rape, sexual battery, molestation, stalking, or attempts to commit such assaults, unwelcome touching, hugging, massaging, etc.

o Examples of Prohibited Verbal Conduct:

→ Threatening/intimidating someone (both explicit and implied),

→ Verbal abuse, jokes, derogatory comments, references, or derogatory slurs of a sexual, racial, ethnic, or religious nature.

o Examples of Prohibited Non-Verbal Conduct:

→ Wearing of offensive clothing, hats, patches, etc.

→ Displaying stickers, drawings, or posters that depict nooses, confederate “Rebel” flags, KKK paraphernalia, swastikas, or magazines, books, pictures or videotapes with sexual content.


→ Drawing/displaying graffiti, specifically graffiti that is sexual, racial, or otherwise offensive, hostile, demeaning or derogatory to any individual/group or known to incite anger/violence.

→ Using gestures that are obscene, or known to incite anger/violence.

7.4 Other behaviors and actions, not specifically set forth in this list, may violate Ameren zero tolerance policies.

8.0 WORKPLACE HAZARDS

8.1 Work near coal dust, fly ash, lime, or ferric/lead paint removal projects can create airborne contaminates. Do not use compressed air to clean surfaces or clothing. Use properly equipped vacuum, wet methods or other approved methods for cleaning.

8.2 All plants have asbestos-containing insulation and building materials (ACM). Treat all suspect materials as if they are asbestos.

8.3 Asbestos abatement projects may be in progress. Barricades will restrict access to areas with abatement projects. Only trained personnel using Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) may handle asbestos.

8.4 Personnel who are medically required to use syringes should take them home, properly packaged for disposal. Only trained employees using PPE should handle items contaminated with blood or other body fluids. Report any bloodborne related issues to the SPOC.

9.0 FOREIGN MATERIAL EXCLUSION (FME)

9.1 Foreign Material Exclusion protects critical plant components and systems, from contamination or damage. Systems such as feed water, condensate, steam, oil, and electrical controls and motors may suffer significant damage from foreign materials. See Foreign Material Exclusion Requirements (Appendix X) for additional requirements and details.

9.2 Foreign material contamination can come from sources such as:

• Welding and gas cutting debris,

• Metal chips, shavings and filings,

• Corrosion that produces flakes of metallic substances,

• Cleaning materials, such as shot from blasting, rags & lint,

• Forgotten tools or any material that falls out of worker’s pockets,

• Water leaks/spills, cutting fluids, solvents, etc.

9.3 To prevent damage from foreign objects follow these work practices:

• Clean dirt, oil and fly ash from around covers, caps and other devices before opening.

• Remove welding electrodes, stubs and broken flux coating material from internal work areas in closed systems.

• Cover openings on turbines, generators, pumps, pipes, tubes, electrical cabinets/motors and other critical components during maintenance activities.

• Track tools, parts and materials allowed in an FME work area.

• Allow only materials necessary for the task into the work area; do not allow personal items such as jewelry or change.

• Secure all tools, safety glasses, badges, gloves and other loose items with lanyards, tape or other means.

• Catch clippings from cable ties, stripped wires, etc.

• Vacuum or wipe out electrical cabinets after repairs/modifications to remove moisture, metal chips, knockouts, clippings, etc.


I, the undersigned, have read the Job Working Rules. I have completed site orientation training and I understand:

• The Job Working Rules

• Site-specific instructions, including Worker's Protection Assurance procedures

• Safety requirements

I acknowledge that a violation of any of these provisions will be grounds for immediate removal from Ameren property and I may be subject to permanent barring from all Ameren facilities.

Date

Employee Name (Print)

Employee Signature

Contractor

END OF APPENDIX B

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. C - 1

APPENDIX C DESIGN FOR SAFETY GUIDE

OBJECTIVE

Develop and maintain design guidelines to ensure engineering designs reduce safety risks for construction, operations, and maintenance of equipment and facilities.

These Guidelines reflect Ameren’s commitment to incorporate safety into all designs. The designer of record is ultimately responsible for adherence to all governing Federal, State, and Local code requirements.

While attempts will be made to follow the recommendations in this guideline during the engineering phase there will be occasions where conditions and physical constraints may render some recommendations impractical or unattainable.

Several of the Design for Safety recommendations are subjective and can vary from plant to plant (i.e. serviceable access for equipment, pipe labeling, & color coding). Ameren Engineering and contracted consultants must engage plant stakeholders during the design phase to accommodate plant specific safety and operating requirements.

GENERAL FACILITY SAFETY DESIGN

YES NO N/A

General Arrangement layouts shall provide for adequate serviceable access for operation, maintenance, and replacement; i.e. personnel access, tool access, cart access, vertical lift access, fork truck access.

Stairs shall not be used as access platforms. No valves, controls, equipment, etc., shall be positioned / designed to be accessed by personnel standing on stairs.

Permanent, well identified and load rated fall protection tie-offs, should be incorporated into the building structure at removable handrails and access hatchways.

Self-closing swing gates are to be used instead of chains and clips at all personnel access openings for fall protection guarding where the elevated surface is used as a work platform or walkway.

Non-slip “Mebac” ladder rung covers should be used on all fixed access ladders.


YES NO N/A

All new handrails shall be fabricated utilizing 1 ½“ diameter standard pipe rails and posts. Posts shall be spaced a maximum 6’-0 on centers. Rails shall include one (1) top rail (top of top rail shall be 42 inches above walking surface); two (2) mid rails equally spaced to provide increased fall protection; and a standard 4” high toeboard.

OSHA required clearance to handrails on stairs (3”) must be maintained. Structural bracing, electric conduit, or mechanical piping is not located within the required clearance space.

No more than a 3” open gap is maintained between a walking surface and the side of a piece of equipment penetrating the walking surface.

When practical, valves should be located to allow for ergonomically correct operation.

When practical, provide stairs rather than ladders to equipment, valves, etc. that requires routine access for operations and/or maintenance.

Provide chain wheel operators for valves that cannot be accessed from a permanently installed ladder or platform.

When possible, design stairs with lower angle of stairway rise (6½” R, 11” T). Stair landings are provided every 10 to 12 treads.

When possible, no low mounted equipment, piping, ducting, conduit, etc. in travels paths. No “duck-unders”. Use a minimum design head clearance of 7’-0”.


YES NO N/A

All 90 degree corners of structural steel members and plate trimmed / clipped where close to personnel access areas.

Maintenance and replacement access considered when locating lighting fixtures (especially on stairways, over tops of equipment and high overhead locations).

Underground utilities should be designed and installed with warning and location indicators for future excavations in the areas of buried utilities.

Underground utilities should be designed and installed at shallowest depth possible (while maintaining freeze protection and surface surcharge loads) to minimize deep trenching hazards.

Thermal protection guarding incorporated into design where required.

Utilize above ground liquid containments or rigid structural underground containment. Avoid below grade lined pits.

Incorporate seismic shut-off valves for gas service lines entering buildings and at meter locations. (Application mostly at non-power plant, off-site buildings / facilities).

Walkways shall be clear of protruding obstructions and bump hazards. No valves, valve stems, valve handles, controls, equipment, etc. should be positioned / designed within the normal walking path within personnel walkways. If not possible, paint or otherwise safeguard.


YES NO N/A

Utilize yellow warning striping along edges of personnel walkways to guide / warn walking personnel of potential obstructions, ramps, bump hazards, grade / slope changes.

Provide personnel access to all roofs for inspection and maintenance purposes.

Provide permanent fall protection tie-offs that are well identified, load rated, and incorporated into the building structure on roofs where there are no parapets or guard railing. (Review the need for fall protection tie-offs on specific roof areas on a case-by-case basis).

To eliminate the need for fall protection tie-offs, when practical building roof parapets should be designed high enough to meet OSHA fall protection guarding requirements.

Where possible, roof mounted equipment shall not be designed and installed closer than 15’ to open, unguarded edge of roof.

Provide fall protection guarding at edge of roof (without parapet) where roof mounted equipment is installed closer than 15’ to open edge of roof.

Provide fall protection guarding on both sides of a fixed roof access ladder onto roofs with no parapet or guard railing.

Provide fall protection guarding or tie-off point at all personnel access roof hatches.


YES NO N/A

Provide fall protection guarding at roof mounted sky lights (many commercial skylights are available with security grills that will act as fall protection guarding).

Design roof mounted equipment, ducting, and piping with adequate clearance for roof maintenance and replacement. Design clearances shall meet the NRCA recommendations for equipment to roof clearances.

Provide service power for roof mounted equipment.

Eliminate tripping hazards on roofs / floors. No low to roof / floor mounted electric conduits and drain pipes.

Utilize safety balls on lightning protection air terminals. Eliminate impalement hazard of pointed air terminals on roofs.

“Roof slippery when wet” signs shall be installed at all personnel access points onto roofs.

Provide lighting on roofs in areas of personnel access for maintenance of equipment.

Design mechanical / electrical equipment and components to be water tight for wash down cleaning.


YES NO N/A

Provide the proper quantity and type of fire extinguishers and hose stations.

Provide proper washdown facilities (hose reels, supply pipes, drains) to allow facility cleaning.

Assure proper safety signage is in place (chemicals, hearing protection, etc.).

Assure roof drains are not placed where water will freeze and become a slipping hazard.

Provide ice dams on sloped roofs above doorways and walkways to prevent and/or break up sliding ice.

COMMENTS TO GENERAL FACILITY SAFETY DESIGN:


ELECTRICAL SAFETY DESIGN

YES NO N/A

Walk down conduit and cable tray routes before installation to identify hazards such as tripping, head, thermal, chemical, etc.

The location, cable tray material, and conduit shall be designed for the identified hazards for that specific location.

Place electrical equipment in accessible locations.

Electrical Room Egress: Provide at least two exit paths even if Code allows one exit for “un-occupied space”. These spaces frequently become temporary Control Centers during construction, commissioning, and start-up.

Cabinet/enclosures shall be designed to allow sufficient space for maintenance if maintenance to be performed inside the cabinet/enclosure.

Provide sufficient space to allow for cabinet / enclosure access doors to fully open.

Provide sufficient space for electrical equipment as defined by NEC in walkways, area between cabinets, etc. for forklifts, routine maintenance, etc.

All control switches should be accessible from outside of the cabinet.


YES NO N/A

Provide the manufacturer’s recommended spacing for equipment cooling.

Obtain arc flash incident energy level and labels for any equipment rated 480V and higher or greater than 125KVA at 120VAC & above per NFPA 70E.

Consider extra guarding of high voltages (Plexiglas) in electrical cabinets to reduce PPE requirements.

Switchgear shall be specified to provide “Lock Out” capability.

Equipment shall be designed for the ratings for which it will be subject to (i.e., maximum voltage, short circuit current, continuous current, ambient temperature, etc.).

Equipment, cable, conduit, tray, etc. shall be labeled with the voltage level.

Equipment shall be labeled with normal power feed and backup power feed (if applicable).

Consider backup power feed for systems where failure of normal power feed would result in a hazardous event.


YES NO N/A

Label all equipment with appropriate equipment description (if applicable).

When possible, critical conduits shall be installed in a duct bank rather than direct buried.

Control cabinets and wiring termination cabinets should be accessible from platforms or at grade level. Ladders should be avoided.

Provide fall protection tie-off points at tops of transformers.

COMMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SAFETY DESIGN:


MECHANICAL SAFETY DESIGN

YES NO N/A

Walking or climbing surfaces are sheltered or maintained in a manner to avoid slippery surfaces from rain or ice. (Review on a case-by-case basis).

Emergency drainage systems are provided to direct flammable liquid leakage to a safe location.

Provide eye wash stations at locations where liquids are sampled or “open fluids” are otherwise handled.

Stairs, ladders, or ramps are provided at all locations where equipment design or maintenance actions require personnel to abruptly change elevation by more than 12 inches.

Fixed ladders designed with a slope of 75 degrees or more where practical.

Whenever practical, provide adequate access for maintenance personnel to all mechanical components, small-bore piping, ducts, valves, thermowells, flow meters and other appropriate instrumentation on piping runs and equipment units which require inspecting, testing, servicing, adjusting, greasing, removal, replacement, or repair.

When practical, locate instruments, sample points, valves, etc. that require frequent readings, calibration, operation, etc. to allow for walk-up access.


YES NO N/A

Specify equipment to include handling features that will aid in grasping, removing, and carrying equipment.

Labeling and coding is provided for service and adjustment points to clearly identify the key aspects of the maintenance activity.

Equipment and components shall be labeled with weights for lifting and removing for later maintenance or replacement. When modifying existing equipment, determine the weight of the existing equipment plus modifications and label or revise the existing labels accordingly. When possible, the label should include references to the calculation, project, and/or drawing number.

Provide lifting devices (lifting lugs, beams, monorail, etc.) for maintenance and replacement of equipment. Lifting devices shall be labeled with the rated lifting capacity.

Provide Indicators for convenient and reliable determination of fluid levels.

Drain fittings are provided to support fluid removal readily and safely.

Ensure design basis application for failure modes on all positioned equipment. Example, loss of air, loss of DC, etc.

Standardize parts, maintenance and adjustment points as much as possible. For example, use the same size and type of bolts to eliminate special wrenches/tools. Utilize common rigging points to minimize types of rigging connections, etc. If standardization is not possible, clearly differentiate specialized items with signs, markings, etc.


YES NO N/A

Minimize steam hazards, heat hazards, sharp corners, edges, and projections on equipment.

Equipment should be placed on concrete housekeeping pads, especially where standing water might accumulate.

Add equipment protection features to guard against hazards that cannot be removed or designed out of the system.

Specify that equipment vendor technical manuals deal with one specific equipment model rather than with many different equipment models.

Valves shall be provided with “Lock Out” devices.

Provide adequate isolation valving and venting for WPA, maintenance, etc. on piping systems and equipment. Follow applicable code/standard section requirements.

COMMENTS TO MECHANICAL SAFETY DESIGN:


CHEMICAL SAFETY DESIGN

YES NO N/A

Insure that bulk chemical tanks have separate containment areas. Containment areas shall be washable and have the ability to be drained.

All materials used to construct storage tanks, containment, piping, etc. must be verified to be compatible for use with the chemicals used in each specific application.

Lengths of chemical piping runs should be minimized. Chemical supply tanks and pumps should be designed to be as close to injection points as possible. Overhead chemical piping runs should be minimized. When used, labels shall be affixed to the floor beneath the piping with proper hazard communication. Chemical lines must be labeled a minimum of every 10 feet. All PVC/CPVC chemical piping must be protected from foot traffic.

Chemical day tanks shall be properly sized to minimize the number of drums in the work area.

Designate storage areas for each type of chemical, taking into account compatibility of each.

Provide sufficient room for servicing instruments around bulk chemical storage tanks.

Drains to sump shall be located around all chemical feed equipment. Local wash down water must be provided in chemical feed area. Include hose and hose reels for local wash down water.


YES NO N/A

All laboratory areas must contain proper first-aid kit(s).

Material for chemical spill control (pigs, pads, soda ash, etc.) shall be located in a designated area close to chemicals.

Personal protective equipment shall be located in a designated area close to chemicals.

Chemicals shall be transferred to equipment (mixing tanks or day tanks) in a way to minimize chances of contacting personnel and avoid manual dumping of bottles and drums.

Chemical containers must be labeled with chemical names and HAZCOM placards.

All safety showers shall be supplied with tepid water. Safety showers located outside shall also be covered and protected from the wind. Safety shower activation shall signal an alarm in the control room.

All concrete and equipment exposed to chemicals shall be coated with an appropriate chemical-resistant coating.

PA shall be located convenient to all chemical use areas, but beyond the area that could be engulfed by a chemical spill.


YES NO N/A

Operating and Maintenance personnel shall be isolated from all chemical pumps and feed systems by plastic screens or curtains.

COMMENTS TO CHEMICAL SAFETY DESIGN:

END OF APPENDIX C

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. D - 1

APPENDIX D STANDARD CONTRACTOR SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

1.0 AFTER AWARD REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Contractor shall submit a construction schedule after award. The scheduling tool shall be Primavera Enterprise (P6) unless otherwise authorized by Ameren Construction managing supervisor in writing.

1.2 Contractor's bid schedule shall reflect sufficient level of detail that effectively communicates the methodology of work/execution plan. The bid schedule shall be defined in compliance with the milestones in Section 1B-3.0, project constraints and deliverables required by Ameren.

1.3 Contractor shall indicate the calendar of their work schedule (days/week, shifts/day, hours/day) that is the basis for their schedule.

1.4 Contractor shall identify projected manpower required to execute project and shall also provide an assessment of labor availability based on prevailing market conditions.

1.5 Contractor shall identify the hierarchy of their project management team, including an organization chart of how they report to the Project Manager and how they report into the project management system.

1.6 Contractor’s bid shall list any exceptions to the standard schedule requirements.

2.0 PRE-OUTAGE REQUIREMENTS AFTER AWARD – NOT USED

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Contractor progress schedule will provide the following update information:

3.1.1 Activities worked on

3.1.2 Actual durations and resources used

3.1.3 Remaining durations

3.1.4 Percent complete

3.1.5 Expected finish dates

3.2 Contractor shall update/analyze the schedule weekly. The schedule shall provide accurate reflection of progress. Schedule analysis should include risk management strategies to assure that outage milestones are achieved.

3.3 Contractor will supply and develop activities, resources and associated project logic for added EWO work within one day of award of contract. Ameren will update Contractor with EWO work.

3.4 If Contractor progress is not meeting or will not meet the milestones, Ameren will require Contractor to participate in a re-evaluation of remaining work to ensure that milestone dates will be met.

END OF APPENDIX D

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. E - 1

APPENDIX E MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS

CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT PURCHASE ORDER NO. As the responsible party for the firm of ____________________________, I do here state that I have requested, received, read, understand, and will abide by and enforce the guidelines and conditions set forth in the Material Safety Data (MSD) Sheets provided by the product manufacturer for each hazardous chemical product delivered to and/or used in connection with the work specified in _______________________. I further state that I am aware of, understand, and will fully implement the requirements of the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (CFR 29, Part 1910.1200) and other workers' right-to-know laws. I further state that I will maintain copies of the required MSD Sheets for each hazardous chemical in the workplace, including Company’s hazardous materials, listed in this Specification; and will insure that the MSD Sheets are readily accessible during each work shift to employees when they are in their work areas. I further state that the information contained within the MSD sheets has been disseminated to all parties who have a right or need to know; and that all workers and other effected parties have received adequate and appropriate training in the hazards, handling, and use of hazardous chemicals. _____________________________________ ___________________ Contractor's Representative/Title Date _______________________________________ Notary Public Signature & Seal

END OF APPENDIX E

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. H - 1

APPENDIX H FERC AFFILIATE RESTRICTIONS AND STANDARDS OF CONDUCT

POLICY AUE-ADM-5476, REV. 2 Contractor and subcontractors agree to comply with Ameren’s FERC Standards of Conduct per procedure AUE-ADM-5476.

This procedure can be obtained from http://www.ameren.com/BusinessPartners/Suppliers/Pages/VendorForms.aspx.

Contractor/Consultants with access to Transmission Information shall complete the appropriate Ameren training requirements related to the Standards of Conduct as determined by the Ameren manager/supervisor responsible for the consultant. Training on the Standards of Conduct is included in the “FERC Compliance Training” module. Applicable training will be identified by Engineer. No Conduit Rule – The No Conduit rule prohibits all employees, including contractor/consultants, from acting as a conduit to provide Transmission Information to employees that are not otherwise permitted access to that information.

END OF APPENDIX H



http://www.ameren.com/BusinessPartners/Suppliers/Pages/VendorForms.aspx

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. I - 1

APPENDIX I CHEMICAL OF INTEREST REPORTING

Contractor must complete the table below, “Department of Homeland Security Chemicals of Interest to be Brought on Site,” which requires Contractor to list any materials being brought onsite which are identified in Appendix A of the DHS Chemical Facility Anti-Terrorism Standard Chemical (Facility Anti-Terrorism Standards (CFATS), 6 CFR Part 27.) MSDS for all COI must be submitted with Contractor’s bid. During the work, Contractor must inform the SPOC of any additional COI brought onsite or if the maximum amount of any material identified in Sheet I-2 below.

AFFIDAVIT

A. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

I HEREBY AFFIRM THAT:

I am the [title]___________________________________________ and duly authorized representative of

[name of business]___________________________________________________ and that I possess legal authority to

make this Affidavit on behalf of the business for which I am acting.

B. CERTIFICATION OF CORPORATION REGISTRATION

I FURTHER AFFIRM THAT:

1. The business named above is a corporation registered in the state or commonwealth of

_____________________ and is in good standing with said state or commonwealth's Department of Assessments and

Taxation, and that the name and address of its resident agent is:

Name ____________________________________________________ Address ____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________

C. CERTAIN AFFIRMATIONS VALID

I FURTHER AFFIRM THAT:

To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, each of the affirmations, certifications, or

acknowledgments contained in this Chemicals of Interest appendix is true and correct in all respects on the date of this

Affidavit and as fully set forth herein.

I DO SOLEMNLY DECLARE AND AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THAT THE CONTENTS OF THIS AFFIDAVIT ARE TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, INFORMATION, AND BELIEF. Date______________________ By_____________________________________________

(Authorized Representative and Affiant)

http://www.dhs.gov/xlibrary/assets/chemsec_appendixafinalrule.pdf

http://www.dhs.gov/xlibrary/assets/chemsec_appendixafinalrule.pdf

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. I - 2

DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY CHEMICALS OF INTEREST TO BE BROUGHT ON SITE Contractor: __________________________________ Site: ____________________________ Project: _______________________________________

Product/Chemical COI Identified in Product/Chemical (Appendix A, 6 CFR 27)

Maximum Amount of Product On Site at Any Time (pounds) Weight Percent COI in Product

END OF APPENDIX I

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. J - 1

APPENDIX J VENDOR DRAWING TRANSMITTAL / CAD REQUIREMENTS

The purpose of this document is to specify the procedures and method of transmittal of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) electronic files and other design file requirements for drawings generated by vendors/architectural engineering firms working for Ameren Missouri. PROCEDURES FOR TRANSMITTING FILES

A/E-Vendor Originated Drawings: When engineering a project for Ameren Missouri, the Ameren engineer responsible for the project should contact Kim Jones, Drafting Supervisor of Power Operations Services, at 314-957-3394 or [email protected]; to coordinate the transmittal of electronic CAD drawing files for the project. CAD SOFTWARE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Ameren Missouri will provide a workspace to utilize when creating or modifying drawings. This can be obtained by contacting [email protected]. Ameren Missouri utilizes Microstation and DesCartes to create and modify both vector and hybrid CAD drawings. Ameren Missouri requires the following versions of software:

• Vector design files to be Microstation (.dgn) files.

• Raster design files to be in .tif format. Scanned file compression will be in the CCITT Group 4 format. In order to maintain minimal file size, drawings are scanned at as low a dpi as necessary to produce quality scanned drawings. The dpi is determined by the respective vendor firm in a range of 100-400dpi. The scanned files are to be cleaned-up as necessary prior to transmitting to Ameren Missouri.

DELIVERABLES

Vendor will furnish full size, as-built plots of CAD files for all projects. Quantities of copies for project drawings will be determined by the project engineer.

Ameren Missouri maintains an original of drawings in St. Louis, MO. A/E’s and vendors are to furnish Ameren Missouri Power Operations Services with one full size, reproducible, 20# bond plot of all CAD generated drawings in addition to the CAD file. Plots should be transmitted to:

Nancy Underwood Document Control Supervisor Ameren Missouri 3700 S. Lindbergh Blvd. St. Louis, MO 63127

Vendor will enclose all necessary documentation associated with as-built CAD files as applicable (i.e., file names, reference files and any other necessary information). All original drawings sent to vendors, all voided drawings and all manual drawings that have been redrawn are to be returned to Ameren Missouri. Electronic files for all CAD drawings will be delivered to Kim Jones, Drafting Supervisor, by one of the following transmittal methods:

• Ameren approved file transfer protocol site – Citadon or Sharepoint (BPOS)

• CD-ROM Virus protection is paramount with any of the above methods. All corporate procedures will be followed to ensure transmittals will be free of viruses. All files supplied to Ameren Missouri should be compatible in format and file structure as outlined in these requirements. Incompatible or incomplete files will be returned for further refinement before acceptance will be granted. Samples of CAD files in an intermediate state can be submitted for approval of conformance to Ameren Missouri’s drafting standards and is encouraged in the early stages of project development. Seed files are available and recommended to ensure compliance to Ameren Missouri drafting standards.

mailto:[email protected]



RESERVING NUMBERS FOR NEW AMEREN MISSOURI DRAWINGS

Power Operations Services is responsible for reserving numbers for vendors to use for new drawings for construction projects. The drawing class will be necessary to assign new numbers. (see Attachment C) Form GEN-FRM-ADM2105-03, Drawing Number Request, should be completed and submitted to the Ameren Missouri approved File Transfer Site (i.e. Sharepoint, Citadon) One drawing number will be assigned for each class of drawing needed. Sheet numbers will utilized in lieu of additional drawing numbers in the same class up to 999 sheets. RESERVING FOREIGN PRINT DRAWING AND FOREIGN PRINT MANUAL NUMBERS Power Operations Services is responsible for reserving numbers for vendors to use for new foreign print drawings and manuals for construction projects. It will be necessary to request the number of foreign prints by class, drawing or manual. Form GEN-FRM-ADM2105-03, Drawing Number Request, should be completed and submitted to the Ameren Missouri approved File Transfer Site (i.e. Sharepoint, Citadon) FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS

To properly identify files it is necessary to adhere to several rules. Most of the drawing file extensions will be .dgn, .cit or .tif as the CAD system default file extensions. The following special characters should not be used in file names:

• ! * / ( { < > } ) & ? $ # @ ” ’ + [ ] ~ Ameren Drawings Numbers • The CAD file is named the drawing number followed by the sheet number indicated by three characters.

Examples:

o 123456 sh. 1 is indicated as 123456001.dgn

o 123456 sh. 123 is indicated as 123456123.dgn

Foreign Prints Manuals: • The CAD file is to be named the 6 digit foreign print number preceded by FPM Example:

o FPM-123456.pdf

Foreign Prints Drawings: • The CAD file is to be named the 6 digit foreign print number preceded by the FPD and followed by the sheet

number Example:

o FPD-123456001.dgn, and FPD-123456001.cit

DRAWING REQUIREMENTS:

Titling – The title should begin on the second line since the first line of the drawing title is the drawing classification. Abbreviations when necessary should follow the ANSI standard of abbreviations and Acronyms for Use on Drawings and Related Documents.

Fonts – Ameren Missouri uses Microstation Fonts 1, 10 and 30 (Ameren user font) for all CAD drawings. A copy of uefont.rse is included with this procedure document. Font 10 is used for electrical and piping flow diagrams where differentiation is necessary for the letter “I” and the number “1.” See Attachment B, Font Library memo, for more font information. All lettering on new drawings should be a minimum of 1/8" when plotted and weight = 0 when plotted with the following exceptions:

a. Title block lettering is TX = 3/16" and WT = 2

b. Date in drawn by block is TX = 3/32" and WT = 0

c. Date in revision block is TH = 1/8" and WT = 0 Do not use dashes between month, day and year.

d. Drawing number is TX = 3/16" and WT = 2 Working units – Microstation drawings are drawn in real-world full size working units of measurement and are scaled when plotted. Borders are scaled to the appropriate size to ensure proper scale when plotted.


The working unit parameters in the design file settings for files should be:

Design File Settings Menu PHYSICAL DRAWINGS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS UNIT NAMES Master Units (MU) FT IN Sub Units (SU) 12 in 10th RESOLUTION “Per ' 12 10 Pos Units Per " (PU) 1000 1000

Fraction display – stacked (i.e., 1½") Dimension readout – feet and inches ( not metric or in decimal form) Angular Measurement – decimal degrees Line weight – 1, or to match existing drawing for bold lines and good drafting practice Patterning – as specified on each drawing Revision number and date – required in title block area of each drawing. Revisions to existing drawings are numeric and increase by one each revision (i.e., Revision 2 would increase to 3). All new drawings are issued at zero “0”, revision. New drawings when revised increase to “1” for the first revision. For vendors wanting to do multiple revisions to drawings prior to returning to Ameren Missouri, it is acceptable to use an alphanumeric numbering series (i.e., Drawing is sent to vendor at revision “1”. Vendor creates “1A”, “2A” , “3A” revisions and then issues final revision of “2” to Ameren Missouri). Scoping – All revisions to existing drawings will have a revision balloon (scoping) placed around the areas revised. Vendors are to use a stream curve, line code = 7, line weight = 3, level = 63, and color = 7. Reference files – Vendors are requested to supply any reference file that is attached to the set of Microstation drawings to be delivered to Ameren Missouri. The reference files, except for the border files, are to be numbered in the same fashion as the drawings. Vendors using raster reference files are required to save active layer and attach active layers in the IRAS command menu before exiting Microstation. Graphic Scales – All drawings that are drawn to scale should have a graphic scale so that any proportional blow-back from the original can be scaled. All drawings should note the scale in the title block. “NONE” should be indicated if no scale is used. Drawing Levels – Mechanical/Structural drawings. See Attachment D, Ameren Missouri–Power Operations Services Drafting Manual, Drawing Level Scheme for mechanical and structural drawing level schemes. Drawing Levels – Electrical drawings. Electrical drawings shall be drawn on level 5 with the exception of the border. Operating Diagram – See Attachment E Instructions for Operating Diagram Issuance. BORDER FILES/CELL LIBRARIES/SEED FILES:

Electrical borders are found in the file EABORDER.DGN (levels 59-63). Physical drawings shall use the attached level scheme. Physical borders are found in the file SABORDER.DGN. Both EABORDER.DGN and SABORDER.DGN are supplied with this package. Please ensure that all elements in the files are placed between levels 1 and 63 inclusively. Do not place elements, text, cells or any other graphic information on level 0 or any level greater than level 63. It will be necessary to place vendor proprietary information in each CAD file rather than the border file. Reference the borders to the CAD file using the file names supplied with the files (i.e., EABORDER.DGN). CABLE/CONDUIT/EQUIPMENT AND VALVE INFORMATION

Cable schedule, conduit schedule, equipment and valve numbers are in databases. All new cable and conduit information should be entered into Excel or Access data files and submitted to Drawing Control. Please contact Ameren Missouri Drawing Control at [email protected] for equipment and valve numbers and additional questions.



Questions concerning the transmittal of files should be directed to:

Kim Jones, Drafting Supervisor Ameren Missouri 3700 S. Lindbergh Blvd. St. Louis, MO 63127 314-957-3394 [email protected]

ATTACHMENTS A – Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services - Border Size Chart B – Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services - Lettering Convention for Wire/Cable C – Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services - Drawing Class Types D – Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services - Drafting Manual, Drawing Level Scheme (mechanical/structural) E – Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services - Instructions of Operating Diagram Issuance



ATTACHMENT A Ameren Missouri – Power Operations Services

BORDER SIZE CHART

Border (ANSI) Drawing Size Half Size A (A) 8½ x 11 X G (B) 11 x 17 X J 23¼ x 11½ X Z (C) 17 x 22 X O 11½ x 36 X P 11½ x 44 X Y 34½ x 26 17 x 22 X 44 x 26 17 x 22 XX (E) 44 x 34 17 x 22 SY (D) 36 x 24 17 x 22 W (Custom) Up to 36 x 144 X


ATTACHMENT B Ameren Missouri – Power Operations Services

LETTERING CONVENTION FOR WIRE/CABLE

W = White

B = Black

BR = Brown

R = Red

G = Green

BL = Blue

V = Violet

O = Orange

GR = Gray

Y = Yellow

R/B = Red – Black

G/B = Green – Black

BL/B = Blue – Black

BL/R = Blue – Red

BL/G = Blue – Green

O/G = Orange – Green

R/Y = Red – Yellow

R/BR = Red – Brown

Y/B = Yellow – Black

Y/BL = Yellow – Blue

BR/Y = Brown – Yellow

BR/G = Brown – Green

G/Y = Green – Yellow

V/Y = Violet – Yellow

BL/BR = Blue – Brown


ATTACHMENT C Ameren Missouri – Power Operations Services

AMEREN DRAWING CLASS TYPES

1. Building a. Architectural Plan b. Building Services c. Concrete, Brick, Stone and Reinforcing d. General e. Piling, Foundations, Excavation f. Roofing, Flashing g. Stairs, Walkways, Floors, Partitions, Elevators and Grating h. Steel Framing and Details, Column Schedules i. Stress, Clearance Loading Diagrams

2. Conduit; Tray Cable a. Boxes b. General c. Hangers d. Installations, Details & B/M e. Plan f. Schedules

3. Duct a. General b. Installation, Details c. Plans

4. Equipment a. Brush Specifications b. General c. Installation, Details, Assembly, B&M d. Plan and Arrangements

5. Foreign Print a. None

6. Grounding a. General b. Installation, Detail, B and M c. Plans

7. Line Construction a. Configuration Diagrams b. Data Sheets c. Foundations Concrete d. Foundations Steel Frame e. Foundations Steel Tripods f. General g. Grounding h. Guying/Staking i. Insulator and Hardware Details j. Maps k. Phasing Diagrams l. Plan and Profiles m. Steel Poles n. Stress Diagrams o. Tower Lighting and Paining p. Tower Steel Framing and Details

8. Panel


a. General b. Installation, Details and B/M c. Layout – Front or Rear View d. Nameplate Bill of Material

9. Piping a. Control b. Flow Diagrams, Isometrics, Composites, P&ID c. General d. Hangers, Anchors e. Installations – Details – Air f. Installation – Details – Misc. g. Installation – Details – Oil h. Installation – Details – Steam i. Installation - Details – Water j. Plan

10. Property Site a. Engineering Records b. Engineering Data c. Organization Charts d. Forms and General Drawings e. Plats f. Sewers g. Yard Plans h. Grading Levees i. Roadways j. Surveys k. Fences

11. Schematic/Wiring a. General b. One Line and Meter Relay Diagrams c. Panel Wiring Diagrams d. Schematic Diagram – 11KV and above e. Schematic Diagram – 2.3KV to 11KV f. Schematic Diagram - Below 2.3KV g. Schematic and Logic Diagrams h. Wiring Diagram – 11KV and above i. Wiring Diagram – 2.3KV to 11KV j. Wiring Diagram - Below 2.3KV k. Wiring and Interconnection Diagrams

12. Structure a. Assembly and Details b. Concrete, Reinforcing ad Inserts c. General d. Lighting, Yard Lighting, and Piping e. Piling, Excavation f. Plans g. Steel Framing and Details


ATTACHMENT D Ameren Missouri - Power Operations Services

DRAFTING MANUAL, DRAWING LEVEL SCHEME (MECHANICAL/STRUCTURAL)

LEVELS Level Class 01010 Property 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Sewers X Grounding X Cables & Conduit X Fdns Below Grade X Property Lines – Street Survey X Fence X Grading Surfacing Contours X Parking and/or Easement X Common Overall Dim X Drawing Title & Notes X Level Class 030 Building 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Heating Piping 03080 X Motors 03080 X Power & Recep. 03080 X Lighting 03080 X Arch Elevations X Arch Details 03020 03090 X Furniture 03020 X Patterning X Common Overall Dim (Cols) X Overall Dimensions X Dwg Title & Notes X Level Class 030 Building 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Class 05031 Steam Plan X Elev. & Det. X Class 05032 Water Plan X Elev. & Dets X Class 05033 Air Plan X Elev. & Det. X Class 05034 Oil Plant X Elev. & Det. X

Level 41 41 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Class 05030 Misc. Plan X Elev. & Det. X Class 05040 Hangers & Anchors X 05050 P. & I. D. X Spare Spare Spare Spare Common Dimensions

X

Title & Notes X


ATTACHMENT E Ameren Missouri – Power Operations Services

INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING DIAGRAM ISSUANCE

OPERATING DIAGRAMS (Ameren Drawings and Vendor/Foreign Prints): After field installation and drawings are corrected to an “As-Built” condition, the following classifications of drawings are designated as “Operating Diagrams.” CLASS NUMBER 09020 One Line Diagrams (Except Maximum Equipment and Relaying and Metering) (Power Plants, Substations

and Customer Substations). 09030 Schematic Diagrams (Power Plants, Substations, and Customer Substations). 09010 Block Diagrams (All). 09010 Equipment Options Drawings for Load Dispatch System (LDS) The drawings are identified with this “Operating Diagrams Sticker”

OPERATING DIAGRAM Issued by Date

OPERATING DIAGRAMS – PREPARATION FOR ISSUING

1. Revise per field marked prints.

2. Add revision if drawing was changed per Note 1. Revision to read "Changed as installed on

WO ."

3. Remove circles from back of drawing for current work order (WO)/construction revision only. Before removing circles for other WO’s check with Ameren Project Engineer to verify that work has been completed.

END OF APPENDIX J

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. K - 1

APPENDIX K PLANT ACCESS, PARKING & SECURITY

1.0 Plant Access, Parking and Security

1.1 Contractor employees, visitors and vendors must enter the plant only at the entrance where their company name is posted. Security cameras monitor entrances to inform supervisors of violations.

1.2 Security will direct contractor employees to work rules training the first time employees report to the site.

1.3 Employees must document their completion of site specific work rules training before they are allowed unescorted access to the site.

1.3.1 Computer Based Training (CBT) is typically used for work rules orientation and to document training.

1.3.2 Contractor employees must read and sign a hard-copy of the Job Working Rules if an orientation video or oral presentation is used for training.

1.3.3 If alternative training has been used due to a temporary CBT malfunction, then employees must take the CBT training when the system is restored.

1.4 Contractor’s Employee Identification

1.4.1 Ameren Contractor ID badges containing the Contractor employee’s name and Contractor ID number are issued when work rules training is completed.

1.4.2 Security will re-activate an existing badge if the employee has completed the site work rules orientation within the last 12 months.

1.4.3 Security will de-activate badges at the end of each job.

1.4.3.1 The Contractor should inform the Single Point of Contact (SPOC) when employees will complete their work on the site using the Reduction in Force Report (Attachment A7).

1.4.4 Daily gate logs will be used to validate invoices and may be provided to the Contractor upon request. If the plant has electronic badge readers, employee arrival and departure times are automatically recorded.

1.4.5 The Contractor shall provide employees with hard hats of the same color. The hard hats must have the Contractor’s name or company logo on either the sides or the front of the hard hat.

1.4.6 Security will apply labels with the employee’s first and last names to the front and back of each hard hat.

1.4.7 The Contractor may provide a hard hat storage container at the Construction gate. PPE is required to access the site.

1.5 Contractor Access

1.5.1 Business agents, vendor/sales representatives, contractor executives and other contractor visitors should park in the construction parking lot and be escorted on-site.

1.5.2 Consultant badge holders may park in either the construction parking lot or the Ameren employee parking lot visitor space, depending on the purpose of the visit.

1.5.3 A contractor employee who has completed CBT/Work Rules training may escort visitors and ensure Ameren work rules are followed.

1.5.4 Contractor visitors are issued a Visitor’s badge and are required to wear a hard hat and safety glasses.

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. K - 2

1.6 Vehicles Beyond the Security Gate

1.6.1 Only contractor work vehicles with an Ameren mirror tag are permitted beyond the security gate. The Contractor can request a mirror tag for vehicles necessary to complete the Work by submitting an Authorization for Site Vehicle Pass form.

1.6.1.1 Vehicles must have the Contractor name or Logo on each side and must have an insurance certificate verifying $1,000,000.00 minimum liability coverage.

1.6.1.2 Contractor work vehicles, commercial vehicles, or contract carrier vehicles without a mirror tag will be held at the gate until cleared by the SPOC.

1.6.2 Vehicle drivers and all passengers must swipe/sign-in at the construction gate.

1.6.3 Contractor vehicles leaving the plant will be inspected by Security.

1.6.3.1 Tools and materials being removed on Contractor vehicles must have an Ameren Material Pass (Form 5532NS) signed by the SPOC and a Contractor supervisor for Security to retain.

1.7 Use of Plant Facilities

Note: The policies are on Scholar, the Ameren intranet. Go to Employee Center, Corporate Policies, Policies by Topic, Technology.

1.7.1 Contractors who have Ameren computers, phones and fax machines are “Privileged Users” and must comply with the following policies.

• Electronic Mail Policy

• Facsimile Machine Usage Policy

• Information Resources Acceptable Use Policy

• Internet/Intranet Usage Policy

• System Access Control Policy

• Wireless Communication Policy

1.7.2 Work areas must be restored to a condition that is approved by the SPOC.

END OF APPENDIX K

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. L - 1

APPENDIX L INFORMATION ACCESS AND CYBER-SECURITY TERMS & CONDITIONS

These Terms and Conditions (“CyberSecurity Terms”) are issued by Ameren and agreed to by Vendor in connection with Vendor’s access to one or more of the following:

• Ameren Networks including: internal networks and VPN

• Ameren Systems including: system interfaces, critical systems and SCADA or other industrial control systems

• Sensitive Ameren data including: financial, human resources, confidential or highly confidential, or Privacy Data In the event a Statement of Work or other Contract Document states a higher standard than that set forth in these Terms and Conditions, such higher standard shall prevail over those set forth herein. SECTION 1: DEFINITIONS In addition to the Definitions contained in the Contract Documents governing the performance of the Services to be performed by Vendor, the following terms shall have the meanings assigned below. Unless otherwise specifically defined, those terms, acronyms and phrases in this document that are utilized in the IT services industry or other pertinent business context shall be interpreted in accordance with their generally understood meaning in such industry or business context. Ameren Cyber Security Vendor Questionnaire – the questionnaire provided by Ameren to Vendor, in the form set forth as Exhibit A to this document, covering Vendor’s electronic and other security procedures and practices. Vendor shall not access Ameren systems or data covered by these Terms and Conditions until review and approval of such Questionnaire by Ameren. Once approved, any material changes to the information set forth in the Questionnaire must be approved by Ameren prior to implementation. Confidential Information has the meaning set forth in the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, as specifically identified in these CyberSecurity Terms. Continuity of Business (COB) - the establishment of processes necessary to ensure that the Vendor’s performance of the Services is not interrupted for an extended period of time due to failure of equipment or other issues. Contract Documents – means, collectively, the Ameren Purchase Order issued in connection with the performance of Vendor’s Services and all other documents identified or incorporated therein as “Contract Documents”, including, without limitation, these CyberSecurity Terms. DeMilitarized Zone (DMZ) – a firewall configuration for securing local area networks (LANs) which uses a physical or logical sub-network to add an additional layer of security so that an external attacker only has access to equipment in the DMZ, rather than any other part of the network. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) - A test conducted at the Vendor’s premise usually by a third-party to verify operability of a system according to specifications. Fetch Protection - A system-provided restriction to prevent a program from accessing data in another user's segment of storage. Malicious Code - Software designed to intentionally infiltrate or damage a computer system, without the owner’s consent. Malware - software used to disrupt computer operation, gather sensitive information, or gain access to computer systems. Malware is commonly taken to include computer viruses, worms, Trojan horses, Root kits, spyware and adware. Privacy Data – means one or more of the following types of data:

1. Cardholder data as defined in the Payment Card Industry (PCI) standards;

2. Electronic Protected Health Information (ePHI) – Any protected health information (PHI) which is stored, accessed, transmitted or received electronically

3. Energy Usage – Electric and natural gas usage data gathered by Ameren’s metering systems;

http://compnetworking.about.com/library/glossary/bldef-lan.htm


4. Personally Identifiable Information (PII) – Any information that can be used to uniquely identify, contact or locate a single individual. Such data includes, but is not limited to, name, address, telephone number, social security number, tax identification number, resume, financial account information, Ameren account number, birth date, driver's license number, personnel records, personal business, and transaction details;

5. Non-public Personal Information as defined in the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999; or

6. Protected Health Information (PHI) – Any health information, as it relates to the Ameren Group Health Plan, that identifies an individual and relates to an individual’s past, present or future physical or mental health, the provision of health care to an individual or the past, present or future payment for health care.

SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. Computer systems that monitor and control processes in electric and gas generation or distribution systems. Services – The product, deliverables, work or services to be provided by Vendor to Ameren. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) - A test conducted at the customer location, often by a third-party, to verify operability of a system according to specifications immediately prior to commissioning. Vendor –The contractor, consultant or supplier identified in Ameren’s purchase order which is supplying the Services. Vendor’s Representatives – means the employees, subcontractors, agents and other authorized representatives of Vendor. Virus - Software used to infect a computer. After the virus code is written, it is buried within an existing program. Once that program is executed, the virus code is activated and attaches copies of itself to other programs in the system. Infected programs copy the virus to other programs. Also see Malware. VPN – Virtual Private Network. SECTION 2: VENDOR REQUIREMENTS Vendors shall comply with the following requirements as applicable to the Services being performed by Vendor: A. Privacy Data

Vendor may receive or have access to Privacy Data. To any extent that Vendor receives or may have access to Privacy Data, Vendor makes the following commitments:

1. Vendor shall treat all Privacy Data and all other information of a proprietary nature provided to it by Ameren as

Confidential Information.

2. Upon written request from Ameren, Vendor shall return (or destroy as set forth below if directed by Ameren) all of Ameren's Confidential Information, including such Privacy Data, within thirty (30) calendar days.

TYPE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION STORED OR USED DESTRUCTION METHOD Hard Copy Shredding, pulverizing, burning, or other suitable destruction method so that any Confidential Information or Privacy Data is not readable and cannot be reassembled or reconstructed in any way. Electronic Tangible Media, such as CDs, Disks or Tapes. Physical destruction or erasure with a standard three-pass DoD grade wipe so that any Confidential Information or Privacy Data is not readable and cannot be reassembled or reconstructed in any way. Hard Drive Storage or similar Computer or Device Storage. Physical destruction or erasure with a standard three-pass DoD grade wipe so that any Confidential Information or Privacy Data is not readable at all and cannot be reassembled or reconstructed in any way.

3. Security. Vendor will utilize security mechanisms reasonably calculated to protect the confidentiality and integrity of Privacy Data including, without limitation, the use of passwords, encryption technology, access control mechanisms and firewalls. In addition, Vendor shall:

(i) Hold any and all Privacy Data it obtains in connection with this Contract in strictest confidence and use

and permit use of this Privacy Data solely for the purposes of this Contract;


(ii) Disclose or provide access to Privacy Data only to employees. subcontractors, vendors, service

providers, employees, agents and any other third parties (“Vendor’s Representatives”) who have a need to have access to such information in order to provide Services hereunder and only to the extent reasonably necessary to carry out Vendor’s obligations hereunder;

(iii) Have, and in the future maintain in effect and enforce, rules and policies to protect against access to or

use or disclosure of Privacy Data other than in accordance with these CyberSecurity Terms including without limitation written instruction to and Contracts with Vendor’s Representatives to whom Privacy Data is disclosed to ensure that Vendor’s Representatives protect the confidentiality of Privacy Data;

(iv) Have, and in the future maintain in effect and enforce, commercially reasonable and appropriate physical,

procedural, administrative and electronic security measures to protect Privacy Data, including encryption, which comply with all applicable legal requirements and are consistent with industry practice and standards;

(v) Immediately notify Ameren upon becoming aware of any unauthorized access to, disclosure or use of,

loss or any other potential corruption, compromise or destruction of any Privacy Data and, at Vendor’s cost and expense, assist and cooperate with Ameren concerning any investigation, disclosures to affected parties and other remedial measures as requested by Ameren or required under any applicable privacy laws. In the event of any such unauthorized disclosure of Privacy Data by Vendor or Vendor’s Representatives, Vendor shall provide notice of such disclosure to the affected parties if required by applicable privacy laws and Vendor shall provide Ameren with a copy of such notice prior to providing it to such affected parties;

(vi) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, indemnify, hold harmless and defend upon request,

Ameren and its officers, directors, employees, agents, representatives, subsidiaries, affiliates, successors and assigns (“Ameren Parties”) against (a) any third party claims, damages or losses sustained or incurred by Ameren Parties for any breach or nonperformance by Vendor of its obligations under this Section, and (b) claims by governmental authorities for actual or alleged failure of an Ameren Party to comply with any applicable laws, including privacy laws, by reason of any act, omission, conduct, negligence or default by Vendor. Ameren Parties’ right to indemnification under this Section shall include reimbursement for reasonable costs and expenses, including without limitation, claims, internal administrative costs, third-party fees and expenses (including attorneys and consultants), and any other costs or losses related to such access, disclosure, use, loss, corruption, compromise or destruction of Privacy Data; and

(vii) Remain responsible for any breach of the obligations set forth in this Section and any violation of

any applicable privacy laws by Vendor’s Representatives to the same extent as if Vendor caused such breach or violation.

4. Insurance. In the event Vendor has use of, or access to, any Privacy Data, Vendor shall, in

addition to any other insurance coverage required by the Contract, carry Cyber Liability Insurance with limits of not less than $1 million per occurrence.

B. Integrity.

Vendor shall take reasonable commercial steps to ensure that its systems: (i) do have any system interface that would allow it or a user to bypass storage or Fetch Protection, password checking, system/application security, or obtain control in any authorized state; (ii) there is nothing designed within the systems that would allow it or a user to compromise the host system's operating system; (iii) does not have any back doors to the computer system; (iv) cannot introduce Malware into Ameren’s system. In the event that Malware is introduced to Ameren’s system by Vendor provided software or computers, the Vendor will promptly remove or quarantine any malware introduced by Vendor at Vendor's expense. Vendor will consider industry-standard best practices for hardening device operating systems through a range of techniques such as disabling unqualified remote management and access tools; securing access to storage devices and peripheral ports; securing built-in accounts; configuring login and password policies; securing file system access control lists; configuring data isolation and segmentation; securing protocols, interfaces and ports; configuring necessary network services; implementing an effective anti-virus program; implementing effective patch-management; securing administrative domain trust relationships; implementing file-system integrity monitoring; and/or implementing an intrusion detection/prevention system such as firewalls or "multiple layers" of service-agnostic protection (Zero Day protection technologies).

C. Reasonable Safeguards.


As part of its work effort, Vendor may be required to use Ameren data and IT resources in order to fulfill part of its specified tasks. For purposes of this work effort, “Ameren Data” shall mean data provided by Ameren to Vendor, which may physically reside at an Ameren or Vendor location. In connection with such data, Vendor will implement commercially reasonable safeguards necessary to: • Prevent unauthorized access to Ameren data from any public or private network;

• Prevent unauthorized physical access to any information technology resources involved in the development effort; and

• Prevent interception and manipulation of data during transmission to and from any servers. Vendor warrants that it has implemented and, throughout the term of these CyberSecurity Terms will maintain security measures designed to: (i) protect the security and confidentiality of Ameren Confidential Information; (ii) protect against any anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such Ameren Confidential Information; and (iii) protect against unauthorized access to or use of such Confidential Information that could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to Ameren, Ameren employees, shareholders or customers.

D. Breach Notification. Vendor shall immediately notify Ameren of: (i) any unauthorized possession or use of the data-processing files or other Ameren Confidential Information; (ii) the effect of such use or possession; and (iii) the corrective action taken in response thereto. Vendor acknowledges that Ameren may be required to also notify its customers, regulators and/or employees of such security incidents and agrees to cooperate with Ameren in making such notification to such persons. The costs of such notifications, credit monitoring services or other corrective action provided to affected customers, and any other costs related to such unauthorized possession or use, shall be the sole responsibility of Vendor. The Information Security group will keep a database of vendor breaches and may terminate its outstanding Purchase Orders with those Vendors who experience a breach.

E. Access Control. Check box if Not Applicable:

1. Vendor shall employ such systems and security measures as are reasonably necessary to prevent unauthorized access to electronic Privacy Data. Vendor shall also employ such further methods as are reasonably prudent to also prevent unauthorized physical access to any information technology resources involved in the Services.

2. Vendor will adhere to applicable regulatory requirements as outlined in Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) regulations, and the NERC Cyber Security Policy to include Critical Information Protection (CIP) Standards using an information security standards-based framework such as IEC 62443 or ISO 27001-2.

3. Where applicable, Ameren may require Factory Acceptance Test Measures (FAT) to verify that security features function properly and provide the expected levels of functionality. In addition, Site Acceptance Test Measures (SAT) after system installation with additional integrated functions to validate that the site installation is equivalent to the system tested at the factory.

Network Architecture. Check box if Not Applicable: 1. The Vendor shall provide and document secure network architecture where the higher-security zones

originate communication to less-secure zones. The Vendor shall provide and document the design for all communication paths between networks of different security zones through a DMZ. The Vendor shall verify and document that disconnection points are established between the network partitions and provide the methods to isolate subnets to continue limited operations. The Vendor shall provide and document tailored filtering and monitoring rules for all security zones and alarm for unexpected traffic.

2. The Vendor shall provide and document a DMZ that is restricted to communications where all traffic is

monitored, alarmed, and filtered. The Vendor shall provide and document outbound filtering and alarms for unexpected traffic through security zones. The Vendor shall define all sources and destinations with enforced communication origination even during restart conditions between security zones. The Vendor shall provide and document duel DMZ architectures using different products performing the same functionality running in parallel. The Vendor shall provide and document a mechanism for patching a single DMZ architecture running in a parallel configuration without disruption to the other DMZ running in parallel. Post-contract award, the Vendor shall provide network architecture documentation.


Security Features. Check box if Not Applicable:

The Vendor shall provide physical and cyber security features, including but not limited to authentication, encryption, access control, event and communication logging, monitoring, and alarming to protect the device and configuration computer from unauthorized modification or use.

F. Availability and Business Continuity. Check box if Not Applicable:

1. Vendor shall establish and maintain policies and procedures relevant to contingency plans, recovery plans and proper risk controls to ensure Vendor’s continued performance of Services and the restoration of data. Said policies and procedures must be in place prior to electronic access of Ameren data or operating systems and shall include, but not be limited to, recovery strategy, documented recovery plans covering all areas of operations necessary to delivering Vendor’s Services pursuant to this Agreement, vital records protection and recovery and testing plans. The plans shall provide, without limitation, for off-site backup of critical data files, program information, software, documentation, forms and supplies as well as alternative means of transmitting and processing program information.

2. Vendor’s recovery strategy shall provide for recovery after both short and long term disruptions in facilities, environmental support and data processing equipment. Although short term outages can be protected with redundant resources and network diversity, the long term strategy must allow for total destruction of Vendor’s business operations for a period of six (6) months or longer and set forth a recovery strategy.

3. Vendor shall use commercially reasonable means to establish recovery objectives (time to full restoration and amount of lost data tolerated) that do not exceed twenty-four (24) hours.

4. Vendor shall continue to provide service to Ameren if Ameren activates its contingency plan or moves to an interim site to conduct its business, including during tests of Ameren’s contingency operations plans and Vendor shall be reimbursed for any additional reasonable and actual costs incurred as a result.

5. If Vendor provides electronic interchange of data with Ameren, Vendor shall participate, if requested in writing by Ameren, in an annual Ameren data center exercise to validate recovery connectivity.

6. Vendor must provide evidence of capability to meet any applicable regulatory requirements concerning business continuity.

G. Software Design Provisions

1. Code Review.

All Deliverables that include software code or applications shall follow current industry design and best practices, including, but not limited to those published by The National Institute of Standards & Technology (NIST), the SANS (SysAdmin, Audit, Network, Security (SANS) Institute), and other recognized bodies. Vendor shall cooperate with Ameren’s code review of the relevant software or application deliverables. Prior to implementation or acceptance of a deliverable, Vendor shall subject the deliverable, including software code or scripts, to independent application review by Ameren or its delegated reviewer to validate that all applicable enterprise IT standards and security policies have been met as well as other specifications as identified in this Agreement or the relevant Contract. The review shall be performed by individuals other than Vendor or Ameren’s staff who developed the deliverables. For purposes of this requirement, "independent" may include other staff of Ameren provided no direct reporting relationships exist between the development and review organizations.

2. Functionality.

Ameren and Vendor acknowledge and agree that the Software has and shall operate in accordance with the functionality as described in the documentation provided by Vendor. If Vendor: (i) reduces the functionality of the Software as described in the Documentation, or releases an option to license a future product or other release that has substantially similar functionality as a separate or renamed product, or (ii) modifies the specifications or releases a new product that operates on specifications other than as set forth in the Documentation, Ameren shall be entitled to license such product under this Agreement at no additional cost, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

3. Passwords and Login.


In the event that a login name and password is required to access the any product provided by Vendor, Vendor shall provide Ameren access to the Product using a secure login and password. Vendor shall coordinate with Ameren’s representative to provide Ameren with predefined login and passwords, if any, upon delivery of the Product. Ameren shall have the right to assign a login name and password to any and all users in its sole discretion. Ameren shall be responsible for maintaining any and all login names and passwords during the term of the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents, Ameren and Vendor hereby agree that the number of users permitted to access the Product (whether concurrently or not concurrently) shall be unlimited.

4. Temporary Keys.

If Vendor uses software product authorization codes (“keys”) embedded in their product, Vendor agrees that these codes, upon expiration, will not result in the disruption production processing. These codes will be “soft stop” in nature (i.e.: Display warning messages only).

H. Vendor Personnel and Data Exportation.

Background checks - Vendor will conduct or cause to be conducted (by contract or otherwise) criminal background checks on Vendor personnel to be assigned responsibilities which may allow such person to compromise Ameren systems or financial, employee or customer data or as required by law. Foreign Nationals - Vendor warrants that, in performing its obligations under this Agreement, (i) it will not employ or subcontract with any person who is a “Specially Designated National” as defined from time to time in regulations issued by the Office of Foreign Asset Control of the United States Department of the Treasury; and (ii) Vendor is not a Specially Designated National. In the performance of the obligations under this Agreement, Vendor shall not export any data provided to it under the terms of this Agreement, to any other country outside of the United States without the prior written consent of Ameren and demonstration to Ameren’s satisfaction of Vendor’s capability to meet additional prudent policies and/or protocols, including but not limited to, security standards.

I. Audits and Third Party Reviews. Vendor agrees to provide to Ameren the results of each audit or third party attestation or report of Vendor’s security measures with respect to electronic data at all facilities where Ameren data is stored or accessed during the performance of the Services. Vendor shall provide Ameren with a copy of the related report promptly after receipt by Vendor and hereby consents to Ameren providing copies of such report to applicable regulators. The report or attestation shall contain Vendor’s management’s response to the exception comments, if any are noted, together with appropriate target dates for completion of required changes. In addition to the foregoing, Ameren may also, at Ameren’s election and its cost and expense, require Vendor to have such an audit or third party attestation performed by a mutually agreed independent, recognized accounting or consulting firm. Vendor shall provide reasonable assistance to Ameren in meeting its audit and regulatory requirements relating to electronic data and system security, including: (i) providing access to relevant books, records and Ameren Confidential Information in Vendor’s possession; (ii) permitting auditors and examiners to inspect and audit Vendor’s relevant operations; and (iii) permitting auditors and examiners to conduct reviews after any security breach that has or is likely to result in an unauthorized use or disclosure of Confidential Information. All inspections, examinations and audits shall be reasonable in scope and duration, and will be conducted so as to minimize any interference with Vendor’s normal business activities.

END OF APPENDIX L

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. M - 1

APPENDIX M GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HAULING HEAVY EQUIPMENT

POWER OPERATIONS SERVICES 1.0 INTRODUCTION

This specification outlines the requirements for moving heavy loads more commonly referred to as “Super Loads” by state transportation agencies. The specification will detail Ameren’s responsibility as well as those of the hauler and rigger. The terms “bidder,” “Hauling Contractor” and “Rigger Contractor” are used interchangeably. Each bidder shall furnish with his bid the route he proposes to use, the estimated time required, and a complete description of the hauling equipment which he proposes to use for the move, including; age, number of axles and wheels, rated capacity of trailer, number, type and pulling capacity of power units, the overall height above grade of the equipment to be moved as it is carried upon the hauling rig, etc. All work required to be performed for the move must be identified prior to the awarding of the contract.

2.0 AMEREN’S RESPONSIBILITIES Meet with rigger and hauler to review move and address questions. Provide detailed information for the equipment to be moved. This will include:

• Complete physical information – height, width, depth, and weight of equipment to be moved. Generally, an equipment outline drawing with dimensions will be provided.

• Miscellaneous materials to be moved (fans, bushings, radiators, turrets, conservator or expansion tank, arresters, piping, hardware, etc.). A list of the miscellaneous material that shall be moved will be provided. Transformer oil will be moved by others.

• Physical drawings of the equipment and special lifting or loading manufacturer’s instructions

• Any known conditions that could have an effect on moving the equipment

• Location where the equipment can be picked up

• Final destination for the equipment Provide impact recorder mounted on equipment. Arrange for lifting of electric utility wires for the portion of the move that is within Ameren’s service territory. Provide access to beginning and ending locations. Provide outages to electrical facilities as required to facilitate the work. Provide the date when the move can begin. Provide the date the move must be completed. In some instances the rigger and the hauler will be the same firm, but in others the two will be different. This specification divides specific responsibilities between the rigging and moving. In those cases where the two are different, the rigger and mover will coordinate and work together.

3.0 HAULER / RIGGER RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1 General

Investigate the originating location and final destinations to determine any special situations that may exist. Make Ameren aware of special situations and note any modifications to Ameren facilities that will be required to successfully complete the move. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for all necessary cargo insurance, services, labor, equipment, trucks, tools, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water sanitary facilities, supervision, permits, bonds, permission to cross private property, insurance, payment of taxes and license fees, right-of-way clearances,


and other personnel, devices & incidentals necessary to load, transport, unload and set in place the designated transformer or equipment, including accessories. Where required, provide temporary cribbing for equipment to rest on prior to being moved to the final destination. Secure all required permits or approvals to complete the move from federal, state, and local authorities. Where specific permitting is not required from a local authority such as a city, county, or township road commission, the Contractor shall still obtain written permission from the local authority prior to the move. A copy of all permitting including written permission from the local authority shall be provided to Ameren upon request. Clean up as the work progresses from day to day. All litter, debris, packing materials, etc., shall be disposed of off-site at the hauler’s expense. Repair any and all damage to private, public, or Ameren property at no additional cost to Ameren. CAUTION: Caution must be observed at all times when working in or around the existing substation/switchyard. The existing substation/switchyard is energized with exposed high voltage substation bus and equipment. Also, there are energized high voltage overhead conductors in close proximity around the substation & switchyard. Coordination with the Company Construction Supervisor to have appropriate lines and/or equipment de-energized may be necessary. All outages and releases shall be in accordance with the Company's Workman's Protection Assurance (WPA) Procedure. Personnel shall be trained, wear hard hats, protective clothing, safety glasses with side shields, safety shoes and fall protection in accordance with OSHA requirements. The operating substation shall not be left open and unsupervised, due to the common access to energized and de-energized equipment.

3.2 Hauler Specific

Determine a route and request approval from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies to cover the complete move. Complete a route survey and contact overhead utility companies as required by the permitting authority. Investigate all weight limitations that may affect the move. This can include but is not limited to seasonal weight requirements imposed by governmental agencies. Make all necessary arrangements to complete the move. Taking super loads over railroad tracks can present unique challenges. The mover will investigate any railroad crossing that can pose a problem and develop a plan that will not cause damage to the track or impede the operation of the railroad. Coordinate any and all requirements with law officials. Submit OEM load charts for all equipment used. Provide a detailed Transport Plan to Ameren for review and approval before continuing with the move including but not limited to:

• The proposed route

• The estimated time required for the move

• A complete description of the proposed hauling equipment

• The overall height above grade of the equipment to be moved as it is carried upon the hauling rig

• Axle loading

• Wheel loading

• Center of Gravity of load and trailer

• Calculation

• DOT permit, if applicable

Provide a detailed Safety Plan to Ameren for review and approval before continuing with the move.


All loads that exceed 85% capacity of the hauling equipment shall be reviewed and stamped by a professional engineer. The Hauling Contractor shall comply with all requirements prescribed by the manufacturer instruction leaflets & drawings related to moving and supporting of the transformer or equipment. No welding on or to the equipment shall be permitted without written approval by Ameren and the equipment manufacturer. The Hauling Contractor shall also be responsible for replacing or making prompt repairs to the equipment used by the Hauling Contractor which is damaged for any reason, including, but not limited to, broken axles. Any temporary rocking or temporary roadways that may be necessary for any portion of the move, including, but not limited to, the substation yard, shall be provided by the Hauling Contractor unless other arrangements have been made in advance and are clearly described in the contract. Removal of temporary rocking or temporary roadways, at Ameren’s discretion, will be the responsibility of the Hauling Contractor. The Hauling Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangement for raising, removal or relocation of all telephone, TV cables and electric utility wires, traffic lights, and other similar obstructions in accordance with the following: The Hauling Contractor shall make all arrangements directly with the involved utilities and authorities and the cost of such arrangements shall be included in the bid. The Hauling Contractor shall, where necessary, allow a reasonable amount of time for raising these obstructions, while the move is in progress. The Hauling Contractor shall be responsible for repairing or replacing any damaged roads or surfaces, equipment, structures, fences and fields and for the restoration of any other damage to public or private property, caused by the move, to the satisfaction of the Ameren Services Company Construction Supervisor. Any damage done to the transformer, accessories, oil or other equipment being moved (including paint scratches which expose bare metal) by the Hauling Contractor, his employees, subcontractors, contact with trees or overhead obstructions, or any other cause during the progress of this work, shall be the responsibility of the Hauling Contractor and shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Ameren Services Company Construction Supervisor. The Hauling Contractor shall provide adequate cargo insurance to cover the complete replacement of the equipment being hauled.

3.3 Rigger Specific Provide all necessary material, labor, and supervision to move the load to a place where the load can be placed on the mover’s truck or rail car. Load the item on the truck and assist the mover in securing the load to the truck or rail car. Off load the item at the final destination and locate it as directed by Ameren personnel. The Rigging Contractor shall comply with all requirements prescribed by the manufacturer instruction leaflets & drawings related to moving and supporting of the transformer or equipment. No welding on or to the equipment shall be permitted without written approval by Ameren and the equipment manufacturer. The Rigging Contractor shall be responsible for having an ample supply of cables, jacks, planking and other miscellaneous equipment on hand and in good condition, so that the move can be made safely and without delay. Unless specifically stated in this specification, no pulling anchors will be available. The equipment to be moved shall be handled and positioned solely by use of the equipment furnished by the Hauling Contractor. At no time shall the equipment to be moved, or the equipment furnished by the Hauling Contractor, make contact with or exert a force on (directly or indirectly) any building, structure, foundation, oil pit, other improvement, tree, natural formation or vehicle (except those furnished by the Hauling Contractor).


4.0 SCOPE OF WORK 4.1 Ameren Company Representative

An Ameren Company representative will generally observe the move and shall have the authority to immediately stop the work because of hazardous conditions or for any other reason which he deems necessary. This shall in no way relieve the Hauling Contractor of his responsibilities for the proper performance and supervision of the move.

4.2 Inspection of Equipment to be Moved Prior to the move, Ameren personnel will inspect the equipment. Ameren will furnish all labor and material for this inspection. The Hauling Contractor and Ameren shall coordinate their work so that no unnecessary interference or delays occur during this period.

4.3 Hauling Contractor The Hauling Contractor shall provide and be responsible for all necessary cargo insurance, services, labor, equipment, trucks, tools, supervision, permits, bonds, permission to cross private property, insurance, payment of taxes and license fees, right-of-way clearances, and other personnel and devices necessary to load, transport, unload and set in place the designated transformer or equipment, including accessories.

END OF APPENDIX M

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. N - 1

APPENDIX N PIPE AND FITTINGS: AMEREN APPROVED MANUFACTURER LIST

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 The Scope of the Ameren Approved Manufacturer's List (AML) encompasses pipe and fittings supplied to Ameren Gas and Power Generation locations.

1.2 AML applies to Critical (QR/CR) and non-Critical items.

1.2.1 Items that are “Restricted” will have manufacturers listed and they shall be supplied as stated. In some cases, manufacturers will not be on the AML.

1.2.2 “Generic” items shall be supplied from the AML regardless of what manufacturer is listed.

2.0 AML REQUIREMENTS

2.1 Ameren-AML shall be initially compiled prior to contract award, and be finalized and implemented by 5/1/2012.

2.2 All manufacturers on the Ameren-AML shall have a current/active ISO 9001 registration unless approved

by Ameren. 2.3 Any new manufacturers or classes of material added to the AML must be approved by Ameren prior to

manufacturer being added to the list. 2.4 Unapproved manufactures may be used in emergency situations; however, contact and approval must be

obtained from Ameren end-user prior to material being purchased. 2.5 Manufacturers are classified by the following levels with corresponding QA requirements specified:

QA Oversight

Level Minimum QA Requirements

1 • CMTR required on all shipments. Documentation sent with materials as required.

• Destructive and Non-Destructive Independent Testing completed once per year for each category and manufacturer on the AML (CBN Stl Pipe, Fittings, etc.).

• Quality Audit performed at manufacturer once every 2 years. 2 • CMTR required on all shipments. Documentation sent with materials as required.

• Destructive and Non-Destructive Independent Testing completed once per year for each category and manufacturer on the AML (CBN Stl Pipe, Fittings, etc.).

• Subject to Master Import testing as required. If performed, Ameren is to receive copy of testing.

• PMI Testing at Ameren on each heat/lot #. 3 • CMTR required on all shipments. Documentation sent with materials as required.

• Third Party testing at Factory on each shipment.

• Subject to Master Import testing as required. If performed, Ameren is to receive copy of testing.

• Destructive and Non-Destructive Independent Testing completed twice per year for each category and manufacturer on the AML (CBN Stl Pipe, Fittings, etc.).

• PMI Testing at Ameren on each heat/lot #. NOTE: A destructive and non-destructive testing plan shall be finalized by 5/1/12 and fully

implemented by 9/1/12.

2.6 All Gas materials must be supplied from approved domestic manufacturers.


2.7 In cases where material must be shipped from an alternate location that does not have the testing equipment available, approval must be obtained from end-user.

2.8 Ameren will conduct yearly audits of material testing and documentation processes. 2.9 Chinese manufactured product shall be only accepted after written pre-approval per Ameren. 2.10 Receipt inspection standards for each type of material shall be created (i.e., fittings, pipe, flanges, valves).

At a minimum these should include:

• Proper Identification/Markings (manufacturers markings are present and they are readable/legible and meet applicable manufacturing standards

• Verify Manufacturer is on AML

• Verify CMTRs are received and acceptable

• Check for damage/cleanliness/workmanship

• Verify material matches stock/PO description

• Any unique inspections specific to the item

• Dimensional inspection to sampling plan (to nominal sizes)


Product Material ASTM Spec.

Material Grade

Materials Class

Approved Manufacturers

Country City/State Approved For

Registrations/ Certifications

Mfr. QA Oversight

Level

Comments

PIPE, SEAMLESS

Carbon Steel

A106 Grade B Grade C

Schedule 40 Schedule 80 Schedule 160 XXS

Arcelormittal South Africa Vereemiging, GEN ISO:9001 2 Chung Hung Steel Taiwan Kaohsiung City GEN ISO:9001 3 Dnepropetrovsk Ukraine Dneproptrovsk GEN ISO:9001 2 Hall Longmore South Africa Wadeville GEN ISO:9001 2 Husteel Korea Seoul GEN ISO:9001 3 Hyundai Hysco Korea Ulsan GEN ISO:9001 3 JSC Ukraine Dneproptrovsk GEN ISO:9001 3 Lakeside USA US GEN ISO:9001 1 Maharashtra India Raigad GEN ISO:9001 3 Sun Steel Vietnam Binh Duong Province GEN ISO:9001 3 US Steel USA Fairfield, AL GEN ISO:9001 1 Uvjerne Croatia Uvjerne GEN ISO:9001 2 Wheatland/Sharon USA Sharon, PA GEN ISO:9001 1

Ferritic Steel

A335 P11 P22

Schedule 80 Schedule 160 XXS

JFE Japan Chita GEN ISO:9001 2 Michigan

USA MI GEN ISO:9001 1

Productos

Spain Valle de Trapaga GEN ISO:9001 2 Sumitumo Japan Wakayama GEN ISO:9001 2 Tenaris Argentina Buenos Aires GEN ISO:9001 2

Austenitic Stainless

Steel

A312 300 Series 304 304L 316 316L etc.


Haynes USA IN GEN ISO:9001 1 Kawasaki Japan Fukuyama GEN ISO:9001 2 Kobe Japan Tokyo GEN ISO:9001 2 Nippon Japan Yamaguchi GEN ISO:9001 2 Productos

Spain Valle de Trapaga GEN ISO:9001 2

Pusan Korea Janghang GEN ISO:9001 3 Sandvik Sweden Sandviken GEN ISO:9001 2 Sumitumo Japan Kashima City GEN ISO:9001 2 TaChen Korea Taipei GEN ISO:9001 3 Webco USA OK GEN ISO:9001 1

A376 TP300 Series


Bristol USA Bristol, TN GEN ISO:9001 1 Haynes USA IN GEN ISO:9001 1 Outokumpu USA Wildwood, FL GEN ISO:9001 1 Webco USA OK GEN ISO:9001 1


Product Material ASTM Spec

Material Grade

Material Class Approved Manufacturers



Mfr. QA Oversight

Level

Comments

PIPE, WELDED

Austenitic Stainless Steel

A312 300 Series 304 304L 316 316L


Thareus Thailand Rayong GEN ISO:9001 3 Pantech Malaysia Kuantan GEN ISO:9001 3 PreStar Malaysia Darul Ehsan GEN ISO:9001 3 KingMaker Steel USA NJ GEN ISO:9001 1 Kanzen Tetsu Malaysia Darul Ehsan GEN ISO:9001 3 Sonah Vietnam Seoul GEN ISO:9001 3 Bristol Metals USA Bristol, TN GEN ISO:9001 1 Outokumpu USA Wildwood, FL GEN ISO:9001 1

FITTINGS Socket Butt Threaded Reducers Unions Ells Elbows Tees Caps Plugs Bushings

Malleable Iron

A197 150# 300#

Ward Manufacturing USA Blossburg, PA GAS ISO:9001 1 Anvil USA Columbia, PA GAS* ISO:9001 1 *Approved for plugs, unions, elbows and

tees only Jinan China Jinan GEN ISO:9001 3

Carbon Steel Forgings

A105 Socket Weld Threaded

Capitol

USA Crowley, LA GAS**,GEN ISO:9001 2 ** Only Plugs Bonney Forge USA Mt. Uniom, PN GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2

Wrought Carbon Steel/Alloy Steel

A234 W Series WPB, WPC, etc.

Butt-Weld Standard XH XXH

Arah Danang Malaysia Darul Ehsan GEN ISO:9001 3 Awaji Thailand Sumoto City GEN ISO:9001 3 Canadoil Canada Quebec GEN ISO:9001 3 Charming Vietnam GEN ISO:9001 3 Erne Austria Hauptstasse GEN ISO:9001 2 Hackney Ladish USA AR, OK GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2 Pantech Malaysia Seiannor GEN ISO:9001 3 Teneris Mexico De Clorec GEN ISO:9001 2 TK Korea Busan GEN ISO:9001 3 Weldbend USA IL GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2

Wrought Austenitic Stainless

Steel

A403 Butt-Weld Sch 10,40,80,160

Kanzen-Tetsu Malaysia Darul Ehsan GEN ISO:9001 3 Tru-Flo Taiwan Hsiang GEN ISO:9001 3 Elin Philippines Cavite GEN ISO:9001 3

Schulz Brazil Campos dos Guyacezes

GEN ISO:9001 2

SPI Malaysia Darul GEN ISO:9001 3 SFG USA Travelers

GEN ISO:9001 1

Forged or Rolled Alloy

Stainless Steel

A182 F9 F11 F22

3000/6000# SW 3000/6000# THRD

Bonney Forge USA Mt. Union, PN GEN ISO:9001 1 Penn Machine USA PN GEN ISO:9001 1

300 Series 304/304L 316/316L

3000/6000# SW 3000/6000# THRD

Bothwell Taiwan Hsien GEN ISO:9001 3 ISE Japan Osaka GEN ISO:9001 2 Enlin Steel Taiwan Cavite GEN ISO:9001 3


Material ASTM Spec.

Material Grade

Material Class Approved Manufacturers



Mfr. QA Oversight

Level

Comments

PIPE NIPPLES

Carbon Steel A106 A733

Grade B Grade C

Standard (40) Schedule 80 Schedule 160 XXS

Westbrook USA Houston, TX GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2 Wisconsin USA Milwaukee, WI GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2

Austenitic Stainless Steel

A106 A733

300 Series 304/304L, 316/316L, etc.

Standard (40) Schedule 80 Schedule 160 XXS

Westbrook USA Houston, TX GEN ISO:9001 1 Merit Brass USA Cleveland, OH GEN ISO:9001 1

FLANGE, PIPE

Carbon Steel Forgings

A105 Grade B Grade C

150# 300# 600# 900#

Ameri-Forge USA TX GEN ISO:9001 Balkrishna India Gujarat GEN ISO:9001 3 Bebitz Germany Lebendorter GEN ISO:9001 2 Boltex USA Houston, TX GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2 Galperti USA Houston, TX GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2 Hind India Ghaziabad GEN ISO:9001 3 Metalfar Italy Brianza GEN ISO:9001 2 Munish India Ludhiana GEN ISO:9001 3 Norma India Sahibabad GEN ISO:9001 3 Rangani India Gujarat GEN ISO:9001 3 RNG India Ludhiana GEN ISO:9001 3 Tirupati India Ghaziabad GEN ISO:9001 3 Trilad USA Houston, TX GEN ISO:9001 1 Weldbend USA Chicago, IL GAS, GEN ISO:9001 2

Stainless Steel A182 300 Series 304/304L, 316/316L, etc.

150# 300#

Enlin Philippines Cavite GEN ISO:9001 3 Viraj India Maharashtra GEN ISO:9001 3 Hilton Metal Mumbai Ghonsai GEN ISO:9001 3

Forged or Rolled Alloy

A182 F9 F11 F22

150# 300# 600#

Ameri-Forge USA TX GEN ISO:9001 1 Maas Flange USA TX GEN ISO:9001 1

SWAGE NIPPLES and BULL PLUGS

Carbon and Stainless Steel

A234 Capitol Manufacturing USA Crowley, LA GAS ISO:9001 2 Approved for Weld X Thread Westbrook USA Houston, TX GAS ISO:9001 2 Approved for Thread X Thread

END OF APPENDIX N

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. Q - 1

APPENDIX Q QUALITY MANAGEMENT SERVICES APPLICATION AID FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES

This document is an Application Aid for Construction Service organizations to outline the Bidder/Contractor’s Quality Management Program and demonstrate how it meets the requirements of Ameren Missouri’s Quality Management System (QMS). This Aid is not a substitute for, nor does it replace AUE-MAN-QMS-1001, Quality Management System and its requirements. DO YOU HAVE A WRITTEN QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (QMP)? If NO, how do you intend to meet the QMS requirements? 13T If YES, what is the basis of your QMP (e.g., ISO 9000, NQA-1) and how does it meet the QMS requirements as outlined below? 13T 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Direct and indirect activities are performed and controlled by written instructions, procedures and

drawings, as appropriate. (QMS 1.2.1, 3.2.1, 17.2.4) 13T

1.2 Quality programs of suppliers are approved and audited to ensure they meet applicable QMS requirements. (QMS 1.2.3) 13T

1.3 The roles and responsibilities of supporting organizations are well defined and coordinated to achieve desired results. (QMS 1.2.4, 18.2.5) 13T

1.4 The QMP is revision controlled and approved by Senior Leadership. (QMS 1.2.5) 13T

1.5 Quality expectations are reviewed as part of job briefings. (QMS 17.2.3) 13T

2.0 DESIGN CONTROL

2.1 Field change notices are reviewed and approved with the same level of review as the original design

change. (QMS 2.2.8) 13T

3.0 DOCUMENT CONTROL AND RECORDS 3.1 Processes are in place to ensure current revisions of control documents are readily accessible.

(QMS 3.2.6, 7.2.9, 13.2.1) 13T

3.2 Records are legible, identifiable, and stored such that they can be retrieved for the durations of the retention time. Record retention times storage requirements are commensurate with importance to safety, quality and regulatory compliance. (QMS 13.2.2) 13T

4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 4.1 Inspections and tests are performed by qualified personnel in accordance with written procedures, plans,

instructions, or work documents. (QMS 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 7.2.3) 13T Test plans and instructions are risk assessed, independently reviewed, and approved prior to use. Changes or deviations to test plans and instructions are documented and receive the same review and approval. Design basis, codes and standards, and regulatory requirements that need to be verified and documented are incorporated into test procedures and instructions. (QMS 7.2.4, 7.2.5, 7.2.6) 13T

4.2 Test results are evaluated and approved to ensure the design/project and acceptance criteria have been met before equipment or system is released to operations. Test or inspection results that do not meet


acceptance criteria are documented and dispositioned. Records of inspection and tests results are maintained in accordance with approved procedures. (QMS 7.2.7, 7.2.8, 7.2.9) 13T

5.0 MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT (M&TE) 5.1 M&TE is uniquely identified, clearly labeled and controlled in accordance with written procedures.

(QMS 8.2.1) 13T

5.2 Calibrations are performed and documented in accordance with written procedures; calibration data is readily retrievable. Calibration standards are traceable to national standards. Where national standards do not exist or are not readily available, the basis for calibration is documented. (QMS 8.2.2, 8.2.3) 13T

5.3 Handling and storage of M&TE is controlled to ensure accuracy is maintained. M&TE is sealed / secured after calibration to prevent unauthorized adjustments. M&TE is checked for calibration whenever damage is suspected. (QMS 8.2.4, 8.2.6, 8.2.7) 13T

5.4 M&TE found outside calibration limits requires affected systems and components to be identified and evaluated for adverse impact. M&TE used on critical components is recorded to provide traceability. (QMS 8.2.8, 8.2.9) 13T

5.5 Inspection and test software is validated prior to use. Process controllers, microprocessors and software, when used as an integral part of the M&TE, are not interchanged without recalibration of the test system. (QMS 8.2.10, 8.2.11) 13T

6.0 CONTROL OF NON-CONFORMANCE

1. Procedures are established for identifying, documenting, controlling, and dispositioning non-

conformances. (QMS 9.2.1) 13T

7.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION (CAP)

7.1 Procedures provide for the prompt identification and documentation of events and conditions adverse to

quality, ensure assigned corrective actions are implemented and trended to identify opportunities for continuous improvement. (QMS 10.2.1, 10.2.3, 10.2.8) 13T

7.2 Lessons learned from internal and external operating experience are captured and evaluated by the corrective action process and communicated to appropriate personnel. (QMS 10.2.7, 18.2.18) 13T

8.0 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE 8.1 Materials, equipment and components are stored in accordance with specified requirements in an

environment that preserves their integrity and usability including any preventive maintenance activities. Materials with shelf life limitations are identified and monitored; expired items are dispositioned. Storage areas are periodically inspected to verify the integrity of the facility and that material storage requirements are being met. (QMS 12.2.7, 12.2.8, 12.2.9, 12.2.12) 13T

8.2 Materials, equipment and components are packaged, shipped, received, handled, stored and issued in accordance with written procedures. (QMS 12.2.1) 13T

8.3 Material handling, rigging and lifting is controlled and performed in a manner to prevent damage or injury. (QMS 12.2.6) 13T

8.4 Hazardous materials and chemicals are labeled, stored, maintained, packaged and shipped offsite in accordance with regulatory requirements and manufacturer recommendations. (QMS 12.2.10, 12.2.11) 13T


9.0 INTERNAL ASSESSMENTS 9.1 Internal assessments are performed by qualified personnel to evaluate the effectiveness of

implementation of procedures and programs with findings documented in Corrective Action Program. (QMS 14.2.1, 14.2.2) 13T

10.0 TRAINING 10.1 Training standards and requirements are identified and documented for each functional position.

(QMS 15.2.1) 13T

10.2 Initial and ongoing training is provided to employees to meet training standards and requirements. Lessons learned and industry best practices are incorporated in the initial and ongoing training programs. (QMS 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 18.2.6) 13T

11.0 SPECIAL PROCESSES

11.1 Special processes are performed using approved procedures, and qualified personnel and equipment to ensure critical process results. (QMS 16.2.1, 16.2.2, 16.2.3) 13T

12.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

12.1 Projects are managed in accordance with written policies and procedures. (QMS 18.2.3, 18.2.13, 18.2.14) 13T

12.2 Key stakeholders are identified and involved throughout the development and implementation of projects. Performance metrics for safety, quality, cost, earned value and schedule are established, monitored and communicated to all stakeholders to ensure sufficient resources are provided to complete the project. Project objectives and results are compared to determine the success of each project. (QMS 18.2.7, 18.2.8, 18.2.9, 18.2.12) 13T

12.3 Project risks are identified and evaluated in terms of probability of occurrence and impact; recovery strategies are prepared for significant risks and risks are monitored; and recovery strategies are revised, as necessary, throughout the project. Emergent risks are evaluated and added to the risk management plan. (QMS 18.2.10, 18.2.11) 13T

13.0 PLANT SECURITY

13.1 Supervisors are trained to recognize unusual human behavior and suspicious conditions. (QMS 22.2.4) 13T

13.2 Supervisors are accountable for headcount in the event of an emergency. (QMS 22.2.7) 13T

END OF APPENDIX Q

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. W - 1

APPENDIX W WELDING AND NDE

1.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 General

All welding and welding related activities including NDE on boiler pressure parts, attachments and boiler external piping shall be performed under the Contractor’s ASME or National Board “R” Stamp Quality Control program in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the ASME Power Piping Code, B31.1 and the National Board Inspection Code, NB-23. All structural welding shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the AWS Structural Welding Code, D1.1 except that welders may be qualified to the ASME Code in lieu of D1.1. 1.1.1 Recommended Weld Practices (RWP)

1.2 Welding – Ferritic Materials

Open root pressure part welds shall be made with a GTAW (gas tungsten arc welding) root pass unless otherwise specified. SMAW (shielded metal arc welding) welds on ferritic materials (carbon, carbon-moly and chrome-moly alloys) shall be made with low hydrogen electrodes. GMAW (gas metal arc welding) or FCAW (flux core arc welding) is not permitted for joining pressure parts. Subject to Ameren approval, these processes may be used for non-pressure part welding such as membrane or skin casing. Welding progression for all processes shall be uphill. Membrane shall be welded from both sides unless otherwise approved. Filler materials, preheat and postheat temperatures shall be as shown in Table 1.2 unless otherwise approved. For joints between differing P-numbers, the PWHT temperature shall not exceed the Maximum PWHT temperature shown in Table 1.2 for the lower P-number material being joined. Welds in Grade 91 material shall be allowed to cool to 100°F after welding before beginning postweld heat treated. Table 1.2

P- No. Nominal Composition

Preheat Temp. (°F)

PWHT Temp.

(°F ± 25)

Maximum PWHT

Temp (°F)

Welding Process

SMAW GTAW

P1 Carbon steel 300* 1150 1300 E7018 ER70S-2

P3 C, 1/2 Mo Grade T1 300 1150 1300 E7018-A1

E801X-B2 ER70S-A1 ER80S-B2

P3 1/2 Cr, 1/2 Mo Grade T2 300 1150 1350 E801X-B2 ER80S-B2

P4 1-1/4 Cr, 1/2 Mo Grade T11 450 1225 1350 E801X-B2 ER80S-B2

P5A 2-1/4 Cr, 1 Mo Grade T22 450 1350 1375 E901X-B3 ER90S-B3

P5B 9 Cr, 1 Mo Grade T9 450 1350 1375 E801X-B8 ER80S-B8

P15E 9 Cr, 1 Mo, 1/4 V Grade T91 450 1375 1400 E901X-B9 ER90S-B9

*300°F preheat required only for material whose thickness exceeds ¾". 50°F preheat required if ¾" or less. Note: The Maximum PWHT Temp applies when joining materials with different P- numbers.

1.3 Welding – Austenitic Materials

Open root pressure part welds shall be made with a GTAW (gas tungsten arc welding) root pass and an inert backing gas unless otherwise specified. The use of a flux or flux coated filler wire to prevent oxidation of the root pass is not permitted. 65°F minimum Preheat required for Stainless to Stainless welds. Interpass temperatures shall not exceed 350°F. When joining austenitic stainless steel materials of different nominal chrome content, the filler material shall have a chrome content of the higher chrome alloy.

1.4 Welding – Dissimilar Metal Welds


Welds between austenitic stainless steel materials and ferritic materials shall be made with ENiCrFe-2 or ENiCrFe-3 electrodes. Butt welds joining pressure parts shall have a weld joint geometry as shown in Figure 1.4 (a). The weld cap on the ferritic side of the weld shall extend past the edge of the weld prep as shown in Figure 1.4 (b).

0 TO 3/323/32 TO 1/8

60° ± 2½°37½° ± 2½°

STAINLESSSTEEL FERRITIC

STAINLESSSTEEL FERRITIC

3/16 MIN

1.5 Filler Material Handling and Storage Following is for Low Hydrogen electrodes:

Electrodes shall be stored in hermitically sealed containers until used. Opened containers and loose electrodes shall be maintained in portable heated rod caddies or rod ovens. Electrodes which are cold to the touch are not acceptable for use and shall be discarded. Rebaking is not permitted. Electrodes stored in rod ovens shall be segregated and labeled by classification number. Only one (1) classification of electrode is permitted in each portable rod caddy. Bare filler materials shall be stored in a clean dry area to prevent contamination and physical damage. Each straight length of bare filler material shall be marked with the classification number. Filler materials without the required markings are not acceptable for use and shall be discarded.

1.6 Weld Traceability

Each pressure boundary weld shall be traceable to the welder or welders who made the weld. Traceability shall be maintained through use of written documentation. Stamping of welds is not permitted.

1.7 Preheat and Post Weld Heat Treatment

When preheat is required by the welding procedure specification (WPS), the preheat shall be applied prior to tack welding. Oxy-fuel torches may be used for preheating tubing or pipe with a specified chrome content of 3% or less and not exceeding 4½" in diameter and ½" in wall thickness. All other preheating shall be done using resistance heating. When using oxy-fuel torches for preheat a means to verify preheat temperature, such as temperature indicating crayon, is required. Postweld heat treatment shall be done using resistance or induction heating unless otherwise Ameren approved. Welds in Grade 91 (T91, P91) material shall be allowed to cool to 100°F after welding before beginning postweld heat treated. Induction heating will be considered on a case by case basis by the Ameren Engineer.

1.8 Preheat and Post Weld Heat Treatment Procedure Submittal and Record Keeping

Figure 1.4 (a)

Figure 1.4 (b)


All PWHT information (heating/cooling rates, soak time and temperature) shall be provided to the Ameren Engineer by the engineering submittal milestone date. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the approved procedure to the PWHT technician. A copy of the current calibration data for the heating equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor for approval by Ameren Quality personnel. Each weld shall be clearly identified on the recording charts. The PWHT zone shall be centered on the weld and the width shall be at least 5 times the thickness of the material. A minimum of two thermocouples, located 180 degrees from each other, are required unless otherwise approved by Ameren. The rates of heating and cooling shall not exceed 400°F per hour, unless approved by Ameren. At 600°F the equipment may be turned off and the weldment allowed to slowly cool in still air. After completion of the PWHT, the Contractor shall submit copies of the time versus temperature strip charts for each weld within 24 hours.

1.9 Interruption of Welding Welding may be interrupted on materials with a maximum specified chromium content not exceeding 3.0% provided the lesser of 3/8” or 25% of the groove thickness has been filled and the joint is allowed to slowly cool to room temperature. Welding may not be interrupted on materials with a maximum specified chromium content exceeding 3.0%. Welding on P No's 1, 3, 4, and 5 materials with a maximum specified chromium content not exceeding 3.0% may be interrupted provided:

1) The joint is welded out at least 3/8" or 25% of the groove weld thickness, whichever is less. 2) The weld is allowed to cool slowly to room temperature. 3) A visual inspection by an Ameren welding inspector is performed prior to resumption of welding to ensure

that no cracks have occurred. 4) The required preheat is reapplied and any cracks are repaired before welding resumes. Welding on P No. 5 materials (with specified chromium content greater than 3%) and P No. 6 materials may be interrupted and the weld allowed to cool prior to heat treatment provided:

1) An intermediate heat treatment and a controlled cooling rate are applied as specified by an Ameren Engineer.

2) A visual examination of the weld by an Ameren Welding Inspector is performed prior to resumption

of welding to ensure that no cracks have occurred. 3) The required preheat is reapplied and any cracks are repaired before welding is resumed.

Activities such as slag removal, lunch breaks, shift change and visual inspections are not considered interruptions provide the required preheat is maintained.

1.10 ID Counterbores and Tapers

ID counterbores shall be no longer than necessary to promote complete fusion of the root. There shall be a minimum 1/8" diameter radius between the counterbore and the transition taper. A 4-to-1 taper is preferred but in no case shall the taper exceed 3-to-1.

1.11 Backing Rings

Backing rings are not permitted unless otherwise specified or approved.

1.12 Dimensional Verification

Prior to any demolition, the contractor shall establish datum points and reference measurements to establish physical dimensions and location of the boiler in the “as found” condition.

2.0 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL 2.1 General


To ensure quality, Contractor will be required to designate a person or persons (multiple shift coverage) to monitor all welding related activities and maintain compliance with this specification and the applicable Code. The designated person shall be an AWS Certified Weld Inspector (CWI) or have welding experience credentials that per Ameren approval can substitute for certification. The designated person shall not have dual job responsibilities that include supervision of qualified welders on job. The designated person will be responsible for performing visual weld inspections, monitoring rod control and Foreign Material Exclusion (FME), and must have the authority to correct unsatisfactory conditions when they occur.

2.2 Weld Procedures

Contractor shall furnish at the time of Contractor mobilization (after award of a contract but before the start of welding) all applicable Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS). Any differences in preheat, postweld heat treatment or filler materials between those listed in Table 1.4 and Contractor’s proposed WPS’s shall be noted in Contractor’s proposals at the time of bid. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) shall be available for review by Ameren personnel upon request. A copy of the applicable WPS's shall be posted at job site providing the welders specific welding instructions.

2.3 Weld Map

Contractor shall furnish a weld schedule on or before the required engineering submittal milestone that provides as a minimum; a description of the weld joint; the material specification and grade, diameter and joint thickness for each of the two materials being joined; throat thickness for fillet welds; NDE required; preheat and postweld heat treatment temperatures, welding procedure; and filler metal.

2.4 Welder Qualification and Identification

Contractor shall furnish Ameren with qualification records (WQR’s and welder continuity records) for each welder prior to the start of welding. All welder qualification records shall be accompanied by a photograph of the welder to whom they pertain unless waived by Ameren. Contractor shall assign a number and/or letter to each welder. This identification symbol shall be unique to each individual welder and shall not be assigned to any other welder during this work. To maintain traceability of weld joints to specific welders, a written record or log shall be maintained by Contractor.

2.5 Control of Material Supplied by Ameren Missouri

Contractor shall establish a temporary controlled storage facility for the safekeeping of materials supplied by Ameren during work. Materials that are to be used on boiler pressure parts shall be handled and stored in accordance with Contractor's approved Quality Control Manual and this specification. At end of job, Contractor is responsible for returning unused material in good condition and includes all Code markings. The Contractor shall attach Form 4983, "Return Material Tag" to all returned material along with an inventory list. Form 4983 will be provided by the Company. Any material not returned in good condition, or that cannot be accounted for, shall be replaced by the Contractor at their expense.

2.6 Materials furnished by Contractor

“Non-Code” materials, including attachments, that are supplied by Contractor shall as a minimum meet ASTM requirements. Material supplied for repairs performed under a Code Symbol Stamp, shall be ASME material and the proper documentation must accompany the material (i.e., certified material test report, P-4 Forms, etc.) Attachment lug material must be A36 or other material approved by Ameren.

3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 3.1 The Company intends to visually inspect 100% of all weldments and other non-welding areas throughout the

course of this work. The Company personnel will make these inspections in a manner as timely and expediently as possible. Ameren’s quality assurance program does not relieve Contractor from primary responsibility of quality control and Contractor shall not, in any way, relax his own quality assurance program because of Ameren’s inspection activities. Contractor shall keep Ameren personnel informed of all quality and welding related matters and be responsible for insuring that all work is acceptable. Workmanship quality shall be in accordance with Contractor's approved Quality Control Plan and this specification.

3.2 When Company personnel perform visual inspections they will focus on dimensional as well as weldment

related discontinuities. Contractor’s QC person will be responsible for visual inspections and for providing a dialogue with Ameren regarding these activities.


3.3 All slag must be removed from welds before inspections will be performed. Welds shall be free of course ripples, grooves, overlap and shall merge smoothly with surfaces being joined. The undercut on finished welds shall not exceed 1/32" or 10% of the wall thickness, whichever is less. Filing toe of weld thus creating an undercut is not permitted under any circumstances. Porosity, cracks, suck or blow holes, arc strikes, lack of fusion open surface defects, excessive push through and burn through on backing rings are not permitted.

3.4 Dimensional discontinuities including misalignment (doglegs), distortion, incorrect weld size and/or weld

profile, incorrect final dimensions and excessive weld reinforcement are not acceptable. Maximum reinforcement shall be as listed in appropriate ASME Code Section or as specified elsewhere in Ameren specification.

3.5 Radiography

3.5.1 All radiographic examination, when specified by Code or Ameren, shall be performed in accordance with Article 2 of ASME Code, Section V and interpreted in accordance with acceptance criteria set forth in applicable Code Section. If a difference of opinion exists between Ameren and Contractor on quality of weld, Ameren will have the final word. Note that unless otherwise stated in this specification or field weld schedules, 10% of all butt welds shall be radiographed. All indications shall be marked on the material surface by NDE technician.

3.5.2 If the rejection rate of radiographed welds exceeds five (5) percent, the Company shall have the

option to require radiography of all welds made and this shall be done at Contractor's expense. All radiographs and interpretation reports become Company property. Radiographs for T&M work will be billed to the Company at applicable rates.

3.5.3 Contractor shall provide written notification to Ameren's Construction Supervisor and onsite Ameren

Missouri welding inspector at least 24 hours prior to any radiography. All radiography shall be done in accordance with Radiography Safety Requirements for Ameren Power Operations (Appendix R) of this specification. Welder qualification coupons shall not be radiographed inside plant building.

3.5.4 When radiography is required, Ameren will specify the type of shot to be taken. Each radiograph will

be reviewed and approved by Ameren. Once film has been processed and interpreted by testing facility, Contractor shall provide Ameren with results and a copy of the film within 24 hours of processing. In applications where Computed Radiography (Digital Radiography) has been specified, the Contractor shall provide both a hardcopy and an electronic copy of the shots in a format approved by the Ameren Engineer.

3.5.5 In addition to the requirements outlined in ASME Code sections, excessive penetration, burn through

or melt through shall be considered as a rejected weld. Ameren shall determine locations of welds to be radiographed. The criteria for selection of these weld locations shall be to monitor welder performance (i.e., at least one weld for each welder performing this work shall be selected) and to ensure weld quality in known problem locations.

3.6 Ultrasonic Testing

All ultrasonic weld examinations, when specified by Code or Ameren, shall be performed in accordance with Article 4 of the ASME Code, Section V and interpreted in accordance with the acceptance criteria set forth in applicable Code section. If a difference of opinion exists between Ameren and Contractor on quality of weld, Ameren will have the final word. All indications shall be marked on the material surface by NDE technician.

3.7 Dye Penetrant Testing and Magnetic Particle Inspection

All dye penetrant examination and magnetic particle examinations, when specified by Code or Ameren, shall be performed in accordance with Articles 6 and 7 respectively of ASME Code, Section V and interpreted in accordance with acceptance criteria set forth in applicable Code section. If a difference of opinion exists between Ameren and Contractor, Ameren will have the final word. All indications shall be marked on the material surface by NDE technician.

3.8 Weld Repairs

All welds which are rejected by any of the above listed inspection techniques will be repaired at Contractor's expense. Upon completion of weld repairs, Contractor will retest each of them unless otherwise specified by Ameren personnel.

4.0 WORKMANSHIP


The following general procedures shall be followed by Contractor when welding activities are being performed.

4.1 Welding

4.1.1 All pressure containing welds shall be made with a minimum of two passes. Starts and stops shall be staggered on successive layers.

4.1.2 All welding activities shall comply with Ameren’s Foreign Material Exclusion (FME) guidelines.

4.2 Attachment Welds

4.2.1 Contractor shall not make any attachment welds to any pressure parts piping, headers, drums, peg-fins or tube membrane without written authorization from the Ameren Engineer. All attachment material shall be A36 unless otherwise approved by Ameren.

4.2.2 Prior to any attachments being welded, the appropriate preheat as specified on approved WPS shall

be applied. Any lifting lugs, pad eyes, etc. welded to any equipment by Contractor shall be washed off and/or ground flush to the base material and inspected by MT or PT methods. The results of the NDE shall be reviewed by the Ameren Weld Inspector. Permanent lifting lugs supplied by the material manufacturer shall be left on any new components unless the Contractor is specifically instructed by Ameren Engineer to remove them.

4.2.3 Removal, installation and replacement of all furnace wall membrane shall be performed in

accordance with Ameren Missouri’s “Recommended Welding Practice for Membrane Removal and Replacement” (RWP-12.)

4.3 Tube Removal

When removing tubes, the Contractor shall cut the tube first using a saw or cut-off wheel to minimize debris entering inside the tube. On vertical tubing runs, the Contractor shall place a piece of steel sheet metal in the lower cut before making the upper cut. With the sheet metal securely in place, thermal cutting may be used to make the upper cut. All open tube ends shall be covered securely with metal caps or plate at all times. Any debris in the tube or header shall be removed at contractor’s expense.

4.4 Pipe Removal

Saw or clam-shell cutting are the preferred methods for pipe removal. However, flame or plasma cutting maybe used provided it meets with the approval of Ameren Construction Supervisor and Ameren Weld Inspector. Care should be taken to prevent any debris from falling in the piping. Any debris in the piping shall be removed at contractor’s expense. All open ends of pipe shall be securely covered.

4.5 Cleaning

Prior to any welding, all surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly. The base metal adjacent to the joint shall be free of oil, grease, dirt, moisture, paint or other contaminants that would affect integrity of weld, for a minimum of ¾" on each side of weld joint (inside and outside), unless otherwise specified. The cleaning may be done by filing, grinding, wire brushing and/or solvent cleaning. When cleaning stainless steel, only new, uncontaminated stainless steel brushes, burrs or abrasives are allowed.

4.6 Butt Welding

All weld joint preparation shall be performed in accordance with Ameren Missouri's "Recommended Welding Practice for Butt Weld Replacement of Tube or Pipe Sections" (RWP-4). Refer to detail drawing for allowable tolerances. If joint design is other than that shown in recommended practice, it must have prior approval by Ameren Engineer.

4.7 Socket Welds

All socket welded fittings shall be made in accordance with Ameren Missouri's "Recommended Practice for Socket Welded Fittings" (RWP-5). Refer to detail drawing for allowable tolerances. Socket welds shall have a gap of approximately 1/8" between bottom of socket and end of pipe prior to welding. Scribe lines must be marked on pipe to indicate the 1/8" gap. Contractor shall not use inserts on socket welds to obtain the required 1/8" gap.


4.8 Padwelding

All padwelding of boiler pressure parts shall be performed in accordance with Ameren Missouri's “Recommended Welding Practices for Padwelding” (RWP-2).

4.9 Tube Shields

Installation of all protective tube shields and clips shall be performed in accordance with Ameren Missouri’s “Recommended Welding Practice for Tube Shields and Clips” (RWP-6).

4.10 Window Welds

The use of “window welds” is not permissible unless authorized by the Ameren Missouri Engineer. If window welds are authorized, Contractor should provide proof of welders ability to perform. Proof of proficiency will be determined by Ameren Quality personnel.

4.11 Component Replacement

For the removal, replacement, and installation of major boiler components, the Contractor shall note the following:

The elevations and dimensions shown on the general arrangement and reference drawings included with the specification are based on the original design, and do not reflect any deformation due to long term operation or undocumented changes performed during original construction or subsequent repair of the boiler. Therefore, prior to demolition the Contractor shall measure and document the location and elevation of the components to be replaced as well as those components used for reference for the subject replacement. This record shall be submitted to the Ameren Engineer prior to commencing removals. These same dimensions shall be recorded during installation of the new components and after the work is complete to document the as-built condition. All dimensional records shall be formally submitted to the Ameren engineer in accordance with the milestone schedule and shall be QC hold points depicted in the Contractor’s schedule. Any deviations shall be reported immediately to Ameren for deposition. If necessary, Ameren will provide/designate a datum or reference point in which to use for the required measurements. Ameren will also provide/identify critical dimensions to be maintained for proper installation and operation of the unit.

4.12 Water Soluble Purge Dams All use of Water Soluble Purge Dams shall be performed in accordance with Ameren Missouri’s “Recommended Welding Practice for Water Soluble Purge Dams” (RWP-11).

END OF APPENDIX W

LB-SPEC-000176 Phase 1A Sheet No. X - 1

APPENDIX X FOREIGN MATERIAL EXCLUSION (FME) REQUIREMENTS

for Non-Ameren Contract Construction Personnel 1.0 PURPOSE

A. Power plant systems must remain free of foreign material contamination to operate properly. The following is an outline of required practices that outside contract personnel must follow to prevent foreign material contamination.

2.0 PRIORITY

A. Foreign material contamination in critical power plant components is very serious and must be addressed. Failure to do so may result in millions of dollars of equipment damage and lost revenue. The consequences could be so great that Ameren will be compelled to recover damages from the Contractor.

B. In the event that foreign material is known to have entered a critical system, contact the Construction Project Lead (SPOC) immediately.

3.0 DEFINITION

A. Foreign Material Exclusion (FME) is the practice of preventing the contamination of components in power plant systems.

4.0 EQUIPMENT COVERED BY FOREIGN MATERIAL EXCLUSION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor shall follow FME practices, particularly on systems and components that are critical to the power plant such as the feedwater, condensate, steam, lubricating oil, turbine, and generator. This equipment is likely to suffer component damage if contaminated by foreign material.

B. Examples of critical components include, but are not limited to:

• Boiler tubes, headers and drums • Feedwater heaters

• Condensers • Flash tanks

• All lube oil reservoirs • All piping systems

• Pumps • Turbine shells and piping

• Generators and seal oil systems • Large electric motors

• Electrical cabinets • Switchgear

• Transformers • Compressed air systems

• In-line flow elements • Bulk storage tanks 5.0 SOURCES OF FOREIGN MATERIAL CONTAMINATION

A. Common contaminates include, but are not limited to:

• Welding & gas cutting debris • Dirt, fly ash & coal dust

• Corrosion • Contaminants found on shoes & clothing

• Metal chips, shavings & filings created by machining and repair operations

• Pens, rulers, coins, keys & other typical contents of a shirt pocket

• Materials used for cleaning • Tools

• Improper lubricants • Trash

B. Typical activities that produce foreign material include, but are not limited to:

• Drilling, cutting, grinding, machining, filing and lapping


• Welding thermal cutting activities

• Lubricants or cutting oils

• Use of tape, plugs or seals that may leave a residue

• Sandblasting

• Confined space entry

• Sweeping or using air or water to clean

• Any activity including equipment inspection and testing that requires opening a normally sealed component

6.0 GENERAL FOREIGN MATERIAL EXCLUSION PRACTICES

A. Ameren requires that all Contractors and Subcontractors have an Ameren (SPOC) approved FME plan prior to working on a critical power plant system.

B. Ameren requires that the Contractor and Subcontractors discuss FME practices with craft labor at the weekly safety meetings.

C. Contractor and Subcontractor shall maintain good housekeeping practices on the entire construction site.

This will promote a safe work environment plus promote good FME practices. Contractors that work for Ameren should realize that it is not cost effective to allow construction debris to accumulate, create a safety hazard, which could cause a lost time accident, or could cause foreign material to enter a critical system. Employ craft labor to continually keep the work site clean, not just at the end of the project.

D. The following are the Ameren minimum requirements for any Contractor foreign material exclusion plan.

1) Cover all unattended openings into components.

2) Clean dirt, coal, fly ash, or any other form of debris from around covers, caps, and other devices before opening for inspection or servicing.

3) When opening critical components, ensure areas above these components are clean so no debris will drop into openings of these components. If work will be done overhead while the component is open, cover with tarps, etc. to prevent debris that is dislodged or dropped from entering the component.

4) Ensure that welding electrodes, stubs, and broken flux coating material is removed from components.

5) Clean the work area before beginning work; this may include wash down or vacuuming of the area.

6) Orient work so that debris will not drop into components.

7) Openings on the main turbine, generator, hotwell pumps, boiler circulating pumps, high-pressure boiler feed pumps, etc., shall be covered during maintenance activities.

8) All piping and tubing must be free of foreign material before and after installation.

9) Do not introduce material into components that may produce corrosion.

10) Shot and sand blasting will only be done in areas that can be adequately cleaned.

11) Use only approved solvents for cleaning.

12) Use only approved lubricants.

13) Use approved tapes, plugs, or seals. Some tapes may leave residue (adhesive) that can cause damage.

14) Use approved procedures when flushing systems.


15) Define a “FME work area” around turbines, generators, lube oil tanks, or other areas specifically designated by the specification with barricade tape and limit access of personnel, tools and materials to these areas.

16) Track all tools, parts, and materials that are allowed into the FME work area. If something cannot be accounted for, follow a systematic procedure to insure that missing item can be accounted for without causing further problems.

17) Do not allow personal items such as jewelry, change, pens, etc. into the FME area. No material should be allowed in the FME area unless it is absolutely necessary.

18) Secure all tools, safety glasses, badges, gloves, and other loose items with lanyards, tape, or other devices.

19) Stage tools, parts, and materials outside the FME area. Remove all packaging and other unnecessary material before entering the FME area.

20) Inspect tools for parts that might come off the tool during use. Look for items such as loose handles, splintered wood parts, loose wire brush bristles. Clean all tools, materials, and parts before they are allowed into the FME area.

21) Limit the use of clear materials such as face shield visors in the FME area. They will be difficult to see if they are misplaced.

22) Use vacuum or exhaust systems to remove all flyash and any generated airborne debris from painting, blasting, grinding, etc.

23) When cutting wires, control the ends that are snipped off.

24) Control all metal debris (screws, connectors, wire strippings, etc.) in all electrical enclosures.

25) Account for all rags, cushions, cardboard, etc., that are used in an FME area.

26) Do not use excessive lubricants. The excess lubricants may collect dirt, ash and other debris.

27) If you suspect that anything fell into the tube, use a video camera or other means of inspection prior to closing components to ensure FME.

a. In vertical runs of boiler tubing in the radiant reheater, run a camera up and down the tube, to the nearest header.

b. In small bore tubing at Sioux, insert a steel cable of known length from the lower tube cut line down to the nearest header.

c. In water wall tubing, water shall be used to clear ash in the tubes. Contact the Ameren SPOC if this is not possible due to the length or geometry of the tube.

28) Follow Ameren welding practices for removal of tubes and piping.

29) All open pipes, tubes or systems, regardless of whether they are new, to be re-used or wrecked out, must have FME covers in place. This rule applies to material lying on the floor, hanging in place or staged in racks, store rooms or lay down areas. The only exception is when the tube or pipe is completely disconnected from the system and color coded with bright orange or pink paint indicating that it is scrap.

30) FME covers, when subject to high traffic, abrasion or other situations that would cause them to fall off or become damaged (such as condensate or residual water draining out of the tube, pipe or system) shall be made of steel, or aluminum (excludes soda cans). For large diameter openings (12" or larger) plywood, canvas or nylon bags shall be used and marked as “NO STEP.” For openings subject to fire fall, grinding, arc air, or any other thermal operation, steel caps shall be used. Large diameter FME covers subject to the support of human weight shall conform to OSHA standards.


31) Water soluble paper, if properly utilized may be used as FME protection during tube or pipe joint prep operations. Sponges may also be used as FME protection during tube or pipe joint operations so long as a sponge log is maintained and implemented. Water soluble cones shall not be used as FME prevention during joint prep operations.

32) On vertical runs of tube or pipe, the first cut must be at the bottom using an abrasive cutoff wheel or other non-thermal means. Then a piece of sheet metal shall be inserted into the kerf created. The upper cut can then be made using a thermal method.

a. For window welds in boiler tubing, follow RWP-1, including the use of FME discs. The discs are available in the Ameren store room for multiple tubes sizes. Contact the Ameren SPOC in advance to procure the proper size FME discs prior to cutting the tubes.

33) When thermal cutting is to be used to penetrate a sealed system such as headers, tanks, water boxes or large piping, it should be included in the FME plan (6.0A) and presented to the quality Inspection or Construction Project Lead (SPOC) for approval prior to the start of work.

34) FME plan requires the use of a FME Barrier Log, Foreign Material Drop List, and Final Closure Inspection signoff record per AUE-FRM-ADM4217-01 and AUE-FRM-ADM4217-02 provided below.

FME BARRIER LOG JR # Equipment

FME Barrier Location Installed Date & Time Installed

Date & Time Removed

Removed By (Initial)

All FME Control Devices must be retrieved and accounted for.

FOREIGN MATERIAL DROP LIST JR # Equipment

Item Dropped Location Date & Time

Dropped Date & Time

Retrieved Retrieved By

(Initial)

All dropped items have been retrieved and accounted for.


FINAL CLOSURE INSPECTION

I certify that the system/equipment has been inspected prior to closure and all foreign material has been removed.

SIGNATURE DATE

Craft Employee:

Supervisor: Forward to Planning when work is complete.

35) Failure to follow FME procedure will be addressed through the Deficiency Reporting system described

here:

Ameren

Deficiency Notification and Corrective Action Process

The following paragraphs describe the system used by Ameren’s Quality Inspection Supervisors to correct deficiencies identified during a major boiler outage. Depending on the urgency and severity of the infraction, one or more of the steps may be bypassed.

• 1st Violation: When a deficiency is identified, a verbal request for corrective action will be given to the first line supervisor and general foreman. A full accounting of issues will be documented in the weld inspector’s daily log.

• 2nd Violation: If compliance has not been achieved through the first verbal request for corrective action, a second verbal request will be directed to the General Forman, job site Superintendent and the Ameren Construction Supervisor. A full accounting of issues will be documented in the weld inspector’s daily log.

• 3rd Violation: Upon the third violation a deficiency report will be generated. A deficiency report describes the violation and may include digital images documenting the violation. The deficiency report requires a written response from the contractor within the time frame noted on the deficiency report. The deficiency report will require the contractor to describe in writing the immediate remedial corrective action(s) taken and the long term steps taken to prevent a recurrence. Deficiency reports will be distributed electronically to the job site superintendent and the following Ameren management personnel: Manager-Quality Management Services, Manager-Project Management, Supervising Engineer-Technical Support, plant manager, plant technical support superintendent, boiler engineer(s), QC coordinator, PCM superintendent, project engineer (Project Engineering), Project Engineering supervising engineer, construction supervisors, and quality inspection supervisor (opposite shift). All deficiency reports issued will become part of the contractor appraisal.

• 4th Violation: If the deficiency report fails to bring about the desired corrective action, work will be stopped until issues are adequately addressed.

END OF APPENDIX X